JP2018094038A - Device for game - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a device and the like for games capable of improving presentation effect of a notification of information on games.SOLUTION: A data display device 400 can display information on games of a corresponding game machine. The data display device 400 includes: a liquid crystal display unit 430 in a liquid crystal display type; a segment display unit 440 in a segment display type different from the liquid crystal display type; and a processing unit for controlling each display of the liquid crystal display unit 430 and the segment display unit 440. In addition, the processing unit can perform a control for displaying information on games of the corresponding game machine in a liquid crystal segment coordination display pattern for displaying a coordinated display between the liquid crystal display unit 430 and the segment display unit 440 and in a liquid crystal segment independent display pattern for displaying an independent display between the liquid crystal display unit 430 and the segment display unit 440.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 48

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming apparatus capable of displaying information related to a game of a corresponding gaming machine.

  In stores such as pachinko and slot stores, game devices (information display devices) that can display information related to gaming of gaming machines are generally installed in correspondence with gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines. It is.

  In relation to this, for example, Patent Document 1 discloses a gaming apparatus capable of performing a big hit display according to a big hit signal output from a gaming machine.

JP 2016-112244 A

  By the way, the conventional gaming apparatus performs a simple effect such as displaying a big hit in response to a big hit signal as disclosed in Patent Document 1, or displaying an image or video in response to the occurrence of a big hit or the like. Is almost. For this reason, there is a problem that the effect of the effect is insufficient in the sense of notifying the player of information related to the game.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming apparatus or the like that can enhance the effect of informing information related to gaming.

  The present invention employs the following means in order to solve the above problems. In addition, although the code | symbol used in description of the form for implementing invention mentioned later and drawing is added for reference, the component of this invention is not limited to what attached | subjected this code | symbol.

First, regarding the invention relating to the first gaming device,
The invention according to means 1
A gaming device (such as a data display device 400) capable of displaying information (game number of jackpots, number of revolutions, number of balls, etc.) relating to a game of a corresponding gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1, slot machine 1 ′, etc.)
A first display unit (liquid crystal display unit 430, etc.) by a first display method (liquid crystal display method, EL display method, dot display method, etc.);
A second display unit (such as a right seg display unit 440A) by a second display method (such as a segment display method) different from the first display method;
Display control means (such as the processing unit 410) for controlling the display of each of the first display unit and the second display unit;
With
The display control means includes a first display pattern (such as a liquid crystal seg-linked display pattern) that performs display linked with the first display unit and the second display unit, the first display unit, and the second display unit. The second display pattern (liquid crystal seg independent display pattern, etc.) that performs independent display in the first display unit and the second display unit can be controlled to display information related to the game of the corresponding gaming machine. (Various production setting data in FIG. 56, etc.),
This is a gaming apparatus characterized by the above.
According to this, for the two display units of the first display unit and the second display unit with different display methods, the information about the game of the corresponding gaming machine is displayed by the first display pattern and the second display pattern. It is possible to enhance the effect of notifying information related to the game.

Further, as an invention related to means 2,
A gaming device according to means 1, comprising:
A third display unit (left seg display unit 440B, etc.) according to the second display method,
The display control means can execute control to display information related to the game of the corresponding gaming machine on the third display unit based on the first display pattern and the second display pattern (the various effects shown in FIG. 56). Setting data)
You may comprise the game device characterized by this.
According to this, in addition to the two display units of the first display unit and the second display unit, for the third display unit by the same display method as the second display unit, by the first display pattern and the second display pattern, By displaying information related to the game of the corresponding gaming machine, it is possible to further enhance the effect of informing the information related to the game.

Further, as an invention related to means 3,
A gaming device according to means 1 or 2, wherein
The display unit according to the second display method can display information by a method with high visibility from a distance compared to the first display method (7-segment display, high brightness, wide viewing angle, etc.). You may comprise the game apparatus characterized by these.
According to this, not only a player who plays with a corresponding gaming machine but also a player who exists at a distant position can make the information displayed on the second display unit and the third display unit visible. .

In addition, as an invention related to means 4,
A gaming device according to means 2, comprising:
The second display unit and the third display unit are rotatable with respect to the display surface constituting the first display unit (the right seg display unit 440A and the left seg display unit 440B constitute the liquid crystal display unit 430. It can be rotated with respect to the display surface)
At least one of the second display unit and the third display unit is configured to be rotatable so as to cover the first display unit (right segment display unit 440A and left segment display unit). 440B and at least one of the display units can be rotated so as to cover the liquid crystal display unit 430),
You may comprise the game device characterized by this.
According to this, by turning so that at least one of the second display unit and the third display unit covers the first display unit, the player can view the information displayed on the display unit. It can be made visible.

Further, as an invention related to means 5,
A gaming device according to means 2, comprising:
The second display unit and the third display unit are configured to be rotatable with respect to a display surface constituting the first display unit (the right seg display unit 440A and the left seg display unit 440B are liquid crystal displays). Rotating with respect to the display surface constituting the portion 430),
At least one of the second display unit and the third display unit is configured to be rotatable so as to face the corresponding gaming machine (the right seg display unit 440A and the left seg unit). At least one of the display units 440B can be rotated so as to face either the left or right direction of the corresponding gaming machine 1),
You may comprise the game device characterized by this.
According to this, by rotating at least one display part of the second display part and the third display part so as to face the side of the corresponding gaming machine, the information displayed on the display part is changed. Visible to surrounding players.

Further, as an invention related to means 6,
A gaming device according to any one of means 1 to 5, wherein
The second display unit is configured to be movable so as to be directed to the side of the corresponding gaming machine (the right seg display unit 440A is movable so as to face the right direction of the corresponding gaming machine 1). A gaming device may be configured.
According to this, by operating the second display unit so as to face the side of the corresponding gaming machine, information displayed on the second display unit can be viewed by surrounding players.

As an invention relating to means 7,
A gaming device according to means 2, comprising:
The second display unit is configured to be movable so as to face one side of the corresponding gaming machine (eg, the right seg display unit 440A is movable to face the right direction of the corresponding gaming machine 1).
The third display unit is configured to be movable toward the other side of the corresponding gaming machine (the left seg display unit 440B is movable so as to face the left direction of the corresponding gaming machine 1).
You may comprise the game device characterized by this.
According to this, by operating the second display unit to face one side of the corresponding gaming machine, and operating the third display unit to face the other side of the corresponding gaming machine, The information displayed on the display unit can be visually recognized by players in both the left and right directions.

Further, as an invention related to means 8,
A gaming device according to any one of means 1 to 7, wherein
In the first display pattern, the display control means may control to display information about the possessed game value owned by the player (such as the number of possessed balls). .
According to this, it is possible to make it possible for the player to confirm information related to the possessed game value owned by the player by displaying the information linked with the first display unit and the second display unit.

Further, as an invention related to means 9,
A gaming device according to any one of means 1 to 8, wherein
The display control means outputs information output from the corresponding gaming machine (information specified from the gaming machine signal output from the corresponding gaming machine 1) or output from a predetermined external device (such as the hall computer 600). Switching control for switching between the first display pattern and the second display pattern can be executed based on the information to be performed (information specified from the display pattern switching signal).
You may comprise the game device characterized by this.
According to this, based on information output from the corresponding gaming machine or information output from a predetermined external device, it is possible to switch a display pattern for displaying information on the game of the corresponding gaming machine.

Further, as an invention related to means 10,
A gaming device according to any one of means 1-9,
An operation unit (operation unit 420 etc.) is further provided,
The display control means can execute switching control for switching between the first display pattern and the second display pattern based on an operation (such as a display pattern switching operation) on the operation unit.
You may comprise the game device characterized by this.
According to this, it is possible to switch the display pattern for displaying information related to the game of the corresponding gaming machine based on the operation on the operation unit.

Further, as an invention related to means 11,
A gaming device according to any one of means 1 to 10, wherein
Start operation (information recording start operation: non-contact communication, button press operation, icon touch operation, etc.) and end operation (information recording type end operation: non-contact communication, button press operation, icon touch operation, etc.) Information about the game after accepting the start operation can be stored as personal game information can be specified, the personal game information can be updated according to the establishment of an update condition according to the game, Based on accepting the end operation, it is possible to output information (access information to the server 980, personal game information, etc.) that can identify personal game information (display, output by non-contact communication, etc.),
First processing means (processing unit 410, etc.) capable of executing a first process (information recording start preparation process, etc.) based on the start operation;
Second processing means (processing unit 410, etc.) capable of executing second processing (information recording end preparation processing, etc.) based on the end operation;
When the update condition is satisfied during execution of one of the first process and the second process, the update of the personal game information can be restricted (for example, the personal game information is not updated). Update restriction means (processing unit 410, etc.)
You may comprise the game device characterized by further providing these.
According to this, when the update condition is satisfied during execution of either one of the first process based on the start operation and the second process based on the end operation, the update of the personal game information is restricted. Thus, it becomes possible to appropriately update the personal game information.

Further, as an invention related to means 12,
A gaming device according to any one of means 1 to 10, wherein
Start operation (information recording start operation: non-contact communication, button press operation, icon touch operation, etc.) and end operation (information recording type end operation: non-contact communication, button press operation, icon touch operation, etc.) Information about the game after accepting the start operation can be stored as personal game information can be specified, the personal game information can be updated according to the establishment of an update condition according to the game, Based on accepting the end operation, it is possible to output information (access information to the server 980, personal game information, etc.) that can identify personal game information (two-dimensional code, non-contact communication, etc.),
First processing means (processing unit 410, etc.) capable of executing a first process (information recording start preparation process, etc.) based on the start operation;
Second processing means (processing unit 410, etc.) capable of executing second processing (information recording end preparation processing, etc.) based on the end operation;
When the update condition is satisfied during execution of one of the first process and the second process, the process being executed can be limited (for example, the process being executed is forcibly terminated). Processing restriction means (such as the processing unit 410);
You may comprise the game device characterized by further providing these.
According to this, when an update condition is satisfied during execution of either one of the first process based on the start operation and the second process based on the end operation, the process being executed is limited. It becomes possible to update the personal game information appropriately.

As an invention relating to means 13,
A gaming device according to any one of means 1 to 12, comprising:
The first display unit can display numerical information (pachinko gaming machine: number of balls, number of balls, slot machine: number of medals, number of medals, etc.),
The display control means is used for first update display control (additional update display control, etc.) based on updating of numerical information that is beneficial to a player who plays with the corresponding gaming machine, and for updating numerical information that is disadvantageous to the player. The second update display control (subtracted update display control or the like) can be executed, and the update mode is different between when the first update display control is executed and when the second update display control is executed ( Such as changing the update interval of the numerical information, changing the scrolling mode, changing the presence or absence of intermediate progress display),
You may comprise the game device characterized by this.
According to this, when performing the 1st update display control based on the update of the numerical information which becomes profitable for the player who plays with the corresponding gaming machine, and the second update based on the update of the numerical information which is disadvantageous to the player The monotonousness of the display mode of numerical information can be eliminated by making the update mode different between when display control is executed.

In addition, as an invention related to the above means,
Based on time information (time information of the clock unit 470, time information of the hall computer 600, etc.), the second display unit is operated (the right seg display unit 440A is operated by rotating the right door unit 403A). You may comprise the game device characterized by further providing the operation effect execution means (The process part 410, the door rotation control part 445, etc.) which can perform the operation effect by.
According to this, it is possible to further enhance the effect by performing the operation effect by operating the second display unit based on the time information.

In addition, as an invention related to the above means,
The operation effect executing means may constitute a gaming apparatus characterized in that the operation effect can be executed in a plurality of modes (various effect setting data in FIG. 56, etc.).
According to this, the effect can be further enhanced by executing the operation effect in a plurality of modes.

In addition, as an invention related to the above means,
A light emitting unit (e.g., light emitting unit 480) corresponding to the second display unit;
The operation effect executing means may constitute a gaming apparatus characterized in that in the operation effect, a light emission effect (light emission effect, irradiation effect, etc.) for causing the light emitting unit to emit light can be executed.
According to this, in the operation effect, the effect can be further enhanced by executing the light emission effect that causes the light emitting unit to emit light.

In addition, as an invention related to the above means,
Based on the time information (time information of the clock unit 470, time information of the hall computer 600, etc.), the second display unit and the third display unit are operated (the right door unit 403A and the left door unit 403B are rotated). The game further comprises operation effect execution means (processing unit 410, door rotation control unit 445, etc.) capable of executing an operation effect by operating the right segment display unit 440A and the left segment display unit 440B). An apparatus may be configured.
According to this, by performing the operation effect by operating the second display unit and the third display unit based on the timing information, it is possible to enhance the interest of notifying information about the game.

In addition, as an invention related to the above means,
The operation effect executing means may constitute a gaming apparatus characterized in that the operation effect can be executed in a plurality of modes (various effect setting data in FIG. 56, etc.).
According to this, an interest can be further heightened by performing an operation effect by a plurality of modes.

In addition, as an invention related to the above means,
A light emitting section (second display area LED section 482 and the like) corresponding to each of the second display section and the third display section;
The operation effect executing means may constitute a gaming apparatus characterized in that in the operation effect, a light emission effect (light emission effect, irradiation effect, etc.) for causing the light emitting unit to emit light can be executed.
According to this, it is possible to further enhance the interest of notifying information related to the game by executing the light emission effect of causing the light emitting units corresponding to the second display unit and the third display unit to emit light in the operation effect.

Next, regarding the invention relating to the second gaming device,
The invention according to means 1
Information related to the game of the corresponding gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1, slot machine 1 ′, etc.) (number of big hits, number of revolutions, number of balls etc.) can be displayed, and start operation (information recording start operation: non-contact communication) Button press operation, icon touch operation, etc.) and end operation (information recording end operation: non-contact communication, button press operation, icon touch operation, etc.) can be received, and after the start operation is received Information related to the game can be specified and stored as personal game information, the personal game information can be updated in accordance with the establishment of an update condition according to the game, and the personal game Information that can specify information (access information to the server 980, personal game information, etc.) that can be output (display, output by non-contact communication, etc.) (data display device 400, etc.) There,
First processing means (processing unit 410, etc.) capable of executing a first process (information recording start preparation process, etc.) based on the start operation;
Second processing means (processing unit 410, etc.) capable of executing second processing (information recording end preparation processing, etc.) based on the end operation;
When the update condition is satisfied during execution of one of the first process and the second process, the update of the personal game information can be restricted (for example, the personal game information is not updated). Update restriction means (processing unit 410, etc.)
It is provided with the game apparatus characterized by the above-mentioned.
According to this, when the update condition is satisfied during execution of either one of the first process based on the start operation and the second process based on the end operation, the update of the personal game information is restricted. Thus, it becomes possible to appropriately update the personal game information.

The invention according to means 2
Information related to the game of the corresponding gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1, slot machine 1 ′, etc.) (number of big hits, number of revolutions, number of balls etc.) can be displayed, and start operation (information recording start operation: non-contact communication) Button press operation, icon touch operation, etc.) and end operation (information recording end operation: non-contact communication, button press operation, icon touch operation, etc.) can be received, and after the start operation is received Information related to the game can be specified and stored as personal game information, the personal game information can be updated in accordance with the establishment of an update condition according to the game, and the personal game Information that can specify information (access information to the server 980, personal game information, etc.) that can be output (display, output by non-contact communication, etc.) (data display device 400, etc.) There,
First processing means (processing unit 410, etc.) capable of executing a first process (information recording start preparation process, etc.) based on the start operation;
Second processing means (processing unit 410, etc.) capable of executing second processing (information recording end preparation processing, etc.) based on the end operation;
When the update condition is satisfied during execution of one of the first process and the second process, the process being executed can be limited (for example, the process being executed is forcibly terminated). Processing restriction means (such as the processing unit 410);
It is provided with the game apparatus characterized by the above-mentioned.
According to this, when an update condition is satisfied during execution of either one of the first process based on the start operation and the second process based on the end operation, the process being executed is limited. It becomes possible to update the personal game information appropriately.

Further, as an invention related to means 3,
A gaming device according to means 1, comprising:
Even if the update of the individual game information is restricted by the update restriction means, the information to be displayed can be updated based on the information about the game of the corresponding gaming machine (when the update of the personal game history information is restricted) Even so, the information to be displayed on the liquid crystal display unit 430 may be updated, etc.).
According to this, even when the update of the personal game information is restricted, the player confirms the correct game information by display by updating the information to be displayed based on the information related to the game of the corresponding gaming machine. Can be possible.

In addition, as an invention related to means 4,
A gaming device according to means 1 or 3, wherein
When the update of the personal game information is restricted by the update restriction means, the personal game information after the restriction on the update is released with the information on the game of the corresponding gaming machine at the time of starting the process being executed as the reference information (For example, updating personal game history information on the basis of game information at the time when the preparatory process being executed is started when the update of personal game history information is restricted) It may be configured.
According to this, when the update of the personal game information is restricted, the information about the game of the corresponding gaming machine at the time of starting the process being executed is used as the reference information, and the personal game information is released after the update restriction is released. By updating, it becomes possible to acquire accurate individual game information.

Further, as an invention related to means 5,
A gaming device according to any one of means 1, 3 and 4,
When the update of the personal game information is restricted by the update restricting means, the personal game information is changed based on the information about the game of the corresponding gaming machine in the period from the restriction of the update of the personal game information to the release. You may comprise the game apparatus characterized by further providing the correction | amendment means (processing part 410 grade | etc.,) Which can correct | amend.
According to this, even if the update of the personal game information is restricted, the personal game information is based on the information related to the game of the corresponding gaming machine in the period from the restriction of the update of the personal game information to the release. It is possible to acquire accurate personal game information by correcting the above.

Further, as an invention related to means 6,
A gaming device according to means 5, comprising:
The correction means is information acquired from the corresponding gaming machine (such as correction information that can be specified from the gaming machine signal output from the corresponding gaming machine 1) or information acquired from an external device (correction acquired from the hall computer 600). The game device may be configured to correct the personal game information based on the game information.
According to this, based on the information acquired from the corresponding gaming machine or the information acquired from the external device, the personal gaming information can be appropriately corrected.

As an invention relating to means 7,
A gaming device according to means 2, comprising:
Predetermined notification (display of warning message, sound output, display for prompting acceptance of operation corresponding to restricted processing, sound output, etc.) can be executed when the processing being executed is restricted by the processing restriction means A gaming device characterized by further comprising a notification means (liquid crystal display unit 430, sound output unit 450, etc.) may be configured.
According to this, it is possible to notify the player that the processing being executed is limited.

Further, as an invention related to means 8,
A gaming device according to means 7, comprising:
The notification means executes a notification for prompting another acceptance of an operation corresponding to the restricted process (a display for prompting another acceptance of the operation corresponding to the restricted process, a sound output, or the like) as the predetermined notice. You may comprise the game device characterized by this.
According to this, when the process being executed is restricted, the player can be prompted to perform the operation corresponding to the restricted process again.

Further, as an invention related to means 9,
A gaming device according to any one of means 1 to 8, wherein
It further comprises external output processing means (such as a processing unit 410) capable of executing an external output process for outputting the latest personal game information to an external device (such as the hall computer 600) when the end operation is not accepted. A gaming device may be configured.
According to this, when the end operation is not accepted, the latest personal game information can be output to the external device. As a result, even if the user has forgotten the end operation, the user can acquire personal game information from the external device.

Further, as an invention related to means 10,
A gaming device according to any one of means 1 to 9, wherein
The start operation can be accepted by communication with a user terminal owned by the user,
Notification processing means (processing unit) capable of executing notification processing for notifying an external device (such as the hall computer 600) when an abnormality occurs in communication with the user terminal when receiving the start operation 410, etc.) may further be provided.
According to this, when an abnormality occurs in communication with the user terminal when accepting the start operation, it is possible to notify the external device to that effect. As a result, even if communication fails during the start operation, it is possible to manage correct personal game information on the external device side.

Further, as an invention related to means 11,
A gaming device according to any one of means 1 to 10, wherein
A first display unit (liquid crystal display unit 430 and the like);
A second display unit (such as a segment display unit 440);
Display control means (such as the processing unit 410) for controlling the display of each of the first display unit and the second display unit;
Further comprising
The display control means includes a first display pattern (such as a liquid crystal seg-linked display pattern) that performs display linked with the first display unit and the second display unit, the first display unit, and the second display unit. The second display pattern (liquid crystal seg independent display pattern, etc.) that performs independent display on the first display unit and the second display unit can be controlled to display information related to the game of the corresponding gaming machine. , Controlling to display at least a part of the personal game information on the first display unit (various effect setting data in FIG. 56, etc.)
Among the information displayed on the first display unit and the second display unit, information that can specify the information displayed on the first display unit (access information to the server 980, personal game information, etc.) can be output. (Display, output by non-contact communication, etc.)
You may comprise the game device characterized by this.
According to this, information about a game is displayed on the two display units of the first display unit and the second display unit by displaying information about the game of the corresponding gaming machine with the first display pattern and the second display pattern. The notification effect of the notification can be enhanced.

Further, as an invention related to means 12,
A gaming device according to any one of means 1 to 11, wherein
A movable part (such as a segment display part 440);
Based on time information (time information of the clock unit 470, time information of the hall computer 600, etc.), an operation effect execution means (such as the processing unit 410) capable of executing an operation effect by operating the movable part;
You may comprise the game device characterized by further providing these.
According to this, by performing the operation effect by operating the movable part based on the timing information, it is possible to enhance the interest of notifying information about the game.

As an invention relating to means 13,
A gaming device according to any one of means 1 to 12, comprising:
A display unit (liquid crystal display unit 430, seg display unit 440, etc.) capable of displaying numerical information (pachinko gaming machine 1: number of difference balls, number of possession balls, slot machine 1 ': number of difference medals, number of possession medals, etc.) ,
First update display control (additional update display control, etc.) based on the update of numerical information that is profitable for a player who plays with the corresponding gaming machine, and second update display control based on the update of numerical information that is disadvantageous to the player Display control means (processing unit 410 etc.) capable of executing (subtraction update display control etc.);
Further comprising
The display control means changes the update mode between the case where the first update display control is executed and the case where the second update display control is executed (the scroll mode where the numerical information update cycle is changed). Different, or whether the progress is displayed or not)
You may comprise the game device characterized by this.
According to this, when performing the 1st update display control based on the update of the numerical information which becomes profitable for the player who plays with the corresponding gaming machine, and the second update based on the update of the numerical information which is disadvantageous to the player The monotonousness of the display mode of numerical information can be eliminated by making the update mode different between when display control is executed.

Next, regarding the invention relating to the third gaming device,
The invention according to means 1
A gaming device (such as a data display device 400) capable of displaying information (game number of jackpots, number of revolutions, number of balls, etc.) relating to a game of a corresponding gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1, slot machine 1 ′, etc.)
A movable part (such as a segment display part 440);
Based on time information (time information of the clock unit 470, time information of the hall computer 600, etc.), an operation effect execution means (such as the processing unit 410) capable of executing an operation effect by operating the movable part;
It is provided with the game apparatus characterized by the above-mentioned.
According to this, by performing the operation effect by operating the movable part based on the timing information, it is possible to enhance the interest of notifying information about the game.

Further, as an invention related to means 2,
A gaming device according to means 1, comprising:
The operation effect executing means may constitute a gaming apparatus characterized in that the operation effect can be executed in a plurality of modes (various effect setting data in FIG. 56, etc.).
According to this, an interest can be further heightened by performing an operation effect by a plurality of modes.

Further, as an invention related to means 3,
A gaming device according to means 2, comprising:
A light emitting part (light emitting part 480 etc.) is further provided,
The operation effect executing means may constitute a gaming apparatus characterized in that in the operation effect, a light emission effect (light emission effect, irradiation effect, etc.) for causing the light emitting unit to emit light can be executed.
According to this, an interest can be further heightened by performing the light emission effect which makes a light emission part light-emit in an operation effect.

In addition, as an invention related to means 4,
A gaming device described in any one of means 1 to 3,
The operation effect execution means is based on a gaming machine signal output from a corresponding gaming machine (such as a jackpot signal output from the pachinko gaming machine 1) or an owned gaming value owned by the player (such as the number of balls). You may comprise the game device characterized by being able to perform the said operation effect.
According to this, the entertainment can be further enhanced by executing the operation effect based on the gaming machine output from the corresponding gaming machine or the owned gaming value owned by the player.

Further, as an invention related to means 5,
A gaming device described in means 4, comprising:
The operation effect execution means includes:
A first action effect execution means (such as the processing unit 410) capable of selectively executing an action effect based on the timing information and an action effect based on the gaming machine signal;
A second motion effect execution means (such as the processing unit 410) capable of selectively executing the motion effect based on the timing information and the motion effect based on the possessed game value;
Having
You may comprise the game device characterized by this.
According to this, it is possible to preferentially execute any one of the operation effects based on the time information and the operation effects based on the gaming machine signal. In addition, it is possible to preferentially execute any one of the operation effects based on the time information and the operation effects based on the possessed game value.

Further, as an invention related to means 6,
A gaming device according to any one of means 1 to 5, wherein
You may comprise the game apparatus characterized by further providing the setting means (processing part 410 grade | etc.,) Which can set about the said motion effect.
According to this, it is possible to perform the setting related to the operation effect at the store side or the player side.

As an invention relating to means 7,
A gaming device described in means 6, wherein
The setting means may constitute a gaming device characterized in that the presence / absence of execution of the motion effect by the motion effect execution means can be set.
According to this, it is possible to set whether or not to perform an operation effect.

Further, as an invention related to means 8,
A gaming device described in means 6 or 7,
The setting means may constitute a gaming apparatus characterized in that the timing of execution of the motion effect by the motion effect execution means can be set.
According to this, it is possible to set which timing to execute the operation effect.

Further, as an invention related to means 9,
A gaming device according to any one of means 6 to 8, comprising:
The setting means may constitute a gaming device characterized in that it can set the mode of execution of the motion effect by the motion effect execution means.
According to this, it is possible to set in what manner the motion effect is executed.

Further, as an invention related to means 10,
A gaming device according to any one of means 1-9,
A first display unit (liquid crystal display unit 430, etc.) by a first display method (liquid crystal display method, EL display method, dot display method, etc.);
A second display unit (such as a right seg display unit 440A) by a second display method (such as a segment display method) different from the first display method;
Display control means (such as the processing unit 410) for controlling the display of each of the first display unit and the second display unit;
Further comprising
The display control means includes a first display pattern (such as a liquid crystal seg-linked display pattern) that performs display linked with the first display unit and the second display unit, the first display unit, and the second display unit. The second display pattern (liquid crystal seg independent display pattern, etc.) that performs independent display in the first display unit and the second display unit can be controlled to display information related to the game of the corresponding gaming machine. (Various production setting data in FIG. 56, etc.),
You may comprise the game device characterized by this.
According to this, for the two display units of the first display unit and the second display unit with different display methods, the information about the game of the corresponding gaming machine is displayed by the first display pattern and the second display pattern. It is possible to enhance the effect of notifying information related to the game.

Further, as an invention related to means 11,
A gaming device according to any one of means 1 to 10, wherein
Information related to the game of the corresponding gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1, slot machine 1 ′, etc.) (number of big hits, number of revolutions, number of balls etc.) can be displayed, and start operation (information recording start operation: non-contact communication) Button press operation, icon touch operation, etc.) and end operation (information recording end operation: non-contact communication, button press operation, icon touch operation, etc.) can be received, and after the start operation is received Information related to the game can be specified and stored as personal game information, the personal game information can be updated in accordance with the establishment of an update condition according to the game, and the personal game Information that can identify information (access information to the server 980, personal game information, etc.) can be output (display, output by non-contact communication, etc.)
First processing means (processing unit 410, etc.) capable of executing a first process (information recording start preparation process, etc.) based on the start operation;
Second processing means (processing unit 410, etc.) capable of executing second processing (information recording end preparation processing, etc.) based on the end operation;
When the update condition is satisfied during execution of one of the first process and the second process, the update of the personal game information can be restricted (for example, the personal game information is not updated). Update restriction means (processing unit 410, etc.)
You may comprise the game device characterized by further providing these.
According to this, when the update condition is satisfied during execution of either one of the first process based on the start operation and the second process based on the end operation, the update of the personal game information is restricted. Thus, it becomes possible to appropriately update the personal game information.

Further, as an invention related to means 12,
A gaming device according to any one of means 1 to 10, wherein
Information related to the game of the corresponding gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1, slot machine 1 ′, etc.) (number of big hits, number of revolutions, number of balls etc.) can be displayed, and start operation (information recording start operation: non-contact communication) Button press operation, icon touch operation, etc.) and end operation (information recording end operation: non-contact communication, button press operation, icon touch operation, etc.) can be received, and after the start operation is received Information related to the game can be specified and stored as personal game information, the personal game information can be updated in accordance with the establishment of an update condition according to the game, and the personal game Information that can identify information (access information to the server 980, personal game information, etc.) can be output (display, output by non-contact communication, etc.)
First processing means (processing unit 410, etc.) capable of executing a first process (information recording start preparation process, etc.) based on the start operation;
Second processing means (processing unit 410, etc.) capable of executing second processing (information recording end preparation processing, etc.) based on the end operation;
When the update condition is satisfied during execution of one of the first process and the second process, the process being executed can be limited (for example, the process being executed is forcibly terminated). Processing restriction means (such as the processing unit 410);
You may comprise the game device characterized by further providing these.
According to this, when an update condition is satisfied during execution of either one of the first process based on the start operation and the second process based on the end operation, the process being executed is limited. It becomes possible to update the personal game information appropriately.

As an invention relating to means 13,
A gaming device according to any one of means 1 to 12, comprising:
Display units (liquid crystal display unit 430, seg display unit 440, etc.) capable of displaying numerical information (pachinko machines: number of balls, number of balls, etc., slot machine: number of medals, number of coins, etc.);
First update display control (additional update display control, etc.) based on the update of numerical information that is profitable for a player who plays with the corresponding gaming machine, and second update display control based on the update of numerical information that is disadvantageous to the player Display control means (processing unit 410 etc.) capable of executing (subtraction update display control etc.);
Further comprising
The display control means changes the update mode between the case where the first update display control is executed and the case where the second update display control is executed (the scroll mode where the numerical information update cycle is changed). Different, or whether the progress is displayed or not)
You may comprise the game device characterized by this.
According to this, when performing the 1st update display control based on the update of the numerical information which becomes profitable for the player who plays with the corresponding gaming machine, and the second update based on the update of the numerical information which is disadvantageous to the player The monotonousness of the display mode of numerical information can be eliminated by making the update mode different between when display control is executed.

Next, regarding the invention relating to the fourth gaming device,
The invention according to means 1
A gaming device (data display device 400, etc.) provided corresponding to a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1, slot machine 1 ′, etc.),
Display units (liquid crystal display unit 430, seg display unit 440, etc.) capable of displaying numerical information (pachinko machines: number of balls, number of balls, etc., slot machine: number of medals, number of coins, etc.);
First update display control (additional update display control, etc.) based on the update of numerical information that is profitable for a player who plays with the corresponding gaming machine, and second update display control based on the update of numerical information that is disadvantageous to the player Display control means (processing unit 410 etc.) capable of executing (subtraction update display control etc.);
With
The display control means changes the update mode between the case where the first update display control is executed and the case where the second update display control is executed (the scroll mode where the numerical information update cycle is changed). Different, or whether the progress is displayed or not)
This is a gaming apparatus characterized by the above.
According to this, when performing the 1st update display control based on the update of the numerical information which becomes profitable for the player who plays with the corresponding gaming machine, and the second update based on the update of the numerical information which is disadvantageous to the player The monotonousness of the display mode of numerical information can be eliminated by making the update mode different between when display control is executed.

Further, as an invention related to means 2,
A gaming device according to means 1, comprising:
The display control means updates the update information when executing the first update display control and when executing the second update display control when the numerical information to be updated is a plurality of amounts of numerical information. Different aspects,
You may comprise the game device characterized by this.
According to this, the effect which alert | reports numerical information can be heightened by changing the aspect of an update by the case where 1st update display control is performed, and the case where 2nd update display control is performed.

Further, as an invention related to means 3,
A gaming device according to means 2, comprising:
The display control means displays the progress of the update of numerical information on the display unit when executing the first update display control, but updates the numerical information when executing the second update display control. To prevent the progress of the display from being displayed on the display unit,
You may comprise the game device characterized by this.
According to this, when the first update display control is executed, the progress of the update of the numerical information is displayed, but when the second update display control is executed, the progress of the update of the numerical information is not displayed. By doing so, the monotonousness of the display mode of numerical information can be eliminated.

In addition, as an invention related to means 4,
A gaming device described in any one of means 1 to 3,
The display control means updates when the first update display control is executed and when the second update display control is executed when the update destination numerical information is numerical information corresponding to the same numerical value. Different aspects of the
You may comprise the game device characterized by this.
According to this, when the update destination numerical information is numerical information corresponding to the same numerical value, the update mode is different between the case where the first update display control is executed and the case where the second update display control is executed. By making it different, the monotonousness of the display mode of numerical information can be eliminated.

Further, as an invention related to means 5,
A gaming device described in any one of means 1 to 4,
The display control means uses the specific value information related to the specific value associated with the game of the player in the corresponding gaming machine as the numerical information.
You may comprise the game device characterized by this.
According to this, the specific value information regarding the specific value associated with the game of the player in the corresponding gaming machine can be effectively notified to the player as numerical information.

Further, as an invention related to means 6,
A gaming device according to means 5, comprising:
The gaming machine is a gaming machine in which a gaming value is given to a player according to establishment of a predetermined condition,
The display control means uses the specific value information as information (number of possessed balls, number of possessed medals, etc.) related to a granted game value given to a player who plays with a corresponding gaming machine,
You may comprise the game device characterized by this.
According to this, it is possible to effectively notify the player of the information related to the granted game value given to the player who plays with the corresponding gaming machine as the specified value information.

As an invention relating to means 7,
A gaming device according to any one of means 1-6,
A first display unit (liquid crystal display unit 430, etc.) by a first display method (liquid crystal display method, EL display method, dot display method, etc.);
A second display unit (such as a right seg display unit 440A) by a second display method (such as a segment display method) different from the first display method;
Display control means (such as the processing unit 410) for controlling the display of each of the first display unit and the second display unit;
Further comprising
The display control means includes a first display pattern (such as a liquid crystal seg-linked display pattern) that performs display linked with the first display unit and the second display unit, the first display unit, and the second display unit. The second display pattern (liquid crystal seg independent display pattern, etc.) that performs independent display in the first display unit and the second display unit can be controlled to display information related to the game of the corresponding gaming machine. (Various production setting data in FIG. 56, etc.),
You may comprise the game device characterized by this.
According to this, in addition to the two display units of the first display unit and the second display unit, for the third display unit by the same display method as the second display unit, by the first display pattern and the second display pattern, By displaying information related to the game of the corresponding gaming machine, it is possible to enhance the effect of informing the information related to the game.

Further, as an invention related to means 8,
A gaming device according to any one of means 1 to 7, wherein
Information related to the game of the corresponding gaming machine (number of big hits, number of rotations, number of balls etc.) can be displayed, and start operation (information recording start operation: non-contact communication, button press operation, icon touch operation, etc.) And end operation (information recording end operation: non-contact communication, button pressing operation, icon touch operation, etc.) and information related to the game after receiving the start operation can be specified as personal game information Information that can be stored, can update the personal game information in response to the establishment of the update condition according to the game, and can identify the personal game information based on accepting the end operation (access to the server 980) Information, personal game information, etc.)
First processing means (processing unit 410, etc.) capable of executing a first process (information recording start preparation process, etc.) based on the start operation;
Second processing means (processing unit 410, etc.) capable of executing second processing (information recording end preparation processing, etc.) based on the end operation;
When the update condition is satisfied during execution of one of the first process and the second process, the update of the personal game information can be restricted (for example, the personal game information is not updated). Update restriction means (processing unit 410, etc.)
You may comprise the game device characterized by further providing these.
According to this, when the update condition is satisfied during execution of either one of the first process based on the start operation and the second process based on the end operation, the update of the personal game information is restricted. Thus, it becomes possible to appropriately update the personal game information.

Further, as an invention related to means 9,
A gaming device according to any one of means 1 to 7, wherein
Information related to the game of the corresponding gaming machine (number of big hits, number of rotations, number of balls etc.) can be displayed, and start operation (information recording start operation: non-contact communication, button press operation, icon touch operation, etc.) And end operation (information recording end operation: non-contact communication, button pressing operation, icon touch operation, etc.) and information related to the game after receiving the start operation can be specified as personal game information Information that can be stored, can update the personal game information in response to the establishment of the update condition according to the game, and can identify the personal game information based on accepting the end operation (access to the server 980) Information, personal game information, etc.)
First processing means (processing unit 410, etc.) capable of executing a first process (information recording start preparation process, etc.) based on the start operation;
Second processing means (processing unit 410, etc.) capable of executing second processing (information recording end preparation processing, etc.) based on the end operation;
When the update condition is satisfied during execution of one of the first process and the second process, the process being executed can be limited (for example, the process being executed is forcibly terminated). Processing restriction means (such as the processing unit 410);
You may comprise the game device characterized by further providing these.
According to this, when an update condition is satisfied during execution of either one of the first process based on the start operation and the second process based on the end operation, the process being executed is limited. It becomes possible to update the personal game information appropriately.

Further, as an invention related to means 10,
A gaming device according to any one of means 1-9,
Information about the game of the corresponding gaming machine can be displayed,
A movable part (such as a segment display part 440);
Based on time information (time information of the clock unit 470, time information of the hall computer 600, etc.), an operation effect execution means (such as the processing unit 410) capable of executing an operation effect by operating the movable part;
You may comprise the game device characterized by further providing these.
According to this, by performing the operation effect by operating the movable part based on the timing information, it is possible to enhance the interest of notifying information about the game.

It is a front view of a gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows an example of a function structure of a game machine. It is a rear view of a gaming machine. (A) is the front view which simplified the main board | substrate, (B) is explanatory drawing explaining the display content of a display monitor. It is a figure which shows the structure of a part of storage area in RAM of a main board | substrate. It is the figure which showed the memory map of CPU in a main board | substrate. It is the figure which showed the RAM area corresponding to the storage area of main board RAM. (A) is a time chart showing the display time of items displayed on the accessory ratio display device, and (B-1) to (B-5) are explanatory diagrams for explaining changes in display contents of the display monitor. . It is explanatory drawing explaining the movement of the data memorize | stored in the storage area of the ring buffer. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a connection ratio and role ratio related process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a connection ratio / ratio display control process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the counter of the total number of acquired balls, the number of acquired bonuses, and the number of consecutive acquired bonuses. (A)-(D) are the front views which simplified the modification of the main board | substrate. It is a figure which shows an example of the system configuration | structure of a 1st game system. It is a figure which shows an example of the flow of the signal and information in a 1st game system. It is a figure which shows an example of the outer end output of a gaming machine. It is a figure which shows an example of a function structure of an inter-counter counting unit. It is a figure which shows an example of a function structure of a hall computer. It is a figure which shows an example of the table structure of the table for a display content setting. It is explanatory drawing of an index value. It is explanatory drawing of a reference | standard index value. It is a figure which shows an example of the table structure of the table for a display mode setting. It is a figure which shows an example of a data structure of the data classified by display screen. It is a figure which shows an example of a data structure of the data by special display. It is a figure which shows an example of the table structure of the table for special display settings. It is a figure which shows an example of the table structure of the payout rate appropriateness information display setting table. It is a figure which shows an example of a table structure of the model information setting table. It is a figure which shows an example of a table structure of an apparatus correspondence table. It is a figure which shows an example of a data structure of the data for a display apparatus setting. It is a figure which shows an example of a function structure of a ball management computer. It is a figure which shows an example of an external appearance structure of a data display apparatus. It is a figure which shows an example of a function structure of a data display apparatus. It is a figure which shows an example of a data structure of payout rate total data. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the flow of a management process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the flow of a data display apparatus process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the flow of a payout rate actual value calculation process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the flow of a display process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the flow of a payout rate appropriateness information display control process. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen of a data display apparatus. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen of a data display apparatus. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen of a data display apparatus. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen of a data display apparatus. It is a figure which shows an example of the system configuration | structure of a 2nd game system. It is a figure which shows an example of the flow of the signal and information in a 2nd game system. It is a figure which shows an example of an external appearance structure of a data display apparatus. It is a figure which shows an example of the opening / closing aspect of the door part of a data display apparatus. It is a figure which shows an example of the opening / closing aspect of the door part of a data display apparatus. It is a figure which shows an example of the opening / closing aspect of the door part of a data display apparatus. It is a figure which shows an example of a housing. It is a figure which shows another example of a housing. It is a figure which shows an example of a function structure of a data display apparatus. It is a figure which shows an example of the table structure of the table for personal game history information recording. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the hard disk of a hall computer. It is a figure which shows an example of the table structure of the table for an opening / closing mode setting. It is a figure which shows an example of the table structure of the table for operation effect setting. It is a figure which shows an example of a data structure of the data for various operation effect setting data. It is a figure which shows an example of the table structure of the table for irradiation effect setting. It is explanatory drawing of the principle of irradiation effect. It is explanatory drawing of the principle of irradiation effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the data for a display apparatus setting. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the flow of an operation effect process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the flow of an irradiation effect process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the flow of a personal game history information recording process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the flow of a 1st update process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the flow of a 2nd update process. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen of a data display apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the flow of a numerical information display process. It is explanatory drawing of the principle of display update of numerical information. It is explanatory drawing of another example of personal game history recording. It is a figure which shows an example of the system configuration | structure of a 3rd game system. It is a figure which shows an example of the flow of the signal and information in a 3rd game system. It is a front view of a card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of a function structure of a card unit. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the flow of a card unit process. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen of the display part of a card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of the game machine signal output from a slot machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the table structure of the table for opening / closing timing setting. It is a figure which shows another example of an irradiation effect. It is a figure which shows another example of an irradiation effect. It is a figure which shows another example of the signal which a game machine outputs.

  Hereinafter, an example of a preferred embodiment to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to the drawings. However, embodiments to which the present invention can be applied are not limited to the embodiments described below.

[1. First Embodiment]
First, an embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine that is a kind of gaming machine will be described.
In pachinko gaming machines, the entry of game media into the general prize area has an impact on the game compared to the entry of game media into the start prize area where special symbols are variably displayed when the game medium enters. Is low. Further, when the display result of the special symbol variable display becomes the specific display result, it is controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player. Compared with the approach, the player's interest is low and it is difficult to enhance the interest. Under such circumstances, game nails may be maintained on the store side so that entry of the game media into the general winning area is substantially difficult.

  However, on the gaming machine manufacturer side, it is usual to design the game board surface so that the game medium enters the general winning area at a predetermined frequency (passes the test). Therefore, it is desirable that the game nail is in a maintenance state in which the game medium enters the general winning area at a predetermined frequency (passes the test) at the store side. Therefore, it is necessary to raise the player's interest in the entry of the game medium into the general winning area and to make the player aware of the frequency of entering the game medium into the general winning area.

  Therefore, in a gaming machine having such a general winning area, there is room for further enhancing the interest when a game medium enters the general winning area. In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game in the gaming machine having a general winning area. Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

[1-1. Pachinko machine configuration]
FIG. 1 is an example of a front view of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as “gaming machine 1”) in the present embodiment, and shows an arrangement layout of main members. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an example of a functional configuration of the gaming machine 1.

  The gaming machine 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (meter board) 2 that constitutes a gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the gaming board 2. Further, the gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 3a formed in a frame shape that is provided in the gaming machine frame 3 so as to be opened and closed.

  The game board 2 is formed with a substantially circular game area 10 surrounded by guide rails. In this game area 10, a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hitting ball launching device and driven. The game area 10 includes a left game area 10A and a right game area 10B. The game area 10 is an area through which a game ball can pass on the game board 2, and the left game area 10 </ b> A on the left side and the right game area 10 </ b> B on the right side with respect to the center of the game area 10.

  A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided at predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in the drawing, on the right side of the game area 10). Each of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B is composed of, for example, 7-segment or dot matrix LEDs (light emitting diodes). A special symbol (also referred to as “special figure”), which is a plurality of types of identification information (special identification information) that can be displayed, is variably displayed (variable display). For example, each of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B variably displays a plurality of types of special symbols composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. To do. The special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. It is not limited. Hereinafter, the special symbol variably displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as "second special symbol". . There may be one special symbol display device.

  An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. In the display area of the image display device 5, the first special symbol variable display by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol variable display by the second special symbol display device 4B in the special symbol game respectively correspond to the variable display. For example, in a decorative symbol display area serving as a variable display section divided into a plurality of parts such as three, decorative symbols which are a plurality of types of identification information (decorative identification information) each identifiable are variably displayed. This variable display of decorative designs is also included in the variable display game.

  As an example, “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are arranged in the display area of the image display device 5. In response to the start of either the first special symbol change by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol change by the second special symbol display device 4B in the special game, ”,“ Middle ”, and“ right ”decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the variation of decorative symbols (for example, vertical scroll display) is started. Thereafter, when the fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special symbol game, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 are displayed. Then, the finalized decorative symbol (final stop symbol) that is the variable display result of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. As described above, in the display area of the image display device 5, the special game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A or the special special game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. In synchronization with the figure game, a variable display of a plurality of types of decorative patterns that can be identified is performed, and a fixed decorative pattern that is a variable display result is derived and displayed. Deriving and displaying the display result means that identification information such as a decorative symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as a complete stop display or a final stop display) and the variable display is ended.

  In the image display device 5, as the display areas to be the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, three areas may be provided so that they can be bonded or separated, or can be bonded and separated. . The display operation in the image display device 5 is controlled by the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. When the first special symbol display device 4A is executing variable display of the first special diagram, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to perform effect display along with the variable display, and the second special symbol is displayed. When the variable display of the second special figure is executed on the display device 4B, the effect display is executed on the image display device 5 along with the variable display, so that the progress of the game can be easily grasped.

  The decorative symbols variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R include, for example, eight types of symbols (alphanumeric characters “1” to “8” or Chinese characters). There are numbers “1” to “8”, English letters “A” to “H”, eight character images related to a predetermined motif, a combination of numbers, characters or symbols and character images, etc. Can be, for example, a decoration image showing a person or an animal, an object other than these, a symbol such as a character, or any other figure. In addition to these eight types of decorative symbols, a decorative symbol (a symbol made up of the characters “Accuracy”) corresponding to a “probable big hit” (also referred to as “2R probable big hit”), or a blank symbol (A symbol that does not constitute a jackpot combination) may be included. A corresponding symbol number is assigned to each of the decorative symbols. Note that the number of decorative symbols is not limited to eight, and may be any number as long as an appropriate number of combinations such as a jackpot combination or a combination that is lost can be configured (for example, seven types or nine types).

  During the change of the decorative symbol, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the “left”, “middle”, and “right”, for example, from the smallest to the largest symbol number, sequentially from the top to the bottom. When the scrolling display is performed and the decorative symbol having the largest symbol number (for example, “8”) is displayed, the decorative symbol having the smallest symbol number (for example, “1”) is subsequently displayed. Alternatively, in at least one of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L), the symbols are scrolled from the largest symbol number to the smallest symbol symbol. When the decorative design having the smallest number is displayed, the decorative design having the largest design number may be displayed.

  In the lower right part of the display screen of the image display device 5, there are provided fourth symbol display areas 5A and 5B for displaying a fourth symbol after a decorative symbol, a special symbol and a normal symbol which will be described later. In the present embodiment, the 4th symbol variable display for the first special figure is displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the first special figure, and the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed. The 4th symbol display area 5A and the 4th symbol variable display for the 2nd special symbol are performed in synchronization with the variable display of the 2nd special symbol, and the display result of the variable display is derived. A second symbol display area 5B for two special figures is provided.

  In the present embodiment, the variable display of the decorative design is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the special design (however, to be precise, the variable display of the decorative design is performed by the variation control designation command on the effect control CPU 120 side. In the case of performing an effect using the image display device 5, for example, an effect that the effect content including the variable display of the decorative design disappears from the screen for a moment. There are a variety of effects such as being performed or effects where the moving object shields all or part of the screen. For this reason, even when looking at the display screen on the image display device 5, it may be difficult to recognize whether or not it is currently in a variable display state. Therefore, in the present embodiment, whether or not the current state of variable display is being performed by confirming the state of the fourth symbol by further performing variable display of the fourth symbol on a part of the display screen of the image display device 5. Can be reliably recognized. Note that the 4th symbol is always variably displayed with a constant operation and does not disappear from the screen or is not shielded by a shielding object, so that it can always be visually recognized.

  The 4th symbol for the first special figure and the 4th symbol for the second special figure are sometimes collectively referred to as the 4th symbol. The 4th symbol display area 5A for the first special figure and the second special figure The 4th symbol display area 5B for illustration may be collectively referred to as a 4th symbol display area.

  In the variable display (variable display) of the 4th symbol, the 4th symbol display areas 5A and 5B are displayed in a predetermined display color (for example, the 4th symbol display area 5A for the first special symbol is white, and the second special symbol is used for the second special symbol). This is realized by continuing the blinking state in which the four symbol display area 5B is black) and is repeatedly turned on (displayed) and turned off (not displayed) at predetermined time intervals. The variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A is synchronized with the variable display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 5A for the first special symbol. The variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B is synchronized with the variable display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 5B for the second special symbol. Synchronous means that the variable display start time and end time are the same, and the variable display period is the same.

  Further, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A, the fourth symbol display area 5A for the first special symbol is lit (displayed) in a display color (for example, red) reminiscent of the big hit. Will remain. Note that the display color may be varied depending on the type of jackpot. In addition, when the off symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A, the fourth symbol display area 5A for the first special symbol is lit (displayed) in a display color (for example, blue) reminiscent of off. Will remain. As described above, the display result of the variable display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived display) in the fourth symbol display area 5A.

  Further, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B, the fourth symbol display area 5B for the second special symbol is lit (displayed) in a display color (for example, red) reminiscent of the big hit. Will remain. Note that the display color may be varied depending on the type of jackpot. Further, when the off symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B, the fourth symbol display area 5B for the second special symbol is lit (displayed) in a display color (for example, blue) reminiscent of off. Will remain. As described above, the display result of the variable display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived display) in the fourth symbol display area 5B.

  In the display area of the image display device 5, a start winning storage display area 5H is arranged. In the start winning memory display area 5H, a hold memory display for displaying the variable display hold number (special figure hold memory number) in an identifiable manner is performed. Here, the holding of the variable display occurs when a game ball enters (starts winning) the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A and the second starting winning opening formed by the ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 6B. To do. That is, the start condition (also referred to as “execution condition”) for executing a variable display game such as a special figure game or a variable display of decorative symbols has been established, but a variable display game based on the previously established start condition is being executed. When the start condition for starting the variable display game is not satisfied because the game machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state, the variable display corresponding to the established start condition is suspended. Is called.

  As an example, the start winning storage display area 5H is provided with a plurality of display parts whose display colors are changed from left to right in order from the variable display game in which the start condition is established based on the occurrence of the start winning. Yes. Then, when the start condition (the first start condition) of the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A is established based on the game ball entering the first start winning opening, it is not displayed. One of the display parts in the mode (transmission color) (for example, the leftmost display part in the display part in the non-display mode) is changed to blue display. In addition, when the game condition of the special game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied (second start condition) based on the game ball having entered the second start winning opening, it is not displayed. One of the display parts which are the modes is changed to red display. Thereafter, when one of the start condition (first start condition) of the special figure game using the first special figure and the start condition (second start condition) of the special figure game using the second special figure is established, for example, The display at the leftmost display part is removed and the display at each display part is moved leftward one by one. At this time, one of the display parts that have changed to blue display or red display (for example, the display part at the right end of the display part whose display color has changed) returns to the non-display mode.

  That is, when a start winning is generated, display control is performed in which the hold information corresponding to the special game executed based on the start winning is newly displayed in the start winning storage display area 5H. For example, the hold information is displayed in order from the left according to the order in which the start condition of the special figure game corresponding to the hold information is satisfied (in the above example, the start condition is also satisfied). When a new start prize is generated when n pieces of hold information are displayed (when n special figure games are put on hold), the (n + 1) th hold information from the left corresponding to the new start prize Will be newly displayed. When the start condition for the special figure game being held is satisfied, the leftmost holding information corresponding to the special figure game is deleted, and the nth (n ≧ 2) holding information from the left is left one by one. Shifted to the (n-1) th display.

  The order in which the start conditions for the special figure game are satisfied is not limited to the order in which the start conditions are generated, but the start condition for the special figure game for the second special figure is greater than the start condition for the special figure game for the first special figure. It may be established with priority (so-called special figure 4 priority fluctuation). On the other hand, the start condition of the special figure game relating to the first special figure is established in preference to the start condition of the special figure game relating to the second special figure (so-called special figure 1 priority fluctuation). Anyway.

  In the start winning memory display area 5H, a number indicating the special figure reserved memory number may be displayed so that the player or the like can recognize the special figure reserved memory number. In addition to the start winning memory display area 5H or in place of the start winning memory display area 5H, a display for displaying the number of special figure reserved memories may be provided. For example, together with the start winning memory display area 5H, the first hold indicator 25A and the first hold indicator 25A for displaying the number of special figure hold memories in an identifiable manner above the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. 2 hold indicator 25B. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold memory number as the effective start winning ball number that has entered the first start winning port formed by the normal winning ball device 6A so as to be specified. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold memory number as the effective start winning ball number that has entered the second start winning port formed by the normal variable winning ball device 6B in an identifiable manner. Each of the first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B has, for example, a number (for example, four) of LEDs corresponding to an upper limit value (for example, “4”) in each of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. It is comprised including. A movable accessory 150 is provided on the right side of the image display device 5.

  The movable accessory 150 incorporates a motor and a lamp for operating a star-shaped member. The movable accessory 150 operates (rotates and lights up) when an effect of notifying a big hit, for example, a later-described change result notice effect or a prefetch notice effect is executed.

  Below the image display device 5, an ordinary winning ball device 6A and an ordinary variable winning ball device 6B are provided. The normal winning ball device 6A forms a first start winning opening that is always kept in a certain open state by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. The normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is an electric tulip type accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces that are changed into a normal open state that is a vertical position and an expanded open state that is a tilted position by a solenoid 27 that is used for a normal electric accessory. (Ordinary electric accessory, so-called electric chew) is provided to form a second start winning opening. As an example, in the ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the movable wing piece is in the vertical position when the solenoid 27 for the ordinary electric accessory is in the off state, so that the game ball does not enter or enters the second start winning opening. It is difficult to open normally. On the other hand, in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the game ball enters the second start winning opening by tilt control in which the movable blade piece is tilted when the solenoid 27 for the normal electric accessory is in the ON state. Easy to open and open.

  The game ball that has entered the first start winning opening formed in the normal winning ball apparatus 6A is detected by, for example, the first start opening switch 22A. The game ball that has entered the second start winning opening formed in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is detected by, for example, the second start opening switch 22B. Based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 22A, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the first reserved memory number is set to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”). ) If the following, the first start condition is satisfied. Based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 22B, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the second reserved memory number is set to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”). ) If so, the second start condition is satisfied. The number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 22A and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 22B. May be the same number or different numbers.

  A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided below the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball apparatus 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 28 for a large winning opening door, and forms a large winning opening that changes between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. . As an example, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the solenoid 28 for the special prize opening door is in the OFF state, the special prize opening door closes the special prize winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the solenoid 28 for the special prize opening door is in the ON state, the special prize opening door opens the special prize opening. A game ball that has entered a special winning opening formed in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is detected by, for example, a count switch 23 shown in FIG. Based on the detection of game balls by the count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

  Thus, although the first start condition and the second start condition are satisfied, the special figure game that has been started first is being executed and the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state. When the start condition for starting the game is not satisfied, variable display is suspended. For example, if the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure based on the establishment of the first start condition is not satisfied when the first start condition is satisfied, the first hold memory The number is incremented by 1 (incremented), and execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended. If the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure based on the establishment of the second start condition is not satisfied when the second start condition is satisfied, the second holding memory is stored. The number is incremented by 1 and the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended. On the other hand, when the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is started, the first reserved memory number is decremented by 1 (decrement), and the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is started. When this is done, the second reserved memory number is decremented by 1 (decremented). The added value of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number may be the total reserved memory number or the special figure reserved memory number.

  A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of 7 segments, dot matrix LEDs, and the like, like the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and a plurality of types of identification information different from the special symbols. Is displayed (variably displayed) in a variable manner. Such variable display of normal symbols is called a general game (also referred to as “normal game”). The normal symbol display 20 variably displays, for example, a plurality of types of normal symbols composed of numbers indicating “0” to “9”, symbols indicating “−”, and the like. The normal symbol display 20 is not limited to the one that variably displays the numbers indicating “0” to “9” or the symbols indicating “−” as normal symbols. For example, “O” and “X” are displayed. Ordinary symbols are variably displayed by alternately lighting the decorative lamps (or LEDs) to be displayed, or by lighting a plurality of decorative lamps (or LEDs) such as “left”, “middle”, and “right” in a predetermined order. It may be a thing. Above the normal symbol display 20, a universal figure holding display 25 </ b> C is provided. The general-purpose hold indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the general-purpose hold storage number as the number of effective passing balls that have passed through the passage gates 41A and 41B.

  In addition to the above-described configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a number of obstacle nails. In addition, as a winning opening different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening and the big winning opening, for example, four general winning openings 50A to 50D which are always kept in a certain open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. A winning area is provided.

  The general winning ports 50A to 50D are constituted by ball receiving members that project forward (player side) from the game board surface. The ball receiving member receives the game ball flowing down from above from the opening, and the horizontal length (horizontal width) of the opening of the ball receiving member is larger than the diameter of one game ball, but the game ball 2 It is smaller than the diameter of the piece. Therefore, two or more game balls are arranged in the horizontal direction so as not to pass through the opening of the ball receiving member. Further, the interval between the ball receiving members provided with the respective general winning ports 50A to 50D is an interval through which at least one game ball can pass. Also, a winning ball device for switching the opening / closing of the openings of the general winning ports 50A to 50D (for example, an accessory corresponding to the normally variable winning ball device 6B for switching the opening / closing of the second start winning port) is not provided. It is always open. Further, even if a game ball wins the general winning openings 50A to 50D, neither the special-game variable display start condition nor the normal-game variable display start condition is established based on the win.

  In the present embodiment, a predetermined number of prize balls are given to the player as a specific value based on the fact that game balls have won at the general prize opening. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Along with the winning of a game ball in the mouth, a variable winning ball device, for example, a normal variable winning ball device 6B for performing opening / closing control of the second start winning port or a special variable winning for performing opening / closing control of the large winning port. The ball device 7 may be operated to make it easy for a game ball to win a second start winning opening or a big winning opening, and the specific value given by winning the game ball in a general winning opening may be used.

  Further, the specific value given to the player may be made different depending on the general winning opening, for example, 5 when the game ball wins the second general winning opening 50B or the third general winning opening 50C. 10 prize balls are awarded when a game ball is awarded to the first general prize opening 50A or the fourth general prize opening 50D (that is, a specific value having a different size is given). May be given). The specific value given when a game ball wins the second general winning opening 50B or the third general winning opening 50C is a predetermined number of winning balls, but the first general winning opening 50A or the fourth general winning opening. When a game ball is won in 50D, the normal variable winning ball device 6B or the special variable winning ball device 7 may be operated (that is, a different type of specific value is given).

  In addition, different effects may be executed according to the specific value given in accordance with the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening, for example, according to the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening And a case where the variable winning ball apparatus operates according to the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening (that is, when the specific value type is different), so that different effects are executed. Also good. In addition, when 10 prize balls are awarded according to the winning of game balls to the general prize opening, and when 5 prize balls are awarded according to the winning of game balls to the general prize opening. Different effects may be executed (that is, when specific values have different magnitudes).

  As shown in FIG. 2, the first general prize corresponding to each of the first general prize opening 50A, the second general prize opening 50B, the third general prize opening 50C, and the fourth general prize opening 50D is shown in FIG. It is detected by the mouth switch 24A, the second general winning port switch 24B, the third general winning port switch 24C, and the fourth general winning port switch 24D. When a game ball is detected by the first general prize port switch 24A, the second general prize port switch 24B, the third general prize port switch 24C, and the fourth general prize port switch 24D, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are detected. Will be paid out as a prize ball.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the game ball is won at the general winning port in the game control microcomputer 100 by providing the winning port switches corresponding to the four general winning ports 50A to 50D. In addition to this, it is possible to detect which general winning opening the game ball has won.

  In addition, it is not restricted to the structure in which a different general winning opening switch is provided for every general winning opening, and a common general winning opening switch may be provided for a plurality of general winning openings. For example, a common prize port switch (a switch for detecting that a prize has been won in a general prize opening provided in the left game area 10A) is provided for the first general prize opening 50A and the second general prize opening 50B. A common winning award switch (a switch for detecting that a winning has been made in a general winning opening provided in the right game area 10B) is provided for the third general winning opening 50C and the fourth general winning opening 50D. Anyway. In addition, a common winning port switch (a switch for detecting that a winning has been made to any of the general winning ports) is provided for all of the first winning ports 50A to 50D. You may be allowed to.

  In the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an out port through which game balls that have not entered any winning port are taken. The game balls taken into the out mouth are collected on the game island via a ball collection passage (not shown) communicating with the out mouth. The game balls won in each winning opening (the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the big winning opening, the first to fourth general winning openings) are collected through a winning ball collecting box (not shown) It is to be collected on the amusement island via the collection passage. An out ball detector (not shown) is provided in the ball collection passage. As a result, in the out ball detector, a game ball that has been driven into the game area 10 (a game ball guided to the out port without winning any of the winning ports, and a winning ball set by winning in any of the winning ports) Game balls collected in a cage) All game balls are detected. Each time a game ball is detected by the out-ball detector, a detection signal is input to the effect control board 12, so that the effect control CPU 120 counts the number of game balls that have been shot into the game area 10, that is, the number of outs. It is possible. When the out-ball detector is configured to include a counter whose value increases by 1 each time a game ball is detected, the effect control is performed every time the counter value increases by a certain number (for example, 10). The out number increase signal may be output to the substrate 12 so that the number of outs can be tabulated in a certain number unit (for example, 10 units) on the effect control CPU 120 side.

  Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 is provided at the periphery of the game area. A decorative LED may be arranged around each structure (for example, the normal winning ball device 6A, the normal variable winning ball device 6B, the special variable winning ball device 7, etc.) in the gaming area of the gaming machine 1.

  On the lower surface of the glass door frame 3a, there is an upper plate 60 that holds (stores) a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine so as to be supplied to a ball hitting device. Is provided. For example, an operation button 30 that can be operated by the player by a pressing operation or the like is provided at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the upper plate 60.

  A keyhole 61 is provided on the right side of the upper plate 60. The store clerk in the store opens and closes the glass door frame 3a with respect to the gaming machine frame 3 by using a hinge mechanism by inserting a key into the key hole 61 to open a locking device (not shown). It becomes possible to make it. By maintaining the glass door frame 3a forward with respect to the gaming machine frame 3, maintenance of the game board (meter board including game nails and winning holes) 2 (for example, measures to eliminate clogging), A mode changeover switch 31 and a display changeover switch 32 described later can be operated.

  A lower plate 62 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the upper plate 60 is provided directly below the upper plate 60, and a game ball as a game medium is directed to the game area on the lower right side of the upper plate 60. A hitting operation handle (operation knob) 63 is provided which is operated by a player or the like for firing. For example, the hitting operation handle 63 adjusts the resilience of the game ball according to the operation amount (rotation amount) by the player or the like. The hitting operation handle only needs to be provided with a single shot switch or a touch ring (touch sensor) for stopping the driving of a shooting motor included in the hitting ball shooting device.

  The operation button 30 is a jog dial that can be pressed and rotated. The operation button 30 is not limited to a button that can be pressed or rotated, and may be a button that can be touched or pressed, such as a touch panel, or tilted like a lever-type switch. It may be operable, or may be capable of being pressed and tilted like a joystick. Further, instead of the operation button 30, a sensor that can detect a predetermined operation action by the player, such as an infrared sensor, a CCD sensor, or a CMOS sensor, may be used. In other words, the operation button 30 only needs to be configured so that a predetermined operation action by the player can be detected mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically. The player's operation performed on the operation button 30 includes a press detection switch (not shown) that detects pressing of the operation button 30 and a rotary encoder that detects the rotation direction and amount of the operation button (jog dial) 30. (Not shown).

Next, the progress of the game in the gaming machine 1 will be schematically described.
In the gaming machine 1, a game ball that has passed through a first passing gate 41A provided in the left gaming area 10A and a second passing gate 41B provided in the right gaming area 10B is a first gate corresponding to the first passing gate 41A. After the normal figure starting condition for executing variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 20 such as that detected by the second gate switch 21B corresponding to the switch 21A and the second passing gate 41B is established, for example, Based on the fact that the general symbol start condition for starting variable symbol normal display, such as the end of the previous general symbol game, is satisfied, the general symbol display device 20 starts the general symbol game.

  In this normal game, after the normal symbol change is started, when a predetermined time as the normal symbol change time elapses, the fixed normal symbol that is a variable display result of the normal symbol is stopped and displayed (derived display). At this time, if a specific normal symbol (a symbol per ordinary symbol), such as a number indicating “7”, is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the variable symbol display result of the ordinary symbol becomes “per ordinary symbol”. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the symbol per symbol such as a number or symbol other than the number indicating “7” is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol is “ordinary loss”. Become. Corresponding to the fact that the normal symbol variable display result is “per standard”, the expansion / release control (tilt control) is performed in which the movable tulip of the electric tulip constituting the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is tilted. The normal opening control is performed to return to the vertical position when a predetermined time has elapsed.

  The special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is caused by the fact that the game ball that has entered the first starting winning port formed in the normal winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting port switch 22A shown in FIG. After the first start condition is satisfied, the process is started on the basis that the first start condition is satisfied, for example, due to the end of the previous special figure game or the big hit game state. In the special game by the second special symbol display device 4B, a game ball that has entered the second start winning port formed in the normal variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second start port switch 22B shown in FIG. After the second start condition is satisfied by the above, it is started based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied, for example, due to the end of the last special figure game or the big hit gaming state.

  In the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, after the special symbol variable display is started, the special symbol variable display result is obtained when a predetermined time as the special symbol variable time elapses. A definite special symbol (a special graph display result) is derived and displayed. At this time, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes “big hit” as a specific display result. " The specific special symbol (big jackpot symbol) as the confirmed special symbol is different depending on the type of jackpot, for example, the confirmed special symbol is different between the probability variation big hit and the non-probable variation big hit. After the variable display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”, the game is controlled to the big hit game state as a specific state in which a round game advantageous to the player (also simply referred to as “round”) is executed a predetermined number of times.

  In the big hit gaming state controlled after the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, the opening / closing plate of the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 has a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) or a predetermined number. A round game in which the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player is executed by opening the large winning opening in a period until (for example, nine) winning balls are generated. The In this way, the opening and closing plate that opened the grand prize opening during the execution of the round game receives the game ball falling on the surface of the game board 2 and then closed the grand prize opening, thereby providing a special variable prize ball device. 7 is changed to the second state which is disadvantageous to the player, and one round game is completed. In the big hit game state, the number of executions of the round game, which is the opening cycle of the big prize opening, is, for example, 15 times. Note that a plurality of types of jackpot types with different numbers of round games may be provided.

  After the big hit game state is over, as one of the advantageous states advantageous to the player, a time reduction control in which the special symbol variable display time (special figure fluctuation time) in the special figure game is shortened as compared with the normal state. It is controlled to a short time state to be executed or a probability variation state in which probability variation control (probability variation control) is performed together with time reduction control.

  Here, the normal state is a normal state as a gaming state different from a specific state such as a big hit gaming state, a short time state, or a probability variation state, and is an initial setting state of the gaming machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed) Thus, the same control as in the state in which the initialization process is executed after power-on is performed. On the other hand, the time-saving state is when a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) a special-figure game is executed and the variable display result is “big hit” is met first. You just have to finish. Also, in the probability variation state, in the variable display of each special figure game and decoration pattern, the probability that the variable display result will be “big hit” and further controlled to the big hit gaming state will be higher than in the normal state and the short-time state. improves. Such a probability change state continues until the next variable display result becomes “big hit”, or until a predetermined number of times (for example, 8 times) a special game is executed.

  The jackpot (type) that is controlled to the probability variation state after the jackpot gaming state is ended is also referred to as a probability variation jackpot. The big hit (type) that is controlled to the short-time state without being controlled to the probability variation state after the big hit gaming state is ended is also referred to as a non-probability variation big hit.

  In the probabilistic state or the short time state, the normal symbol display unit 20 controls the normal symbol in the normal symbol game so that the variation time of the normal symbol (ordinary symbol variation time) is shorter than that in the normal state. Control for improving the probability that the display result is “per normal figure” than in the normal state, and tilt control of the movable blade piece in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B based on the fact that the variable display result is “per normal figure”. The second start condition is such that the game ball can easily enter the second start winning opening, such as a control to make the tilt control time for performing longer than that in the normal state and a control to increase the number of tilts than in the normal state. Control that is advantageous to the player is performed by increasing the possibility of establishment. It should be noted that any one of these controls may be performed in the probability variation state or the short time state, or a plurality of controls may be performed in combination. As described above, the control that facilitates the entry of the game ball into the second start winning opening in the probability changing state or the short-time state is also referred to as high opening control. By performing the high opening control, the frequency at which the second start winning opening becomes the expanded opening state is higher than when the high opening control is not performed. As a result, the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B is easily established, and the special figure game can be executed frequently. In addition, the time until the variable display result becomes “big hit” is shortened. Therefore, in the probability variation state and the short time state, it becomes easier to enter the big hit gaming state than in the normal state. The period during which the high opening control can be executed is also referred to as a high opening control period, and this period may be the same as the period during which the gaming state in the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the probability changing state or the short time state. A state in which the high opening control is being executed is also referred to as a high base state, and a state in which the high opening control is not being executed is also referred to as a low base state.

  In the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the image display device 5, a special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and In response to the start of one of the special symbol games using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B, the decorative symbol variable display is started. The period from the start of variable display of decorative symbols to the end of variable display due to the stop display of the fixed decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R Then, the variable display state of the decorative pattern may be a predetermined reach state. Here, the reach state means a decorative symbol (“reach variation symbol” which has not been stopped yet when the decorative symbol stopped and displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 forms part of the jackpot combination. Is also a display state in which the variation continues, or a display state in which all or part of the decorative symbols change synchronously while constituting all or part of the jackpot combination. Specifically, in some of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R) in advance. The remaining decorative symbol display area (for example, “medium”) that has not yet been stopped when the decorative symbol (for example, the decorative symbol indicating the alphanumeric character “7”) that constitutes the determined jackpot combination is stopped. In the symbol display area 5C, etc., the decorative pattern is changing, or in all or part of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. This is a display state that changes in synchronization while constituting all or part of the combination.

  Further, in response to the reach state, the decorative pattern fluctuation speed is reduced, or a character image (an effect image simulating a person) different from the decorative pattern is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5. Or changing the display mode of the background image, playing and displaying a moving image that is different from the decorative design, or changing the variation mode of the decorative design, performing a different rendering operation than before reaching the reach state May be. Such effect operations such as display of the character image, change of the display mode of the background image, reproduction display of the moving image, and change of the decorative pattern change mode are referred to as reach effect display (or simply reach effect). In the reach effect, not only the display operation in the image display device 5 but also the sound output operation by the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation (flashing operation) in the light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9, and the like are in the reach state. An operation mode different from the previous operation mode may be included. As an effect operation in the reach effect, a plurality of types of effect patterns (also referred to as “reach patterns”) having different operation modes (reach modes) may be prepared in advance. Each reach mode has a different possibility of “big hit” (also referred to as “reliability” or “big hit reliability”). That is, it is possible to vary the possibility that the variable display result will be a “hit” depending on which of the multiple types of reach effects is executed. As an example, in this embodiment, reach modes such as normal reach and super reach are set in advance. When the super reach reach mode appears, the possibility that the variable display result will be a “big hit” (big hit reliability) is higher than when the normal reach reach mode appears.

  During the variable display of decorative designs, unlike the reach production, the decorative display variable display state may become the reach state and the variable display result may be a “hit”. There may be a case where a variable display effect for notifying the player is given by a variable display mode of the symbol or the like. In the present embodiment, variable display effects such as “pseudo-continuous” and “slip” can be executed, and in response to the change pattern being determined on the main board 11 side, each effect operation is executed. No is determined.

  Unlike variable reach effects such as reach effects or “pseudo-ream” or “slip” during decorative display of decorative symbols, for example, displaying effect images such as predetermined character images and message images. Notifying the player that the decorative display variable display state may reach a reach state and that the variable display result may be a “hit” due to a presentation operation different from the variable display operation of the symbol. A notice effect may be executed.

  If a special symbol that will be a lost symbol is stopped and displayed as a special symbol to be confirmed in the special symbol game, the decorative symbol variable display state will not reach the reach state after the variable symbol variable display starts. There are cases in which a fixed decorative symbol that is a non-reach combination is stopped and displayed. Such a decorative display variable display mode is referred to as “non-reach” (also referred to as “unreach loss”) variable display mode when the variable display result is “losing”.

  When a special symbol that becomes a losing symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, it corresponds to the fact that the decorative symbol variable display state has reached the reach state after the decorative symbol variable display has started. Then, after the reach effect is executed, or when the reach effect is not executed, a fixed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined reach combination (also referred to as a reach-losing combination) may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of the decorative design is referred to as a variable display mode of “reach” (also referred to as “reach lose”) when the variable display result is “losing”. It should be noted that the fixed decorative symbol that is a non-reach combination and the fixed decorative symbol that is a reach-losing combination are collectively referred to as a fixed decorative symbol of a lost combination (non-specific combination).

  When a special symbol that becomes a big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, a predetermined reach effect is executed in response to the variable display state of the decorative symbol becoming the reach state. At a later time, for example, a fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is stopped and displayed. Here, for example, the symbol number that is variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 is the determined decorative symbol that becomes the big hit combination. ”To“ 8 ”, any one of the decorative symbols is stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line in the“ left ”,“ middle ”, and“ right ”decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Anything is acceptable.

  In addition, after a decorative symbol that is a jackpot combination is derived and displayed, a pre-read that notifies and notifies that pending data with a special figure display result of “hit” is stored during the round in the jackpot game state. A notice effect may be executed.

  As described above, the game area 10 includes the left game area 10A and the right game area 10B, and the player adjusts the operation amount (rotation amount) of the hitting operation handle (operation knob) to thereby adjust the left game area 10A. It is possible to switch between left-handed shots that launch game balls toward the right and right-handed shots that fire game balls toward the right game area 10B.

  In the gaming machine 1, when a game ball is launched into the left game area 10A (when a game ball enters the left game area 10A), the right game area 10B is arranged by arranging a game nail or a game ball guiding member (not shown). The game balls are awarded at the first start winning opening at a higher rate than when the game balls are fired. Also, when the gaming state is the normal state, the normal symbol has a longer variation time (ordinary diagram variation time) than when the gaming state is the probability variation state and the short-time state, and the normal symbol variable display result is “per regular diagram”. Therefore, the rate at which the game balls launched into the left game area 10A in the normal state win the second start winning opening is extremely low as compared to the rate at which the first starting winning opening wins. Yes.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine 1, when a game ball is launched into the right game area 10B (when a game ball enters the right game area 10B), the left game is arranged by arranging a game nail or a game ball guiding member (not shown). Compared to the case where game balls are fired in the area 10A, the percentage of game balls winning at the first start winning opening is extremely low, or the game balls are not won at the first starting winning opening. . Therefore, even if the player hits the right hand in the normal state, the percentage that the game ball wins the start winning opening (either the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening) left-handed in the normal state. It is extremely low compared to the percentage at which game balls sometimes win the start winning opening (either the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening). Therefore, the player will make a left strike in the normal state.

  In addition, the proportion of the game balls launched into the right game area 10B passing through the second passage gate 41B is the same as that of the game balls launched into the left game area 10A due to the arrangement of a game nail or a game ball guiding member (not shown). It is higher than the rate of passing through the 1-pass gate 41A. The percentage of the game balls launched into the right game area 10B in the opened second start winning opening is determined by the arrangement of game nails or game ball guiding members (not shown) and the like. It is higher than the rate at which the ball wins the second start winning opening in the open state.

  In the probability variation state and the short-time state, the variation time of the normal symbol (ordinary symbol variation time) is shorter than that in the normal state, and the probability that the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol is “per regular diagram” is higher than in the normal state. Therefore, the rate at which the game ball wins the start winning opening (either the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening) when the player makes a right turn in the probability changing state and the short time state is left in the probability changing state and the short time state. It is higher than the rate at which the game ball wins at the start winning opening (either the first start winning opening or the second start winning opening) when hitting. Therefore, the player makes a right turn in the probability variation state and the short time state.

  In addition, the ratio of the game balls launched into the right game area 10B to the open big prize opening is that the game balls launched into the left game area 10A due to the arrangement of a game nail or a game ball guiding member (not shown). It is higher than the percentage of winning in the open big opening. Therefore, the player makes a right strike in the big hit gaming state. In this way, the player makes a left strike in the normal state, switches to the right strike with the occurrence of the big hit gaming state, continues the right turn in the probability change state or the short time state after the big hit gaming state ends, and enters the normal state. With the transition (for example, the probability change state without the big hit gaming state or the end of the short-time state), it will return to the left-handed.

  In addition, the ratio of the game balls launched in the left game area 10A to the first general prize opening 50A or the second general prize opening 50B provided in the left game area 10A is the first general prize opening 50A and the second Depending on the position where the general winning opening 50B is provided and the arrangement of a game nail or a game ball guiding member (not shown), the game ball launched into the right game area 10B is the first general winning opening 50A or the second general winning opening. It is higher than the rate of winning 50B. On the other hand, the ratio of the game balls launched in the right game area 10B to the third general prize opening 50C or the fourth general prize opening 50D provided in the right game area 10B is the third general prize opening 50C and the fourth Depending on the position where the general winning opening 50D is provided and the arrangement of a game nail or a game ball guiding member (not shown), the game ball launched into the left game area 10A is the third general winning opening 50C or the fourth general winning opening. It is higher than the rate of winning 50D.

  It should be noted that only a plurality of game balls launched into the left game area 10A for a part or all of the plurality of general game openings (first general prize opening 50A and second general prize opening 50B) provided in the left game area 10A. The game balls that can be won and are launched into the right game area 10B may be configured not to win, and a plurality of general prize holes provided in the right game area 10B (the third general prize opening 50C and the fourth general prize opening). 50D), a part or all of the game balls launched into the right game area 10B can be won, and the game balls launched into the left game area 10C may not be won.

  Thus, since the left hand is made in the normal state, the probability that a game ball will win the first general winning port 50A and the second general winning port 50B out of the four general winning ports is high, and the jackpot gaming state, In the probability variation state and the short-time state, right-handed is performed, and therefore, there is a high probability that the game ball will win the third general winning port 50C and the fourth general winning port 50D among the four general winning ports. In accordance with the game state and the like, as the game area where the game ball is launched changes, the general winning opening where the game ball is easy to win also changes. In the left game area 10A in which the game ball enters in the normal state, a general winning opening is provided at a position where the game ball is easy to win, and the right game in which the game ball enters in the big hit game state, the probability variation state and the short time state. In the area 10B, a general winning opening may be provided at a position where it is difficult for a game ball to win (or vice versa), and the winning frequency for the general winning opening may be changed according to the gaming state.

  The gaming machine 1 is equipped with various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, and a lamp control board 14 as shown in FIG. The gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, an interface board, and the like are arranged on the back surface of the gaming board 2 in the gaming machine 1. The payout control board is a board that controls the payout of prize balls, and is equipped with a payout control microcomputer. The payout control board is constituted by a ball payout device (not shown) or the like in response to receiving a prize ball number command in which data indicating the number of prize balls is set (transmitted as a control signal from the main board 11). The payout mechanism (mechanism for paying out prize balls) is driven to pay out the prize balls.

  The main board 11 is a main-side control board on which various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the gaming machine 1 are mounted. The main board 11 is mainly addressed to a sub-side control board composed of a random number setting function used in a special game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like disposed at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 12. A function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer, and the like are provided. In addition, the main board 11 performs on / off control of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and thereby the first special diagram and the second special diagram. Variable display of a predetermined display pattern such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol display 20 or controlling the variable symbol display of the normal symbol display 20 by controlling the lighting / extinction / coloring control of the normal symbol display 20. It also has a function to control. The main board 11 includes, for example, a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110 that receives detection signals from various switches for game ball detection and transmits the detection signals to the game control microcomputer 100, and the game control microcomputer 100. A solenoid circuit 111 for transmitting a solenoid drive signal to the solenoids 27 and 28 is mounted.

  The switch circuit 110 takes in a signal from the abnormality detection sensor group 26 (details will be described later) and transmits the signal to the game control microcomputer 100. As will be described in detail later, the abnormality detection sensor group 26 is for detecting an abnormality occurring in the gaming machine 1.

  The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, and receives the image display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R. In addition, various circuits for controlling the production operation by the production electrical parts such as the game effect lamp 9 are mounted. That is, the effect control board 12 provides effects such as the display operation in the image display device 5, all or part of the sound output operation from the speakers 8 </ b> L and 8 </ b> R, and all or part of the on / off operation in the game effect lamp 9. A function of determining the control content for causing the electrical component to execute a predetermined performance operation is provided.

  The sound control board 13 is a control board for sound output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and outputs sound from the speakers 8 </ b> L and 8 </ b> R based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12. For example, a processing circuit for executing audio signal processing is mounted. The lamp control board 14 is a control board for lamp output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and is turned on / off in the game effect lamp 9 and the like based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12. A lamp driver circuit for driving is mounted.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the main board 11 includes a first gate switch 21A, a second gate switch 21B, a first start port switch 22A, a second start port switch 22B, a count switch 23, and a first general prize port switch 24A. Wiring for transmitting detection signals from the second general winning opening switch 24B, the third general winning opening switch 24C, and the fourth general winning opening switch 24D is connected.

  The first gate switch 21A, the second gate switch 21B, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, the count switch 23, the first general winning port switch 24A to the fourth general winning port switch 24D are, for example, What has an arbitrary configuration capable of detecting a game ball as a game medium, such as a sensor, may be used. In addition, the main board 11 includes a first special symbol display device 4A, a second special symbol display device 4B, a normal symbol display device 20, a first hold display device 25A, a second hold display device 25B, and a general drawing hold display device 25C. Wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing display control such as is connected. The main board 11 is connected to wiring for transmitting signals from the abnormality detection sensor group 26.

  A control signal transmitted from the main board 11 toward the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The main board 11 is provided with a main board side connector corresponding to, for example, the relay board 15, and an output buffer circuit is connected between the main board side connector and the game control microcomputer 100. The output buffer circuit can pass a signal only in the direction from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15, and prevents the signal input from the relay board 15 to the main board 11. Therefore, there is no room for signals to be transmitted from the production control board 12 or the relay board 15 side to the main board 11 side.

  The relay board 15 only needs to be provided with a transmission direction regulation circuit for each wiring for transmitting a control signal from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, for example. Each transmission direction regulation circuit includes a diode having an anode connected to the main board connector corresponding to the main board 11 and a cathode connected to the presentation control board connector corresponding to the presentation control board 12, and one end connected to the cathode of the diode. And a resistor having the other end connected to the ground (GND). With this configuration, each transmission direction regulating circuit can prevent the signal from being input from the effect control board 12 to the relay board 15 and pass the signal only in the direction from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Therefore, there is no room for signals to be transmitted from the production control board 12 side to the main board 11 side. In this embodiment, a transmission direction regulating circuit is provided for each wiring for transmitting a control signal in the relay board 15, and an output buffer circuit is provided between the game control microcomputer 100 and the main board side connector on the main board 11. By providing, illegal signal input to the main board 11 from the outside can be prevented.

  The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control command includes, for example, a display control command used for controlling an image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used for controlling sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9. And a lamp control command used for controlling the lighting operation of the decorative LED and the like.

  Such effect control commands include, for example, a gaming state designation command for designating a gaming state (normal state, probability variation state, or short-time state), a variation start command for designating a variation start in a special game, and a special game in a special game. A variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern such as a design variation time or a design pattern on the image display device 5, a variable display result notification command for designating a variable display result such as a special design or a design design, and a design design for the image display device 5. A decorative ball stop command for specifying variable display stop, a jackpot start specifying command for specifying the start or end of a jackpot gaming state, a jackpot end specifying command, or a game ball has won a first start winning port or a second starting winning port Start winning command that is sometimes output, general winning opening that is output when a game ball wins a general winning opening Constant command, gaming ball into the special winning opening includes special winning opening winning command or the like which is output when the prize.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing a game control program, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. An RA (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes a game control program and performs a control operation, and updates the numerical data indicating random values independently of the CPU 103 A random number circuit 104 to perform and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 are provided. As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the gaming machine 1 is executed by the CPU 103 executing a program read from the ROM 101. At this time, the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, the CPU 103 writes various fluctuation data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores the fluctuation data, and the CPU 103 temporarily stores the various fluctuation data. The CPU 10 receives an input of various signals from outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, and the CPU 103 goes outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105. A transmission operation for outputting various signals is also performed.

  As described above, in the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes the game control program stored in the ROM 101 to perform the game control, so that the game control microcomputer 100 (or CPU 103) executes the following ( Specifically, this means that the CPU 103 executes control according to a program. The same applies to a microcomputer mounted on another board different from the main board 11.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the effect control board 12 is provided with an effect control CPU 120 that performs a control operation according to a program, a ROM 121 that stores an effect control program, fixed data, and the like, and a work area for the effect control CPU 120. Random number for updating numerical data indicating random numbers independently of the RAM 122, the display control unit 123 for executing processing for determining the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5, and the effect control CPU 120 A circuit 124 and an I / O 125 are mounted. As an example, in the effect control board 12, when the effect control CPU 120 executes an effect control program read from the ROM 121, a process for controlling the effect operation by the effect electric component is executed. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 reads the fixed data from the ROM 121, the effect control CPU 120 writes the various data to the RAM 122 and temporarily stores the data, and the effect control CPU 120 stores the effect data in the RAM 122. Fluctuation data reading operation for reading out various fluctuation data temporarily stored, the reception control CPU 120 for receiving the input of various signals from the outside of the presentation control board 12 via the I / O 125, and the presentation control CPU 120 for I / O A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 12 via O125 is also performed.

  In the effect control board 12, wiring for transmitting a video signal to the image display device 5, wiring for transmitting a sound effect signal as an information signal indicating sound number data to the sound control board 13, Wiring for transmitting an electric decoration signal as an information signal indicating lamp data to the lamp control board 14, wiring for transmitting a control signal to the movable accessory 150, and the like are connected. In addition, an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action on the operation button 30 has been detected is sent to the effect control board 12 from a press detection switch (not shown) and a rotary encoder (not shown). Wiring for transmission is also connected. Further, the effect control board 12 has a wiring for transmitting a signal corresponding to the position (first position or second position) of the operation unit in the mode changeover switch 31 described later, and an operation in the display changeover switch 32 described later. Wiring for transmitting a signal corresponding to the position of the part (first position or second position) is also connected.

  The ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 includes a light emitter such as the image display device 5, speakers 8 </ b> L and 8 </ b> R, a game effect lamp 9 and a decoration LED, an operation button 30, a movable accessory 150, and an effect accessory A plurality of types of pattern data constituting the effect control pattern are stored in advance in order to control the effect operation using the effect device (effect electric component) including the movable member included in the.

  The display control unit 123 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 determines the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5 based on the display control command from the effect control CPU 120. For example, the display control unit 123 executes various types of effect display such as variable display of decorative symbols and effect display in reach effects by determining the switching timing of effect images to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. Control. The display control unit 123 may be configured to include a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), an LCD drive circuit, and the like.

  The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 confirms, for example, the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11, the operation detection signal transmitted from the press detection switch and the rotary encoder, and the state of the mode switch 31. Including an input port for capturing various signals such as a signal to be enabled and a signal for enabling confirmation of the state of the display changeover switch 32, and an output port for transmitting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 12. Composed. For example, from the output port of the I / O 125, a video signal transmitted to the image display device 5, a command (sound effect signal) transmitted to the sound control board 13, and a command transmitted to the lamp control board 14 A command (drive signal) or the like transmitted to the movable accessory 150 is output.

  On the voice control board 13, for example, an input / output driver, a voice synthesis IC, a voice data ROM, an amplifier circuit, a volume, and the like are mounted. As an example, in the voice control board 13, the sound number data indicated in the sound effect signal transmitted from the effect control board 12 is input to the voice synthesis IC via the input / output driver. The voice synthesis IC generates voice and sound effects corresponding to the sound number data and outputs them to the amplifier circuit. The amplifier circuit outputs an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the speech synthesis IC to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume to the speakers 8L and 8R. The voice data ROM stores control data corresponding to the sound number data, and the voice synthesis IC reads out the control data corresponding to the sound number data to generate voice and sound effects. The data stored in the audio data ROM may be composed of data indicating the output mode of audio and sound effects in a predetermined period in time series.

  For example, an input / output driver and a lamp driver are mounted on the lamp control board 14. As an example, in the lamp control board 14, the electrical decoration signal transmitted from the effect control board 12 is input to the lamp driver via the input / output driver. The lamp driver amplifies the electric decoration signal and supplies it to the game effect lamp 9 and the like.

  In the present embodiment, when an abnormality occurs in the gaming machine 1, the abnormality that has occurred is notified by voice by controlling the speakers 8 </ b> L and 8 </ b> R via the audio control board 13, or via the lamp control board 14. The lighting / extinguishing drive of the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED is controlled and notified by light, or an abnormal notification image (error message) is displayed on the display area of the image display device 5 via the display control unit 123. To inform. The abnormality includes a magnetic abnormality, a vibration abnormality, a radio wave abnormality, and the like, and is detected using the abnormality detection sensor group 26 and the like.

  The abnormality detection sensor group 26 includes one or more sensors for detecting an abnormality occurring in the gaming machine 1. The abnormality detection sensor group 26 is not limited to a sensor, and may include a circuit for detecting an abnormality, various detection switches that do not correspond to the sensor, and the like. The abnormality detection sensor group 26 only needs to be configured to detect abnormality. One or more sensors or the like included in each of the abnormality detection sensor groups 26 are prepared according to the type of abnormality. What the abnormality detection sensor group 26 specifically includes may be determined according to the specifications of the gaming machine 1 or the like. The abnormality that occurs in the gaming machine 1 is a phenomenon that does not occur or is extremely difficult to occur in a normal game performed in the gaming machine 1 (for example, a magnetic abnormality, a vibration abnormality, and a radio wave abnormality that occur when there is an illegal act on the gaming machine 1) Phenomenon) and phenomena that can hinder the progress of the game, and in particular, a phenomenon that requires notification to the players and employees of the game hall (such as pachinko parlors).

  Examples of the abnormality detection sensor group 26 include a magnetic sensor that detects magnetism, a vibration sensor that detects vibration, and a radio wave detection sensor that detects a predetermined radio wave (such as a radio wave in a predetermined wavelength band). For example, these sensors may be included in the abnormality detection sensor group 26. In addition, the detection of abnormality can utilize a well-known method suitably. When the game control microcomputer 100 detects a magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, radio wave abnormality or the like based on an output signal from the abnormality detection sensor group 26, an abnormality detection designation command for designating that an abnormality has occurred is the main board. 11 is transmitted to the production control board 12 and an error has occurred due to the display of an error message on the image display device 5, the output of a warning sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, the light emission mode at the time of occurrence of an abnormality in the game effect lamp 9, etc. Notification is performed.

  Here, not only the abnormality has occurred by the notification means such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9, but any type of magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, radio wave abnormality, and front door opening. You may make it alert | report so that it is identifiable whether the abnormality of this was detected.

  The magnetic abnormality notification is an abnormality notification performed when a magnetic abnormality (abnormality that the magnet is in the vicinity of the gaming machine 1, in this case, there is a possibility of an illegal act) is detected. There are fraudulent acts in which a game medium is moved by a magnet to win a prize opening, or a predetermined area is clogged with a game medium to guide the game medium to the prize opening. By notifying the magnetic abnormality, it is possible to prevent such an action from occurring. For example, a magnetic sensor for detecting magnetism is provided as one sensor of the abnormality detection sensor group 26. The CPU 103 determines whether or not there is a magnetic abnormality by determining whether or not the signal from the magnetic sensor indicates a magnetic force equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold (indicating magnetic force → there is a magnetic abnormality). When a magnetic abnormality is detected, an abnormality detection designation command for designating the occurrence of the magnetic abnormality is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 and the magnetic abnormality is notified in the image display device 5 or the like. For example, in the error message display area of the image display device 5, an image of the characters “Magnetic error has occurred” is displayed.

  The vibration abnormality notification is, for example, an abnormality notification that can be executed in a pachinko gaming machine or the like provided with the special variable winning ball apparatus 7. There is a fraudulent act that intentionally shakes the pachinko machine to change the flow direction of the game medium closer to a winning opening such as a big winning opening. By notifying the vibration abnormality, it is possible to prevent such an action from occurring. For example, a vibration sensor for detecting vibration is provided as one sensor of the abnormality detection sensor group 26. The CPU 103 determines whether or not there is an abnormality due to vibration (vibration abnormality) by determining whether the signal from the vibration sensor indicates vibration having a strength greater than or equal to a predetermined threshold (stronger than a predetermined threshold). Shows vibration of vibration → vibration is abnormal). When a vibration abnormality is detected, an abnormality detection designation command for designating the occurrence of the vibration abnormality is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, and the vibration abnormality is notified in the image display device 5 or the like. For example, in the error message display area of the image display device 5, an image of characters “Vibration error has occurred” is displayed.

  The notification of the radio wave abnormality is a notification of abnormality performed when a radio wave abnormality (abnormality in which a predetermined radio wave reaches the gaming machine 1, in this case, there is a possibility of fraud). By applying radio waves to the start port switches (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23, etc., these switches are switched on / off, etc. There is a cheating to get. By notifying the radio wave abnormality, it is possible to prevent such an action from occurring. For example, a radio wave detection sensor for detecting a predetermined radio wave (such as a radio wave in a predetermined wavelength band) is provided as one sensor of the abnormality detection sensor group 26. The CPU 103 determines whether or not there is a radio wave abnormality by determining whether a signal from the radio wave detection sensor indicates reception of the predetermined radio wave (indicating reception of a predetermined radio wave → presence of radio wave abnormality). When a radio wave abnormality is detected, an abnormality detection designation command for designating that the radio wave abnormality has occurred is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, and a radio wave abnormality is notified in the image display device 5 or the like. For example, in the error message display area of the image display device 5, an image of the characters “A radio wave error has occurred” is displayed.

  The mode changeover switch 31 and the display changeover switch 32 are both configured by DIP switches (Dual In-line Package switches), and are provided outside the game area of the game board 2. The mode changeover switch 31 and the display changeover switch 32 configured by DIP switches are configured by switching the operation unit between the first position and the second position (for example, in the case of a slide type, the position of the knob is changed to one end side and the other end). By switching to the side), the process (control program) executed by the effect control CPU 120 can be switched. In a state where the glass door frame 3a is closed with respect to the gaming machine frame 3, the glass door frame 3a covers the front surface of the game board 2, so that the player cannot operate the mode switch 31 and the display switch 32. It has become. It should be noted that the mode change switch 31 and the display change switch 32 are provided by the player via the glass door frame 3a when the glass door frame 3a is closed with respect to the gaming machine frame 3 (the state shown in FIG. 1). Since it is installed at a position where it cannot be seen, it is not shown in FIG.

  As described above, the store clerk inserts the key into the keyhole 61 to open the locking device (not shown) and opens the glass door frame 3a forward with respect to the gaming machine frame 3, thereby The mode changeover switch 31 and the display changeover switch 32 provided on the panel 2 can be operated (switching of the DIP switch). When the operation of the mode switch 31 and the display switch 32 is completed, the glass door frame 3a is returned to the closed state with respect to the gaming machine frame 3, and a key is inserted into the key hole 61 to lock the device (not shown). )) Is closed.

  When the operation part of the mode changeover switch 31 is in the first position, the voltage at the mode changeover terminal of the CPU 120 for effect control is in the low state, and when the operation part of the mode changeover switch 31 is in the second position, the effect control. The voltage of the mode switching terminal of the CPU 120 is in a high state. When the voltage of the mode switching terminal is Low, the effect control CPU 120 indicates that the operation unit of the mode switching switch 31 is in the first position, that is, information for the player (for example, a demonstration) The game mode for displaying a screen or the like is specified, and information of a winning number management table described later is not displayed on the image display device 5. On the other hand, when the voltage of the mode switch terminal is High, the effect control CPU 120 indicates that the operation unit of the mode switch 31 is in the second position, that is, the image display device 5 has information for the store clerk (for example, It is specified that the maintenance mode is for displaying the number of winning prizes to each winning mouth and the like, and information on the winning number management table described later is displayed on the image display device 5.

  When the operation part of the display changeover switch 32 is in the first position, the voltage of the display changeover terminal of the effect control CPU 120 is in the low state, and when the operation part of the display changeover switch 32 is in the second position, the effect control. The voltage of the display switching terminal of the CPU 120 becomes High. When the voltage at the display switching terminal is Low, the effect control CPU 120 indicates that the operation portion of the display changeover switch 32 is in the first position, that is, the image display device 5 indicates the number of winnings to the general winning opening. By specifying that display is not permitted, it is prohibited to display information based on the display control table described later (information that can specify the number of winnings in the general winning opening) on the image display device 5. On the other hand, when the voltage of the display switching terminal is High, the effect control CPU 120 indicates that the operation unit of the display switching switch 32 is in the second position, that is, the image display device 5 receives a prize for the general winning opening. Permission to display the number is specified, and information based on the display control table described later (information that can specify the number of winnings in the general winning opening) is allowed to be displayed on the image display device 5. To do.

  In the present embodiment, the mode selector switch 31 and the display selector switch 32 are provided on the front side of the game board 2 (the surface facing the player), but the mode selector switch 31 and / or the display selector switch 32 are You may make it provide in the back surface side (game island side) of the game board 2. FIG. In the case of such a configuration, by using the hinge mechanism of the gaming machine frame 3, the gaming board 2 is rotated forward with respect to the gaming machine frame 3, so that The provided mode changeover switch 31 and / or display changeover switch 32 can be operated.

  The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 includes the start winning command as described above. The start prize command includes a start prize designation command indicating whether a start prize has occurred with respect to either the first start prize opening or the second start prize opening, or a first start prize opening or a second start prize opening. There are a start winning determination result designation command and the like indicating a jackpot determination result and a jackpot type determination result at the time of winning a game ball.

  The CPU 103 makes an effective start winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening, that is, the game ball to the first starting winning opening in a state where the first reserved memory number corresponding to the first start winning opening is less than the upper limit value. When winning is detected, the big hit determination random number and the big hit type determination random number are extracted from the random number circuit 104, and the extracted big hit determination random number and the big hit type determination random number are stored in the first special figure random number storage area. A command for designating the “first start prize opening” is set as a start prize opening designation command while being stored in a storage area corresponding to the reserved memory number (the first reserved memory number after addition including the valid start prize). In addition, the CPU 103 determines that the extracted (stored) jackpot determination random number matches the jackpot determination value stored in the jackpot determination table corresponding to the current gaming state (normal state, time saving state, or probability variation state). Whether or not the start winning prize is determined is determined.

  In this starting prize determination, if the big hit determination random number does not match the big hit determination value of the big hit determination table, a start winning determination result designation command for designating “out” is set. When the jackpot determination random number matches the jackpot determination value in the jackpot determination table, the extracted (stored) jackpot type determination random number is further stored in the jackpot type determination table for the first special figure for each jackpot type. It is determined which of the determination values stored in the table matches. Then, a start winning determination result specifying command for specifying the jackpot type “big hit” corresponding to the matched determination value is set. For example, a command for designating “non-probable variation big hit” or a command for designating “probability big hit” is set as the determination result designation command at the time of starting winning. Then, the set start prize opening designation command (“first start prize opening” designation) and the start prize determination result designation command are output to the effect control board 12.

  Note that the CPU 103 starts a game ball for a first start winning opening in a state where the first reserved memory number corresponding to the first starting winning opening reaches an upper limit (that is, according to the first start winning opening). When an invalid start prize that is not eligible for the special game is detected, the command specifying the “first start prize opening” is set as the start prize designation command, and the determination result at the start prize is designated As a command, blank data is set to specify that it is not a valid starting prize. Then, the set start prize opening designation command (“first start prize opening” designation) and the start prize determination result designation command (blank data) are output to the effect control board 12.

  The CPU 103 makes an effective start winning of the game ball to the second start winning opening, that is, the game ball to the second start winning opening when the second reserved memory number corresponding to the second start winning opening is less than the upper limit value. When the winning is detected, the big hit determination random number and the big hit type determination random number are extracted from the random number circuit 104, and the extracted big hit determination random number and the big hit type determination random number are stored in the second random number storage area for the second special figure. A command for designating “second start prize opening” is set as a start prize opening designation command while being stored in a storage area corresponding to the number of reserved memories (the second reserved memory number after addition including the valid start prize). In addition, the CPU 103 determines that the extracted (stored) jackpot determination random number matches the jackpot determination value stored in the jackpot determination table corresponding to the current gaming state (normal state, time saving state, or probability variation state). Whether or not the start winning prize is determined is determined.

  In this starting prize determination, if the big hit determination random number does not match the big hit determination value of the big hit determination table, a start winning determination result designation command for designating “out” is set. When the jackpot determination random number matches the jackpot determination value in the jackpot determination table, the extracted (stored) jackpot type determination random number is further stored in the jackpot type determination table for the second special figure for each jackpot type. It is determined which of the determination values stored in the table matches. Then, a start winning determination result specifying command for specifying the jackpot type “big hit” corresponding to the matched determination value is set. For example, a command for designating “non-probable variation big hit” or a command for designating “probability big hit” is set as the determination result designation command at the time of starting winning. Then, the set start prize opening designation command (“second start prize opening” designation) and the start prize determination result designation command are output to the effect control board 12.

  Note that the CPU 103 starts a game ball for the second start winning port in a state where the second reserved memory number corresponding to the second start winning port reaches the upper limit (that is, according to the second start winning port). When an invalid start prize that is paid out, but is not subject to a special game, is detected, a command for designating a “second start prize opening” is set as a start prize designation command, and a determination result at start prize is designated As a command, blank data is set to specify that it is not a valid starting prize. Then, the set start prize opening designation command (“second start prize opening” designation) and the start prize determination result designation command (blank data) are output to the effect control board 12.

  In this embodiment, based on the jackpot determination random number and the jackpot type determination random number extracted at the time of starting winning, the variable display result of the special figure corresponding to the starting winning is determined, and prefetching is performed based on the determination result. Although the notice effect is performed, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and based on the variation pattern determination random number extracted at the time of starting winning, the variable display variation pattern corresponding to the starting winning is determined, A pre-reading notice effect may be executed based on the determination result. For example, when the determination result at the start winning is a super reach variation pattern, the pre-reading notice effect is executed at a higher rate than when the determination result at the start winning is a non-reach variation pattern. Good.

  Specifically, when the CPU 103 detects an effective start winning of the game ball at the first start winning opening, the CPU 103 extracts a random number for determining the variation pattern from the random number circuit 104, and uses the extracted random number for determining the variation pattern for the jackpot determination. Along with the random number and the jackpot type determination random number, it is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number (the first reserved memory number after addition including the valid start winning) in the random number storage area for the first special figure. In addition, when the CPU 103 detects the effective start winning of the game ball at the second start winning opening, the CPU 103 extracts the random number for determining the variation pattern from the random number circuit 104, and uses the extracted random number for determining the variation pattern as the jackpot determining random number and the jackpot. Along with the type determination random number, it is stored in a storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number (the second reserved memory number after addition including the valid start winning) in the second special figure random number storage area.

[1-2. Display of connection ratio and role]
In the gaming machine 1, in the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11, each winning opening (large winning opening, second starting winning opening, first starting winning opening, first to fourth general winning openings, hereinafter “entrance” The number of game balls entering the area is also counted. Further, in the gaming machine 1, information such as a connection ratio and a role ratio can be displayed on the display monitor 29 provided on the main board 11.

  In the present embodiment, the display monitor 29 is described as being provided on the main board 11. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the display monitor 29 is provided on another board such as the effect control board 12, the relay board 15, and the payout control board. You may do it.

  On the gaming machine manufacturer side, it is usual to design the game board surface so that the game medium enters the general winning area at a predetermined frequency (passes the test). Further, when the test is performed, it is confirmed whether or not the game medium has entered the general winning area at a predetermined frequency. Further, even after the gaming machine is installed, it is confirmed what kind of maintenance is being performed and, as a result of the maintenance, whether the game medium has entered the general winning area as frequently as designed. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, it is possible to recognize what kind of maintenance has been added to the gaming machine having the general winning area. In the following, display of an accessory ratio and the like will be described. Hereinafter, the display of the total of game balls on the main board 11 and the ratio of the objects will be described.

  The main board 11 shown in FIG. 2 is a board that performs control related to the game. The main board 11 is enclosed in a board case 201 as shown in FIG. 4, and a display monitor 29 (for example, 7 segments) is arranged at the center of the main board 11 as shown in FIG. Yes. The display monitor 29 is disposed in front of the main board 11 when visually recognized. Since the main board 11 is not visible when the glass door frame 3a is not opened, the front when viewing the main board 11 is the back side of the game board 2 when the glass door frame 3a is opened. It is the front of the game and is different from the front of the gaming machine 1. However, the front when viewing the main board 11 and the front of the gaming machine 1 may be common.

  The main board 11 has information on game winnings, for example, the number of winning balls by winning at the first starting winning opening (heso), the number of winning balls by winning at the second starting winning opening (electrical chew), and the big winning opening. The number of winning balls and the total number of winning balls for winning (Attacker) are input and aggregated, and the display monitor 29 is the ratio of the total number of winning balls to the number of winning balls for winning the large winning opening (Attacker). Consecutive character ratio (referred to as "running ratio") (%), of the total number of winning balls, the number of winning balls by winning in the 2nd starting winning mouth (Den Chu) and the prize by winning in the big winning mouth (attacker) The ratio of the number of balls occupied by the number of balls (referred to as “role ratio”) (%) is displayed.

  The continuous ratio is a ratio of the total number of prize balls that is occupied by the number of prize balls (the number of consecutive feature-acquisition balls described below) by winning a big prize opening (attacker). The ratio is the number of winning balls in the 2nd starting winning entrance (Den Chu) out of the total number of winning balls and the number of winning balls in the big winning entrance (attacker) (the number of winning balls below) Is the proportion occupied. The total number of winning balls (the total number of winning balls below) is the number of winning balls for winning the winning prize winner (attacker), the number of winning balls for winning the second starting winning prize opening (Den Chu), and the winning prize opening (Attacker) and the total number of winning balls by winning in winning ports (first starting winning port, general winning port) other than the second starting winning port (Den Chu). In addition, the big winning opening (attacker) and the second starting winning opening (electrical chew) are variable roles, and the winning percentage of the game ball is changed due to the change of the passable width of the game ball. is there. In addition, the winning ports (first starting winning port, general winning port) other than the big winning port (attacker) and the second starting winning port (Den Chu) are fixed roles, and the passable width of the game ball is fixed. The expected percentage of winning game balls is a fixed character.

  As a method of counting and calculating information related to game winnings, the number of winning balls (the number of general winning balls), the number of winning balls in the first starting opening (heso) and the general winning opening (sode) with 6000 winning balls, 2 Special Dengaku Award, which is the number of balls in the regular electric role (number of electric chew awards), which is the number of balls won by winning in the starting winning opening (Denchu), Count the number of balls (the number of attackers). The total is set as one set, and the continuous ratio (%) and the winning ratio (%) for 10 sets, that is, 60000 pieces are calculated. In addition, the number of award balls (general award ball number), the number of ordinary electric award balls (the number of electric chew award balls), and the special electric roles The number of winning balls (attacker winning ball number) is recorded in the ring buffer, has a recording capacity of at least 11 sets, and is updated for each set. Furthermore, an equivalent amount (for example, several bytes) of 6000 storages for 11 sets is stored, and the cumulative ratio (%) and role ratio (%) can be calculated.

  The display monitor 29 switches and displays the continuous ratio (%), the winning ratio (%), and the cumulative connecting ratio (%) and the winning ratio (%) for 6000 pieces at predetermined time intervals (for example, 30 seconds). be able to. That is, four displays are switched and displayed by one display means. In this case, it takes 2 minutes to display all, but the number of award balls won by winning at the first starting hole (hews) counted by the progress of the game, winning at the second starting winning hole (electric chew) The number of award balls due to, and the number of award balls due to winning a prize winner (attacker) will change. Then, for example, if the number of winning balls won after displaying the running ratio (%) for 6000 is reflected in the playing ratio (%) for 6000 displayed after that, There may be a discrepancy between the continuous ratio (%) and the 4,000 servings (%). Therefore, the number of winning balls by winning at the first starting gate (heso), the number of winning balls by winning at the second starting winning port (Den Chu), the number of winning balls by winning at the big winning port (attacker), the total number of winning balls If the numbers are input and totalized at a predetermined timing in the switching display (for example, display timing of 60,000 consecutive ratios (%)), such a discrepancy can be prevented.

As an example of the calculation method, the total number of winning balls is 6000, and the number of winning balls by winning the second starting winning opening (Den Chu) and the number of winning balls by winning the large winning opening (attacker) A method of calculating a bonus rate (ratio (%)) in the case where the total number of bonus balls acquired is 4200 will be described. In the following description, the total number of acquired balls refers to the total number of game media (prize balls) paid out from the gaming machine. In addition, the number of winning balls acquired means the total number of game media paid out by winning the game media to the attacker and the electric chew. In addition, the number of consecutively-acquired balls acquired is the cumulative number of game media paid out when the game media wins an attacker. For this reason, a connection ratio can be calculated | required by following (1) Formula. Further, the role ratio can be obtained by the following equation (2).
Connection ratio = [number of consecutive winning points / total number of acquired balls] × 100 (1)
Ratio = [(number of consecutive feature winning balls + number of winning balls) / total number of winning balls] × 100 (2)

When the total number of winning balls is 6000 and the number of winning balls is 4200, the bonus rate is calculated as 0.70 (3 digits after the decimal point rounded down) by dividing 4200 by 6000.
However, since the microcomputer used in the gaming machine cannot perform the calculation after the decimal point, the following method is required.

  First, the first calculation method will be described. In the first calculation method, first, the number of winning balls is multiplied by 100 to 420,000. Then, 420,000 is divided by 6000. As a result, 70 is obtained as a quotient. From the 70 obtained here, the ratio of the actors is obtained as 70%. That is, by multiplying the dividend by 100, it is possible to obtain a calculation result up to two decimal places. Here, when the calculation result up to three digits after the decimal point is obtained, it may be multiplied by 1000.

  Next, the second calculation method will be described. In the second calculation method, first, the total number of prize balls is divided by 100 to obtain 60. Then, 4200 is divided by 60. As a result, 70 is obtained as a quotient. From the 70 obtained here, the ratio of the actors is obtained as 70%. That is, by dividing the divisor by 100, it is possible to obtain the calculation result up to two decimal places. Here, when the calculation result up to 3 digits after the decimal point is obtained, it may be divided by 1000.

  In this example, the total number of prize balls is 6000, but a 3-byte area is provided as an area for storing the total number of prize balls in order to calculate the ratio of the long-term bonuses. That is, in this example, 00EA60h is stored in the 3-byte storage area. Similarly, 00A410h is stored in the 3-byte storage area for the number of winning balls acquired.

  Here, the microcomputer used in the gaming machine can only perform operations between values of up to 2 bytes. Therefore, in order to facilitate the calculation, the lower 1 byte may be truncated.

  Here, a third calculation method performed by simplifying the second calculation method will be described. In the third calculation method, the lower 1 byte of 60h is rounded down to 00EAh, which is a decimal number, with respect to 00EA60h, which is the total number of prize balls, in order to facilitate calculation on a microcomputer used in a gaming machine. Calculate 234 by notation. Similarly, 10h of the lower 1 byte is rounded down to 00A410h of the winning character acquisition ball number, and the winning character acquisition ball number is 00A4h, that is, 164 is calculated in decimal notation.

  Then, similarly to the second calculation method, 2 is calculated by dividing the total number of winning balls by 100 (273/100). Then, 156 is divided by 2 to obtain 78 as a quotient. From the 78 obtained here, the ratio of the actors is obtained as 78%.

  In the third calculation method, calculation with a microcomputer used in a gaming machine is facilitated, but an error of + 12% occurs. However, the error when the total number of winning balls and the number of winning balls is 10 times is + 1%. That is, the error is reduced as the period for calculating the accessory ratio becomes longer, and approximates the original value.

  The substrate case 201 is made of a light-transmitting material so that the main substrate 11 and the display monitor 29 are visible. The board case 201 is formed with a hole (not shown) through which a wiring connector connected to the main board 11 is inserted, and a heat radiating hole for releasing heat of electrical components of the main board 11. The display monitor 29 provided on the main board 11 is arranged at a position where the heat radiation hole is not directly in front. Therefore, the visibility of the display monitor 29 is not blocked by the heat radiating holes. Here, “directly in front” means directly in front of the main board 11 as a viewpoint, and means between the main board 11 and an employee who wants to visually recognize the main board 11.

  The board case 201 is provided with a seal for displaying the type, model, specifications, etc. of the main board 11. These holes, heat dissipation holes, and seals are arranged so as not to block the display on the display monitor 29. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 3, when the display monitor 29 is arranged in the first part of the main board 11 (for example, the center part of the main board 11), the second different from the first part in the main board 11. Another electrical component or the like is disposed in a portion (for example, the peripheral portion of the main substrate 11), and a hole, a heat radiating hole, or a seal is disposed in a portion of the substrate case corresponding to the second portion of the main substrate 11. Good. In particular, the heat radiating hole is preferably provided in the vicinity of the display monitor 29 in order to release heat generated by the display monitor 29. Even in this case, it is preferable that the heat radiating hole is disposed at a position not directly in front of the display monitor 29. According to this, the visibility on the display monitor 29 is not hindered, so that it is easy to confirm information related to winning.

  Further, it is preferable that the wiring does not overlap with the portion of the substrate case 201 corresponding to the second part of the main substrate 11. Specifically, the portion of the substrate case 201 corresponding to the second portion of the main substrate 11 does not overlap the hole to which one connector of the wiring is connected and the connection destination to which the other connector of the wiring is connected. To. According to this, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the display monitor 29 from being hindered by the wiring.

  The main board 11 is provided with a 7-segment display for displaying an error of the gaming machine. In order to avoid misidentification with the 7-segment of the display monitor 29, the main board 11 is separated by a predetermined distance or other electronic components. It is preferable to arrange them with a gap between them. The other electronic components here are preferably large control components such as a CPU.

  Storage area for storing information related to game winning (ring buffer, 10 set total buffer (total of information related to game winning stored in ring buffer having 10 counters of 2 bytes at maximum), prize ball The total number buffer) may be stored continuously without being initialized when the reset button is operated. The ring buffer will be further described later. Note that the checksum of the stored value is calculated, and if an abnormality is detected, initialization is performed, the value of the number of winning balls is greater than the value of the total number of winning balls stored, Initialization of the storage area for storing information related to game winnings when an event that cannot occur as a situation is detected, such as when the number of consecutive feature-acquired balls is greater than the number of acquired balls Processing may be performed. Further, an error display or warning display may be performed without performing the initialization process, or an error display or warning display may be performed, or the initialization process may be performed after being performed. The error display and warning display will be further described later.

  For example, assuming that the total number of acquired balls is 34321 and the number of winning balls is 19876, 34321 are divided as a divisor for 19876 and the ratio is calculated. 1987/34321 = 0.57912... It is calculated that the role ratio (%) is about 57.9%. When calculation is performed in the game control microcomputer 100, calculation with a decimal point must be avoided, so the calculation formula is replaced with the following. In the division of 19876/34321, 34321 of the denominator is divided by 100, and the decimal point is rounded down to be 19876/343 = 57.9475. Since the fractional part is rounded down, it is calculated that the ratio is 57% (%) and is displayed on the display monitor 29. In this example, the value calculated by accurate calculation is an error on the display. There will be no.

  The minimum value in 16 bits is 32768 (the value other than the value of the most significant bit is 0), and the value with the maximum error is when the total number of acquired balls and the number of acquired balls are 32799 respectively. If this is calculated by the above method, 32799/32799 = 100%, and if replaced with the calculation by the game control microcomputer 100, 32799/327 = 100.3%, which is an error of + 0.3%. When the calculation is performed with the decimal point rounded down, for example, when the accurate value is 69.9% and the value calculated by the game control microcomputer is 70.1%, 69% → 70% on the display. % Error may be displayed, but even in the display of 1% error, the duty ratio (%) (or continuous ratio (%)) can be displayed with a very small error.

  In addition, when the above calculation method is used, the total number of acquired balls is divided by 100. Therefore, when the total number of acquired balls is less than 100, the calculation cannot be performed. Further, the error gradually increases even when it is less than 32768. If it is less than 10,000, the error may exceed 1%, resulting in a larger error. That is, the smaller the total number of acquired balls, the larger the error. For this reason, until the total number of acquired balls of a specific number or more (for example, 32768 which is the minimum value of 16 bits) is counted by a counter, the display of the role (%) and the continuous ratio (%) is not performed on the display monitor. Even if the display is performed, the fact that the error may be large may be notified by emitting a dedicated lamp, outputting a notification sound, or blinking the displayed value.

  The display monitor 29 displays the role ratio (%) and the connection ratio (%) on 7 segments, and switches and displays each value for every predetermined period (for example, every 30 seconds). In this case, for example, while the role ratio (%) is displayed for 30 seconds, an event occurs in which a new game medium is awarded to an electric chew or an attacker, and the value calculated in accordance with the event is displayed after 30 seconds. %), There is a possibility that the value of the combination ratio (%) and the combination (%) may deviate. For this reason, it is preferable that the role ratio (%) and the connection ratio (%) are calculated in the same interrupt and are sequentially displayed.

  In addition, when the numerical value that can be displayed in 7 segments is 2 digits (for example, when two 7 segments are provided), it becomes impossible to display 100% as 100. In this case, 99 may be displayed instead of 100. In the display monitor 29 shown in FIG. 4, numerical values can be displayed in the lower two digits. However, even in this case, the numerical values may be displayed without using the upper two digits. Alternatively, numerical values may be displayed in a part of the upper two digits under specific conditions.

In addition, in the above calculation method, an example is shown in which the total number of acquired balls, the number of winning balls, and the number of consecutive winning balls are counted in a counter. It is detected that a game medium has been won by a sensor provided, and the number of winning balls is counted separately based on the detection result. The value to be aggregated may be calculated. Further, based on the detection result, a sensor provided individually for the attacker and a sensor provided after the discharge passage through which the game media winning the attacker and the game media winning the electric chew are discharged are joined. Thus, a value to be added to the counter for the number of winning balls for the winning combination and the counter for the number of winning balls for the consecutive winning points may be calculated. Hereinafter, the display of the ratio ratio will be specifically described. In the following specific example, an example will be described in which it is detected that a game medium has been won by a sensor provided in each of an attacker and an electric chew, and the number of each winning ball is individually counted based on the detection result.

  A display monitor 29 is connected to the main board 11 in the gaming machine 1 as shown in FIG. In the gaming machine 1, the main board 11 is provided on the back side of the gaming board 2 provided in the gaming machine frame 3, as shown in FIG. In addition to the main board 11, other peripheral boards such as an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a power supply board, a payout control board, and a launch control board are provided on the back side of the game board 2. Yes. The main board 11 is arranged at a position where it does not overlap with each peripheral board other than the main board 11. The main board 11 may overlap with each of these peripheral boards. In particular, the main substrate 11 may overlap so as to be on the upper side of each peripheral substrate.

  The RAM 102 on the main board 11 includes a first gate passing number counter, a second gate passing number counter, a first starting winning number counter, a second starting winning number counter, a first general winning number counter, a second general winning number counter, A third general winning number counter, a fourth general winning number counter, and a large winning number counter are provided.

  The first gate passage number counter is a counter that counts the number of times that the first gate switch 21A has detected a game ball. The second gate passage number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the second gate switch 21B. The first start winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the first start port switch 22A. The second start winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the second start port switch 22B.

  The first general winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the first general winning port switch 24A. The second general winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the second general winning port switch 24B. The third general winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the third general winning opening switch 24C. The fourth general winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the fourth general winning opening switch 24D. The big prize counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23.

  A clear switch is connected to the main board 11. The clear switch is arranged on the back side surface of the game board 2 at a position where an employee or the like cannot easily operate. By operating the clear switch, data used for the connection ratio and the role ratio stored in the RAM 102 described later is cleared. The clear switch is a switch that is operated when the calculation of the link ratio and the role ratio has to be performed again, such as when a failure occurs in the calculation of the link ratio and the role ratio. For this reason, it is a switch that does not need to be operated when collecting data for calculating a normal linkage ratio and a hand ratio. When the clear switch is operated, a clear switch operation signal is transmitted to the main board 11 in addition to clearing data.

  The main substrate 11 is provided with an RTC 106. The main board 11 can detect the current time by the RTC 106. The RTC 106 can measure a predetermined time, elapsed time, and the like by performing initial settings, but in the present embodiment, the RTC 106 can measure the business hours of the store.

  The main board 11 is accommodated in the board case 201 as shown in FIG. Caulking pins 11B are attached to the substrate case 201. Since the caulking pin 11B is provided, the main board 11 is completely enclosed in the board case 201, and an illegal act on the main board 11 is prevented. The substrate case 201 is a crimped substrate case (hereinafter also referred to as “crimped substrate case”).

  The display monitor 29 is provided on the main board 11. In addition, a seal seal 11S is attached to the substrate case 201 to prove that the main substrate 11 is sealed. The seal seal 11S is pasted across, for example, the removed portion of the substrate case 201. The seal seal 11S is disposed at a position away from the main substrate 11, and is disposed at a position different from the position where the visibility of the display monitor 29 is blocked, such as directly in front of the display monitor 29. Thus, the display monitor 29 is disposed at a position that is not hidden by the seal seal 11S.

  The display monitor 29 includes a liquid crystal display unit 29A, a second display unit 29B, a third display unit 29C, and a fourth display unit 29D. The liquid crystal display unit 29A to the fourth display unit 29D are each configured by seven segments configured by seven segments that draw a character “8” and dots arranged at the lower right side of the seven segments. The liquid crystal display unit 29A to the fourth display unit 29D can be turned on and blinked in various colors, for example, red, blue, green, yellow, and white. In addition, these colors can be displayed in different colors or so-called rainbows while changing in an extremely short period.

  Each item of display Nos. 1 to 4 shown in FIG. The total period is displayed on the upper two-digit liquid crystal display unit 29A and the second display unit 29B, and the numerical values are displayed as percentages on the lower two-digit third display unit 29C and the fourth display unit 29D. In display No1, a short-term run ratio is displayed, and in display No2, a short-term role ratio is displayed. In display No3, the total cumulative ratio is displayed, and in display No2, the total cumulative ratio is displayed.

  The short term here means a period in which the number of awarded balls (number of acquired balls) was 6000. The period for calculating the total cumulative means the total period after the calculation of the ratio and the ratio is started, or the total period after the calculation of the ratio and the ratio is once reset.

  In the above example, the run ratio and the hand ratio are calculated regardless of the gaming state, but may be calculated in consideration of the gaming state. For example, the run ratio may be a ratio of the total number of winning balls that is occupied by the number of winning balls by winning a big winning opening in the big hit gaming state. Also, the ratio of the winnings is the ratio of the total number of winning balls to the number of winning balls in the second starting winning opening in the high base state and the number of winning balls in the winning game in the big hit gaming state. Also good.

  When the short-term ratio of the display No1 is displayed, “y6.” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display unit 29A and the second display unit 29B, and when the short-term ratio of the display No2 is displayed, the liquid crystal display unit “Y7.” Is displayed on 29A and the second display unit 29B. Further, when the short-term ratio of display No1 is displayed, the short-term ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the liquid crystal display unit 29A and the second display unit 29B, and the short-term ratio of display No2 is displayed. In this case, the short-term role ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the liquid crystal display unit 29A and the second display unit 29B.

  When the total cumulative ratio of display No. 3 is displayed, “A6.” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display unit 29A and the second display unit 29B, and when the total cumulative role of display No. 4 is displayed, the liquid crystal display unit 29A and the second display unit 29B. “A7.” Is displayed on the display unit 29A and the second display unit 29B. When the total cumulative ratio of display No. 3 is displayed, the total cumulative continuous ratio is displayed in percentage (% display) on the third display unit 29C and the fourth display unit 29D, and the total cumulative combination of display No. 4 is displayed. When the ratio is displayed, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed in percentage (% display) on the third display unit 29C and the fourth display unit 29D.

  The main board 11 calculates the number of game balls that have entered the fourth general winning opening from the attacker, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the first general winning opening in calculating the run ratio and the ratio. Aggregating. In the main process, the CPU 103 performs the first gate switch 21A and the second gate switch 21B, the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B, the count switch 23, and the first general winning port switch 24A to the fourth general switch. A state confirmation process is performed to confirm the state of each switch (presence / absence of a detection signal) of the winning opening switch 24D.

  In the state confirmation process of each switch, it is specified which entry area the game ball has entered based on the detection signal output from each switch. When detection signals are output from the first gate switch 21A and the second gate switch 21B, the values of the first gate passage number counter and the second gate passage number counter are added, and the first start port switch 22A, When the detection signal is output from the second start port switch 22B, the values of the first start winning number counter and the second starting winning number counter are added, and when the detection signal is output from the count switch 23, When the value of the large winning number counter is added and a detection signal is output from the first general winning port switch 24A, the second general winning port switch 24B, the third general winning port switch 24C, and the fourth general winning port switch 24D. Is added to the values of the first general winning number counter, the second general winning number counter, the third general winning number counter, and the fourth general winning number counter, Aggregate entering the number of tricks cells (winning number of game balls to each of the winning openings). Note that the value of each counter is stored in the RAM 102.

  In this way, the step for counting the number of game balls entering each entry area is executed together in a series of processes for checking the switch status corresponding to each entry area (included in the switch status check process). Thus, the number of game balls entering each entry area can be counted without causing a separate counting program to be executed, that is, without causing a problem of insufficient capacity due to an increase in the number of execution programs. .

  The CPU 103 of the main board 11 calculates the number of winning balls by winning each winning mouth based on the total number of winning game balls to each winning mouth, and stores the calculated number of winning balls in the RAM 102 for each winning mouth. Let The number of winning balls for winning a game ball is calculated by multiplying the number of gaming balls to be paid out by one winning with respect to the winning opening and the number of winning for the winning opening. The number of winning balls for winning a game ball is predetermined for each winning opening.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the number of winning balls for each winning mouth divided here is a general winning mouth winning ball (a winning ball by winning from the first general winning mouth to the fourth general winning mouth (sode)), 1st starting prize mouth ball (award ball by winning the 1st starting prize port (heso)), ordinary electric role award ball (award ball by winning an electric Chu), special electric role award ball (winning an attacker) Is the number of prize balls. The RAM 102 also stores the total number of winning balls. The CPU 103 separately counts the number of game balls won in the general winning opening and the number of game balls won in the first starting opening, but the number of game balls won in the general winning opening and the first starting opening are counted. The number of winning game balls to may be summed up. In addition, although the number of prize balls for the general prize opening prize ball and the number of prize balls for the first start mouth prize ball are calculated separately, the number of prize balls for the general prize opening prize ball and the number of the first start mouth prize ball are calculated. May be calculated together.

  The RAM 102 includes a ring buffer and an active buffer for storing the number of prize balls. The ring buffer includes 10 first storage areas to 10th storage areas, each of which has a counter of up to 2 bytes for storing the number of winning balls by winning in each winning mouth for every 6000 winning balls. As described above, the ring buffer has a storage area of a predetermined unit (maximum 2 bytes). The active buffer also includes a 0th storage area composed of a counter of up to 2 bytes for storing the number of winning balls by winning in each winning mouth for every 6000 winning balls. In the 0th storage area, the number of winning balls for each winning mouth that increases as the game progresses is added. Eleven storage areas from the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area can store 256 × 256 = 65536 data, and up to 6000 data can be stored with a margin.

  In addition, the RAM 102 is provided with a storage area for the total number of prize balls (for 10 sets) stored in the first storage area to the tenth storage area and the total total for each winning opening. The storage area of the total of 10 sets and the total total is composed of a counter of maximum 3 bytes. Therefore, 256 × 256 × 256 = 16777216 data can be stored, and up to 60000 data can be spared. I can remember.

  In addition, the RAM 102 includes an association ratio storage area for storing the combinations and association ratios of 10 sets and the total cumulative amount. The CPU 103 of the main board 11 calculates the role and run ratio of 10 sets and the total cumulative based on the number of winning balls based on the number of winning game balls in each winning opening for 10 sets and the total cumulative. In addition, it is stored in the linkage ratio storage area for storing the total cumulative ratio and the linkage ratio. Each of the combination ratio combination ratio storage areas for storing the ratios and the combination ratios of the 10 sets and the total cumulative number is composed of a counter of 1 byte at maximum. For example, in the case of storing the set ratio and the total ratio of 10 sets and the total cumulative number as an integer, the counter can be stored with a margin with a maximum of 1 byte.

Here, the memory space of the CPU 103 of the main board 11 will be described.
FIG. 6 is a diagram showing a memory map of the CPU on the main board. The CPU 103 has a memory space for accessing the above-described built-in register, ROM 101, RAM 102, and the like. Specifically, as shown in the memory map of FIG. 6, the address / data signal line of the ROM 101 is a ROM area in the memory space (in this embodiment, 0000H to 2FFFH (H represents a hexadecimal number. The same applies hereinafter). Of these, 0000H to 2FBFH, 2FC0H to 2FFFH are assigned to a program management area), and the CPU 103 designates this ROM area and reads data from the ROM 101. In the present embodiment, the ROM area is divided into eight areas from the first area to the eighth area for management, and the first area is an area starting from 0000H.

  The address / data signal line of the built-in register is assigned to a register area (FE00H to FEBFH in the present embodiment) of the memory space, and the CPU 103 reads data from the built-in register through this register area and transfers to the register Write the data.

  The address / data signal line of the RAM 102 is assigned to the RWM area (F000H to F3FFH in this embodiment) of the memory space. Write data. Note that other areas of the memory space (in the present embodiment, 3000H to EFFFH, F400H to FDFFH, FEC0H to FFFFH) are unused areas.

  Further, the RAM area corresponding to the storage area of the RAM 102 (in this embodiment, a 16 Kbyte area of 0000H to 2FFFH) is configured with a RAM control area, a non-use area, a RAM data area, and other areas as shown in FIG. Has been. In the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the RAM control area, instruction data (opcode) corresponding to each of a plurality of types of instructions executed by the CPU 103 and supplementary data (operands) necessary for the CPU 103 to execute each instruction are stored. Data for the configured control program (sometimes simply referred to as control program data) is temporarily stored, and the reference data referenced by the control program is stored in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the RAM data area. (For example, the above-mentioned various lottery data) is temporarily stored.

  In addition, data used for displaying the connection ratio and the role ratio is temporarily stored in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the non-use area and the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the other area. For example, the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the non-use area is provided with a storage area for storing the total cumulative number of winning balls for each winning opening and a total cumulative combination ratio storage area. The storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the other areas includes an active buffer having a 0th storage area for each winning opening, a ring buffer having a first storage area to a 10th storage area, and the number of winning balls for each winning opening (10 sets Min) total storage area, and 10 sets of ratio ratio storage areas. It should be noted that the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the non-use area and the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the other area respectively store data having different subroutine start addresses.

  In the present embodiment, 1 byte (8 bits) of data can be stored in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to each address of the RAM area, and each of the above-described data (command data, supplemental data, reference data) is stored. , Management data) is data having a number of bytes exceeding 1 byte (for example, 2 bytes), the data is divided and stored for each byte in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to a plurality of consecutive addresses in the RAM control area. doing.

The main board 11 controls the display monitor 29 to display the connection ratio and the role ratio. Here, the main board 11 performs control to sequentially display a plurality of items.
FIG. 8A is a time chart showing display times of items displayed on the accessory ratio display device. As shown in FIG. 8A, when the display on the display monitor 29 is started, first, the short-term connection ratio of the display No. 1 is displayed. The display of the short-term connection ratio of display No1 is displayed in green. In the display of the short-term connection ratio of display No1, the letter “y” is displayed on the liquid crystal display unit 29A, and the letter “6.” is displayed on the second display unit 29B, as shown in FIG. Is done. In addition, the short-term continuous ratio is displayed on the third display unit 29C and the fourth display unit 29D. For example, when the short-term continuous ratio is 41%, the characters “4.” are displayed on the third display portion 29C, and the characters “1.” are displayed on the fourth display portion 29D.

  When the display of display No1 continues for 30 seconds, the short-term role ratio of display No2 is displayed. The display of the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 2 is displayed in red. In the display of the short-term role ratio of the display No. 2, as shown in FIG. 8B-2, the character “y” is displayed on the liquid crystal display unit 29A, and the character “7.” is displayed on the second display unit 29B. Is done. Further, the short-term role ratio is displayed on the third display unit 29C and the fourth display unit 29D. For example, when the short-term role ratio is 63%, the characters “4.” are displayed on the third display portion 29C, and the characters “3.” are displayed on the fourth display portion 29D.

  When the display of display No. 2 continues for 30 seconds, the total cumulative connection ratio of display No. 3 is displayed. The display of the total cumulative connection ratio of display No. 3 is displayed in red. In the display of the total cumulative ratio of display No. 3, as shown in FIG. 8B-3, the character “A” is displayed on the liquid crystal display unit 29A, and the character “6.” is displayed on the second display unit 29B. Is displayed. Further, the total cumulative ratio is displayed on the third display unit 29C and the fourth display unit 29D. For example, when the total cumulative continuous ratio is 58%, the characters “5.” are displayed on the third display portion 29C, and the characters “8.” are displayed on the fourth display portion 29D.

  When the display of display No. 3 continues for 30 seconds, the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed. The display of the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed in red. In the display of the total cumulative role ratio of display No. 4, as shown in FIG. 8 (B-4), the letter “A” is displayed on the liquid crystal display unit 29A, and the letter “7.” is displayed on the second display unit 29B. Is displayed. Further, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed on the third display unit 29C and the fourth display unit 29D. For example, when the total cumulative combination ratio is 68%, the characters “6.” are displayed on the third display portion 29C, and the characters “8.” are displayed on the fourth display portion 29D.

  When the display of display No. 4 continues for 30 seconds, as shown in FIG. 8 (B-5), the short-term connection ratio of display No. 1 is displayed. Thereafter, the display of the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 to the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is sequentially displayed every 30 seconds. Moreover, the display color is only green for the short-term consecutive ratio of display No1, and the total cumulative ratio of short-term roles for display No2 to display No4 is red. In this way, the display monitor 29 switches and displays the short-term continuous ratio, the short-term combined ratio, the total cumulative combined ratio, and the total cumulative combined ratio every 30 seconds.

  On the main board 11, when the total number of prize balls in the 0th storage area in the active buffer reaches 6000, which is a predetermined capacity, the storage in the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area in the ring buffer is updated. Furthermore, the storage of the total and total cumulative for 10 sets and the storage of the combined ratio storage area for storing the ratios and continuous ratios of the 10 sets and total cumulative are updated.

  In the update in the active buffer and the ring buffer, the numerical value stored in the 0th storage area of the active buffer is moved to the first storage area of the ring buffer. Further, the numerical values stored in the first storage area to the ninth storage area of the ring buffer are moved to the second storage area to the tenth storage area, respectively. For example, as shown in FIG. 9, the number of winning balls of the general winning opening in the 0th storage area to the 9th storage area is “27” “81” “120” “36” “225” “87” “66”, respectively. “117” “45” “21”. At this time, when the total number of prize balls in the 0th storage area of the active buffer reaches 6000, the number of prize balls of the general winning opening prize balls in the 1st storage area to the 10th storage area is “27”, “81”, “ 120 ”,“ 36 ”,“ 225 ”,“ 87 ”,“ 66 ”,“ 117 ”,“ 45 ”, and“ 21 ”. Also, the number of prize balls in the 0th storage area is set to “0”, and the number of prize balls in the 10th storage area is deleted.

  When the number of prize balls stored in the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area is updated, the number of prize balls stored may be temporarily deleted and a new number of prize balls may be stored. Or you may memorize | store a new number of prize balls in the form overwritten on the number of prize balls stored.

  Further, the abnormality detection sensor group 26 shown in FIG. 2 includes a door opening sensor for detecting the opening of the glass door frame 3a. Opening the glass door frame 3a does not correspond to an abnormality when performed by an employee, but often corresponds to an abnormality when performed by a person other than the employee. For this reason, in this embodiment, the door opening sensor which detects opening of the glass door frame 3a is included in the sensor group 26 for abnormality detection. The door opening sensor transmits an opening signal to the main board 11 when detecting the opening of the glass door frame 3a.

  The door opening includes normal opening of the glass door frame 3a by an employee and abnormal opening of the glass door frame 3a by a person other than the employee. Here, detection of door opening is performed assuming abnormal opening of the glass door frame 3a. Further, even if the employee opens the glass door frame 3a and the glass door frame 3a is opened normally, the door opening is detected, but the employee or the like recognizes the opening of the glass door frame 3a. Because there are many, special problems can be avoided.

[1-3. processing]
Next, the control related to the display of the ratio ratio executed on the main board 11 will be described. In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. When the game control main process is started, the CPU 103 performs necessary initial settings after setting the interrupt disabled. In this initial setting, for example, the RAM control area and the RAM data area in the RAM 102 are cleared. For this reason, when the power supply from the power supply board is started, the data used for displaying the connection ratio and the role ratio stored in the unused area and other areas of the RAM 102 is maintained without being cleared. Data used for displaying the connection ratio and the role ratio stored in the non-use area and other areas of the RAM 102 is cleared by operating the clear switch. Also, register setting of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is performed. After the initial setting, the CPU 103 can periodically execute a timer interrupt process. The continuous ratio / role ratio related processing is executed by this timer interrupt processing.

  FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of the ratio / ratio related processing. In the main board 11, as shown in FIG. 10, it is determined whether or not an abnormal operation has been detected in the linkage ratio / ratio processing (step S101). Whether or not an abnormal operation is detected is determined by whether or not a clear switch operation signal is transmitted from the clear switch.

  As a result, when the clear switch operation signal is transmitted and an abnormal operation is detected (step S101; YES), warning display preparation is performed (step S102), and the process proceeds to step S103. If no clear switch operation signal is transmitted and no abnormal operation is detected (step S101; NO), winning information is acquired (step S103). As for the winning information, a game ball is detected by any of the first starting port switch 22A, the second starting port switch 22B, the count switch 23, and the first general winning port switch 24A to the fourth general winning port switch 24D. Obtained by.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the current time is within business hours (step S104). Whether or not the current time is within business hours is measured by the RTC 106 and determined. As a result, when the current time is within business hours (step S104; YES), it is determined whether or not the glass door frame 3a is closed (step S105). Whether or not the glass door frame 3a is closed is determined by whether or not an opening signal is transmitted from the door opening sensor.

  As a result, when the opening signal is not output from the door opening sensor and the glass door frame 3a is closed (step S105; YES), the game ball wins the predetermined number of balls or more per unit time. It is determined whether or not (step S106). Here, the unit time and the predetermined number of balls are set to numerical values assuming a state in which a normal game cannot be won. Specifically, since the maximum number of game balls that can be fired is 100 per minute, for example, 100 balls can be appropriately determined as an upper limit per minute. More specifically, the predetermined number of balls is 5 when the unit time is 1 second, or the predetermined number is 30 when the unit time is 10 seconds. The unit time is measured by the RTC 106. Further, the number of winning game balls to the attacker is measured by the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23.

  As a result, when the game ball has not won more than the predetermined number of balls per unit time (step S106; NO), the number of prize balls is added to add the number of prize balls according to the winning information acquired in step S103. Processing is performed (step S107). The award ball number adding process is performed when warning display preparation is not performed. Here, when the warning display preparation is performed, the linkage ratio / ratio comparison processing is ended as it is. In the winning ball number addition process, the number of each of the general winning award (sode), general winning award (heso), ordinary electric winning award (electric chew), special electric winning award (attacker) in the 0th memory area Is added.

  In addition, in the prize ball number addition process, the general winning opening (sode), the general winning opening (heso), the ordinary electric winning ball (electric chew), and the special electric winning ball (attacker) in the 0th storage area in the active buffer. The total number of prize balls for each of the prize balls is calculated. Here, when the total number of prize balls in the 0th storage area in the active buffer reaches a predetermined capacity of 6000, the numerical value stored in the 0th storage area of the active buffer is stored in the first storage area of the ring buffer. Move. Further, the numerical values stored in the first storage area to the ninth storage area of the ring buffer are moved to the second storage area to the tenth storage area, respectively. Further, the numerical value stored in the tenth storage area in the ring buffer is deleted.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the calculation timer has expired (calculation timer = 0) (step S108). As a result, if the calculation timer has not expired (step S108; NO), the linkage ratio / ratio comparison process is terminated as it is. If the calculation timer is up (step S108; YES), the calculation timer is set (calculation timer = 2000 ms) (step S109).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the number of prize balls (the prize ball total) obtained by addition in step S107 is the number of calculation executions (step S110). The calculation execution number can be an appropriate number, for example, a reference for moving numerical values stored in the 0th storage area to the 9th storage area in the ring buffer to the first storage area to the 10th storage area, respectively. The number may be slightly less than the total number of prize balls of 6000, for example, 5900. Further, it is preferable that the calculation execution number is slightly smaller than the number obtained by subtracting the maximum payout ball number from 6000.

  As a result, when the number of winning balls (the winning ball total) is not the calculated number of executions (step S110; NO), the connection ratio / ratio comparison processing is ended as it is. Further, when the number of winning balls is the number of calculation executions (step S110; YES), a run ratio and a hand ratio are calculated (step S111). Here, the short-term ratio, the short-term ratio, the cumulative ratio (total cumulative ratio), and the cumulative ratio (total cumulative ratio) are calculated. For this reason, the short-term continuous ratio, the short-term combined ratio, the cumulative combined ratio, and the cumulative combined ratio are all calculated within the same interrupt. Thereafter, the linkage ratio / role ratio display process is performed (step S112), and the linkage ratio / role ratio related process ends.

  If it is determined in step S104 that it is not within business hours (step S104; NO), or if it is determined in step S105 that the door frame is not closed (step S105; NO), an attacker per unit time is determined in step S106. If it is determined that more than a predetermined number of game balls have been won (step S106; YES), error display preparation is performed (step S113). Thereafter, the linkage ratio / ratio comparison process ends.

Next, the continuous ratio / role ratio display control process will be described.
FIG. 11 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the flow of the linkage ratio / ratio display control process. As shown in FIG. 11, in the ratio / ratio display control process, it is determined whether preparation for the ratio / ratio display has been completed (step S201). If it is determined that the preparation ratio / ratio display preparation process has not been completed (step S201; NO), it is determined whether or not an error display preparation has been completed (step S202).

  As a result, when it is determined that the error display preparation is completed (step S202; YES), an error display is performed (step S203). Error display can be performed as appropriate. For example, “E” and “R” can be displayed in the upper two digits of the display monitor 29 and “0” and “1” can be displayed in the lower two digits. Further, when performing error display, a predetermined error display may be performed on another display device such as the image display device 5, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, etc. The effect lamp 9 may be turned on or blinked in an appropriate pattern. Alternatively, a predetermined alarm sound may be generated from the speakers 8L and 8R. Alternatively, an appropriate display may be performed on a 7-segment display for displaying an error of a gaming machine provided on the main board 11. Moreover, you may carry out combining these.

  If error display is performed, it is determined whether or not warning display preparation is completed (step S204). Further, when it is determined in step S202 that it is not determined whether or not the error display preparation is completed (step S202; NO), it is determined whether or not the warning display preparation is completed (step S204).

  As a result, when it is determined that the warning display preparation is completed (step S204; YES), a warning display is performed (step S205). The warning display can be appropriately performed so as to be different from the display other than the warning display. For example, “E” and “R” can be displayed in the upper two digits of the display monitor 29 and “0” and “6” can be displayed in the lower two digits. At this time, the display monitor 29 may be blinked or displayed while changing the display color of the display monitor 29 in order to indicate that a warning is being given. Or you may display by raising the brightness of the display of the display monitor 29. FIG. In this way, it is preferable that the warning display is made more conspicuous than other displays.

  In addition, when a warning is displayed, a predetermined warning may be displayed on another display device such as the image display device 5, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, etc. The effect lamp 9 may be turned on or blinked in an appropriate pattern. Alternatively, a predetermined warning sound may be generated from the speakers 8L and 8R. Alternatively, an appropriate display may be performed on a 7-segment display for displaying an error of a gaming machine provided on the main board 11. Moreover, you may carry out combining these.

  When the warning is displayed, the linkage ratio / ratio control process is terminated. Also, if it is determined in step S204 that the warning display preparation is not completed (step S204; NO), the linkage ratio / ratio control process is also terminated.

  If it is determined that preparation for display of the ratio / role ratio has been completed (step S201; YES), a short-term ratio display is performed (step S206). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the short-term continuous ratio display (step S207). If it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed (step S207; NO), the process returns to step S206, and the short-term continuous display is continued. When it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed (step S207; YES), the process proceeds to step S208. Thus, the short-term continuous ratio display is continuously performed for 30 seconds (30000 ms).

  Subsequently, a short-term role ratio display is performed (step S208), and it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed since the short-term role ratio display is started (step S209). If it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed (step S209; NO), the process returns to step S208, and the short-term role ratio display is continued. If it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed (step S209; YES), the process proceeds to step S210. Thus, the short-term role ratio display is continuously performed for 30 seconds.

  Subsequently, the cumulative continuous ratio display is performed (step S210), and it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed since the cumulative continuous ratio display was started (step S211). Here, when it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed (step S211; NO), the process returns to step S210, and the cumulative connection ratio display is continued. When it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed (step S211; YES), the process proceeds to step S212. Thus, the cumulative continuous ratio display is continuously performed for 30 seconds.

  Subsequently, the cumulative role ratio display is performed (step S212), and it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed since the cumulative role ratio display was started (step S213). If it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed (step S213; NO), the process returns to step S212, and the cumulative role display is continued. Thus, the short-term role ratio display is continuously performed for 30 seconds. If it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed (step S213; YES), the continuous ratio / ratio control process is terminated.

  Thus, in the gaming machine 1 described above, the display monitor 29 provided on the main board 11 displays the short-term continuous ratio, the short-term combined ratio, the cumulative combined ratio, and the cumulative combined ratio. The display monitor 29 is provided on the main board 11 for controlling the game so that the visibility is not hindered. For this reason, it is possible to recognize what kind of maintenance has been added to the game nails (fault nails), windmills, etc. provided on the game board.

  The display monitor 29 is disposed on the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized. For this reason, it can prevent that the visibility with respect to the display monitor 29 is prevented. Further, the main board 11 is arranged at a position where the heat radiation holes provided in the board case 201 are not directly in front. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the display monitor 29 provided on the main board 11 from being obscured by the heat radiating holes. Therefore, the visibility with respect to the display monitor 29 provided on the main board 11 can be prevented from being hindered.

  The main board 11 is arranged at a position that does not overlap with each peripheral board other than the main board 11. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the display monitor 29 provided on the main board 11 from being obscured by the peripheral board such as the effect control board 12. Therefore, the visibility with respect to the display monitor 29 provided on the main board 11 can be prevented from being hindered.

  In addition, the display monitor 29 can display a ratio and a role ratio relating to a relationship between a prize ball paid out by passing an electric chew or an attacker and a prize ball paid out by passing a general winning opening. . Moreover, the display monitor 29 can switch and display predetermined information such as a short-term connection ratio and a cumulative connection ratio every predetermined period. For this reason, there is no need to provide a display for displaying information about a plurality of periods, which can contribute to a reduction in the number of parts.

  Further, since the display monitor 29 displays the run ratio (short-term run ratio) and the role ratio (short-term role ratio) every time the number of prize balls reaches 6000, the total number of prize balls becomes 6000, etc. The numerical value of the period corresponding to a certain unit can be easily recognized. The period corresponding to the predetermined unit may be a period other than the number of prize balls of 6000. For example, a period in which the number of prize balls is 1000 or 10,000 may be used. Alternatively, time may be used instead of the number of prize balls. For example, the period corresponding to the predetermined unit may be an appropriate time such as 1 hour, 3 hours, or 10 hours.

  In addition, the display monitor 29 displays the continuous ratio and cumulative ratio as well as the continuous ratio (short-term continuous ratio) and the winning ratio (short-term winning ratio) every time the number of prize balls reaches 6,000. For this reason, it is possible to easily compare the short-term station ratio or short-term role ratio for each predetermined unit with the cumulative station ratio or the cumulative role ratio. The display monitor 29 is provided on the main board 11 accommodated in the caulked board case. For this reason, it can contribute to prevention of fraud such as tampering with the display on the display monitor 29.

  In addition, the gaming machine 1 includes a detection unit that detects and detects fraud in which appropriate predetermined information cannot be displayed. Injustice here includes, for example, counting the number of winning balls outside of business hours, counting the number of winning balls while the door frame is open, and winning a gaming ball exceeding the allowable number of winnings. The gaming machine 1 operates within the business hours of the store, and the award ball count at times other than business hours is highly likely to be fraudulent. In addition, the gaming machine 1 plays a game with the door frame closed, and the counting of prize balls while the door frame is open is highly likely to be an illegal act.

  Further, during the game of the gaming machine 1, the game ball cannot be fired beyond a certain speed. For example, game balls are fired at a maximum of 100 shots per minute. For this reason, the upper limit of the number of winning game balls per minute is approximately 100. Therefore, for example, when a winning of 100 gaming balls per minute or more than 20 gaming balls per 12 seconds is detected, the probability of fraud is extremely high.

  In the gaming machine 1, in order to detect fraud, when it is not within business hours, when the glass door frame 3a is not closed, a prize ball when a game ball wins a predetermined number of balls or more per unit time Eliminates the addition of numbers. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the tampering of the linkage ratio, role ratio information, and the like due to these frauds. It should be noted that fraud may be detected based on the number of payout balls per unit time, instead of the number of prize balls when a predetermined number of game balls are won by the attacker per unit time.

  In the gaming machine 1 described above, when the 0th storage area of the active buffer included in the RAM 102 reaches a predetermined capacity of 6000, the numerical value stored in the 10th storage area in the ring buffer is deleted. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the ring buffer from becoming insufficient in capacity.

  Further, the ring buffer is provided with the first storage area to the tenth storage area, and when the data in the 0th storage area of the active buffer is moved to the first storage area of the ring buffer, the data in the 10th storage area is Erased. For this reason, since the data to be erased is set for each predetermined unit, it is possible to prevent the ring buffer from being insufficient in capacity. Further, it is possible to increase the data that remains without being erased.

  When the data in the 0th storage area of the active buffer is moved to the first storage area of the ring buffer, the data in the 9th storage area in the ring buffer is moved to the 10th storage area. At this time, the data in the tenth storage area may be erased and the data in the ninth storage area may be moved, or the data in the ninth storage area may be overwritten on the data in the tenth storage area. Even in this case, a lack of ring buffer capacity can be prevented.

  When the data in the 0th storage area of the active buffer is moved to the first storage area of the ring buffer, the data in the 10th storage area, which is a part of the storage area, is erased in the ring buffer. For this reason, since the data to be erased can be reduced, it is possible to prevent the ring buffer from being insufficient in capacity and to calculate the connection ratio and the role ratio with a large amount of data.

  When erasing the data in the ring buffer, not only a part of the data in the tenth storage area but also all of the data in the first storage area to the tenth storage area may be erased. . In this case, insufficient capacity of the ring buffer can be prevented more suitably. Further, some or all of the data in the ring buffer may be erased according to a predetermined condition. For example, at the beginning of business hours, all data in the ring buffer may be erased, and thereafter, part of the data in the ring buffer may be erased.

  In the above example, the movement of data in the ring buffer has been described. However, in the storage area for storing data other than the ring buffer, for example, the total accumulation, a part or all of the data is similarly deleted. May be.

  Further, in the gaming machine 1 described above, each data of the short-term run ratio, the short-term role ratio, the cumulative run ratio, and the cumulative role ratio is displayed every 30 seconds. For this reason, each data can be compared easily. Note that the period for displaying each data is not 30 seconds, but may be an appropriate period. For example, it may be every 10 seconds or every minute. Alternatively, it may be every hour. Further, the displayed data may be data other than the short-term continuous ratio, short-term combined ratio, cumulative combined ratio, and cumulative combined ratio data, or only a part of these data.

  In addition, in displaying each data of the short-term continuous ratio, the short-term combined ratio, the cumulative combined ratio, and the cumulative combined ratio every 30 seconds, the short-term continuous ratio is displayed differently from other data. Specifically, the short-term link ratio is displayed in red, and other data is displayed in green. For this reason, it can be recognized that new data is displayed from the short-term link ratio.

  In the gaming machine 1 described above, a warning is displayed when an abnormal operation is performed. Specifically, a warning is displayed as an abnormal operation when the clear switch is operated. The clear switch is an emergency switch that is operated when a failure occurs in the calculation of the connection ratio or the role ratio. When this switch is operated, the data of the connection ratio and role ratio can be falsified, so that the operation of the clear switch is detected as an abnormal operation. Since the gaming machine 1 can warn of this abnormal operation by a warning display, fraud such as data tampering can be suppressed.

  In the above gaming machine 1, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, the count switch 23, the first general winning port switch 24A, the second general winning port switch 24B, and the third general winning port switch 24C. The run ratio and the hand ratio are calculated based on the number of prize balls obtained based on the detection signal from the fourth general prize opening switch 24D. For example, a sensor (count switch 23) provided individually for an attacker and a sensor provided after a discharge passage through which a game medium won by an attacker and a game medium won by an electric chew merge are used, Based on the result of detection, if the running ratio or the ratio is calculated by counting up the counter for winning the number of winning characters and the counter for the number of consecutive winning balls, it is difficult to specify which winning opening is to be paid out. The calculation of the ratio and the connection ratio may be complicated. In this regard, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, the count switch 23, the first general winning port switch 24A, the second general winning port switch 24B, the third general winning port switch 24C, and the fourth general winning port. The switch 24D detects that the game medium has won a prize, calculates the connection ratio and the role ratio based on the number of winning balls obtained from the detection result, and determines the number of winning balls based on the winning at each winning opening. it can. Therefore, it is possible to easily calculate the connection ratio and the role ratio and to calculate with high accuracy.

[1-4. Modified example]
The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. In addition,
You may make it combine arbitrarily the control and structure of the game machine shown by each said production | formation form, and it was shown by the following modification and control and structure of the game machine shown by each said production | presentation form. You may make it combine arbitrarily the control and structure of a gaming machine.

  In the above embodiment, a ring buffer having 10 counters with a maximum of 2 bytes is used as a storage area for storing information related to game winnings. However, a counter with a maximum of 3 bytes or a counter of 4 bytes is provided. You can also. At this time, the calculation for displaying on the display monitor 29 the two types of the above-mentioned ratio (%) and continuous ratio (%) based on the total number of acquired balls of game media (prize balls) paid out from the gaming machine. The method is not limited to the method described above, and may be as follows. As shown in FIG. 12, when counting the total number of acquired balls, the number of winning balls, and the number of consecutive winning balls using a counter consisting of up to 4 bytes, the upper 16 bits are used for calculation. You may go. By the way, if it is assumed that the number of acquired balls is 30000 per day by a 4-byte counter, 429483225 (4 bytes) / 30000 (number of acquired balls per day) = 1431611.2075, 143161.2075 / 365 days = 392, which is a calculation that can cover the total for 392 years.

  In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4A, the example in which the display monitor 29 is provided in the central portion on the main substrate 11 accommodated in the substrate case 201 has been described. , May be provided at other positions.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 13A, a main board 11C not provided with a display monitor and a display board 11D are provided separately from the main board 11C, and the main board 11C and the display board 11D are connected by a harness 11E. The display monitor 29 may be provided on the display substrate 11D. In this case, calculation of the link ratio and role ratio displayed on the display monitor 29 and reception of data used for these calculations are performed by the main board 11C. The main board 11C transmits the calculated connection ratio and role ratio, and further information related to the control for displaying them to the display board 11D via the harness 11E. In the display substrate 11D, the connection ratio and the role ratio may be displayed on the display monitor 29 based on the data transmitted from the main substrate 11C.

  The main substrate 11C and the display substrate 11D are housed in a substrate case 201A that is a caulking substrate case. Caulking pins 11B are attached to the substrate case 201A in the same manner as the substrate case 201 shown in FIG. Since the caulking pins 11B are provided, the main substrate 11C and the display substrate 11D are completely enclosed in the substrate case 201A, thereby preventing an illegal act on the main substrate 11C. Also in the substrate case 201A, as in the substrate case 201 shown in FIG. 4A, holes and heat dissipation holes are provided, and a predetermined seal is provided. These holes, heat dissipation holes, and seals are arranged so as not to block the display on the display monitor 29.

  As shown in FIG. 13B, the display substrate 11D may be provided outside the substrate case 201B that is a caulking substrate case, and the main substrate 11C may be enclosed in the substrate case 201B. In this example, the display substrate 11D is connected to the main substrate 11C by a harness 11E.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 13C, the display substrate 11D may be sealed in the substrate case 201C, and the main substrate 11C may be sealed in the substrate case 201B. In this example, the display substrate 11D is connected to the main substrate 11C by a harness 11E. Also in the substrate case 201C, as in the substrate case 201 shown in FIG. 4A, holes and heat dissipation holes are provided, and a predetermined seal is provided. These holes, heat dissipation holes, and seals are arranged so as not to block the display on the display monitor 29. The substrate case 201C enclosing the display substrate 11D may not be a caulking substrate case or may be a caulking substrate case.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 13D, a label is affixed to the surface of the substrate case 201 shown in FIG. 4A, and a caulking use record is written on the label 11R. Also good. Here, the label 11R may be disposed at a position where a part of the display monitor 29 is hidden. Thus, since a part of the display monitor 29 is hidden by the label 11R, for example, when the glass door frame 3a is opened, it is possible to prevent the player from easily seeing the connection ratio and the role ratio. Even when the label 11R is pasted, it may be pasted at a position where the display monitor 29 is not hidden.

  In the above-described embodiment, as the movable accessory, an electrical accessory such as a large winning opening (attacker) that is opened and closed by a solenoid or a second starting winning opening (electric chew) is used. Instead, a so-called mechanical accessory that opens and closes by its own weight may be used as a movable accessory. Further, although the 7-segment LED is used as the display monitor 29, a dot display, a display screen, or the like may be used instead of the 7-segment. Moreover, it is good also as a liquid crystal display device, organic EL, a fluorescent display tube, etc. instead of LED.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the glass door frame 3a may be opened to deal with an error cancellation regardless of the contents displayed on the display monitor 29, for example, the display of the connection ratio and the role ratio. For example, a replenishment mechanism for replenishing game balls (supplement balls) may be provided on the back side of the game board 3 in order to pay out game balls. In this replenishment mechanism, when a ball is clogged, the error may be canceled by opening the glass door frame 3a to eliminate the ball clogging. When the error is released by opening the glass door frame 3a regardless of the content displayed on the display monitor 29, the display of the connection ratio and the role ratio on the display monitor 29 is not performed. Good.

  At this time, in order not to display the connection ratio, the role ratio, and the like on the display monitor 29, it is also possible to make it a condition that no error has occurred in the display of the connection ratio, the ratio, etc. Here, the error with respect to the display of the linkage ratio, the role ratio, etc. is, for example, detection of an abnormal operation determined in step S101 shown in FIG. 10, acquisition of winning information within business hours determined in step 104, step S106. It is good also as detection of the predetermined number or more prize-winning with respect to the attacker per unit time judged by. By making the condition that such an error with respect to the display of the connection ratio and the role ratio does not occur, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the player sees information such as the connection ratio and the role ratio.

  Further, the glass door frame 3a is opened regardless of the content displayed on the display monitor 29, and the error is released. After the error is released, a predetermined period is displayed until the display ratio, duty ratio, etc. for the display monitor 29 are displayed. For example, it may wait for 1 minute and display after a predetermined time has elapsed. After canceling the occurrence of an error, the cause of the error cannot be completely removed, and the same error often occurs. By displaying the connection ratio, the ratio, etc. on the display monitor 29 after a predetermined time has elapsed, it is possible to suppress the situation where the player sees information such as the ratio, the ratio, etc. even when such an error occurs. . The predetermined period here can be arbitrarily set, and may be a time longer than 1 minute such as 5 minutes or 10 minutes, or may be a time shorter than 1 minute such as 30 seconds. Further, a predetermined time may be set according to the cause of the error. For example, in the case of a ball clogging in the replenishment mechanism and in the case of a failure of the image display device 5, the predetermined period of the ball clogging in the replenishment mechanism may be set longer.

  The main board 11 is provided with a display device other than the display monitor 29, for example, a 7-segment display (hereinafter referred to as “error display”) for displaying an error. This error indicator is preferably arranged at a position away from the display monitor 29. Specifically, the display monitor 29 may be arranged at the position 1/3 on the right side of the main board 11, and the error indicator may be arranged at the position 1/3 on the left side of the main board 11. In order to make the display monitor 29 easy to understand, the position of the display monitor 29 on the main board 11 may be printed on the board case 201 with characters, or a seal may be attached to the board case 201. You may keep it.

  In addition, it has been explained that the ratio (%) and the connection ratio (%) are calculated and displayed on the display monitor using a pachinko gaming machine as an example, but the ratio (%) and the combination ratio ( %)) May be calculated and displayed.

  A method for calculating the connection ratio (%) in the slot machine will be described below. The slot machine can start changing the symbol by setting the number of bets, and a winning occurs according to the result of the changing symbol. For winnings in slot machines, shift to a special game state that increases the probability of occurrence of a prize-winning with the addition of gaming value, a re-game winning that allows the change of symbols to be started without setting the number of bets, and a prize-winning There is a bonus prize. Here, the continuous ratio (%) in the slot machine is the cumulative total of game values obtained by awarding a winning based on the result of the change of the symbol within the period in which the change of the symbol is performed a predetermined number of times (the aforementioned pachinko game The total number of gaming values obtained by awarding winnings as a result of symbol changes during the period of transition to the special gaming state (equivalent to the total number of balls acquired in the machine) (in the aforementioned pachinko gaming machine) (Corresponds to the number of consecutive winning characters). For example, in a period in which 6000 symbols are changed, if the number of medals, which is an example of the gaming value obtained in the period, is 16000, the prize is awarded in the period when the game state is shifted to the special gaming state. When the number of medals obtained by the above is 9000, 0.56 obtained by dividing 9000 by 16000 is the continuous ratio (%).

  In addition, although the example which displays the calculated duty ratio (%) and continuous ratio (%) on the display monitor (for example, 7 segments) provided in the center of the main board was shown, it is not restricted to this, a payout control board, etc. Display monitors may be provided on other boards, gaming board surfaces, gaming machine frames (base frames), and the like. Further, the display device is not limited to a dedicated display monitor for displaying the role ratio (%) and the connection ratio (%), but an existing display device (for example, the image display device 5, 7-segment display for displaying an error). The combination ratio (%) and the continuous ratio (%) may be displayed using a display device such as a credit display device or a payout number display device in a slot machine.

  In the above embodiment, in order to notify the effect control board (sub-side) of the change pattern indicating the change mode such as the change time, the type of reach effect, the presence / absence of the pseudo-ream, etc., one change is made when the change is started. Although an example in which a pattern designation command is transmitted has been shown, a variation pattern may be notified to the effect control board by two or more commands. Specifically, in the case of notifying by two commands, the main board (main side) is so-called in the case where the first command is not reached, such as the presence or absence of pseudo-continuous, the presence or absence of a sliding effect, etc. A command (for example, a previous variation pattern designation command) indicating the variation time and variation mode (for example, the previous variation pattern) of the second stop) is transmitted, and in the second command, the type of reach, the presence / absence of a redrawing effect, etc. A command (for example, a post-variation pattern designation command) indicating a variation time or a variation mode (for example, a post-variation pattern) after reaching reach (after the so-called second stop when the reach is not reached) may be transmitted. .

  In this case, the effect control board may perform the effect control in the change display based on the change time derived from the combination of the two commands. The main board may notify the change time by each of the two commands, and a specific change mode executed at each timing may be selected by the effect control board. When sending two commands, two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt. After sending the first command, a certain period of time has passed (for example, the next timer interrupt). The second command may be transmitted. Note that the variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the order of transmission can be changed as appropriate. Thus, by notifying the variation pattern by two or more commands, the amount of data that must be stored as the variation pattern designation command can be reduced.

  Only one type of out-of-order symbol (for example, a symbol indicating “-”) is displayed during variable display of the special symbol, and variable display may be performed by repeating display and extinction of the symbol. . Further, in the case where the symbol is displayed during variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (a symbol indicating “−” may not be displayed as a display result).

  In addition, the image display operation in the image display device for executing the device configuration and data configuration of the gaming machine, the processing shown in the flowchart, the sound output operation in the speaker, and the lighting operation in the game effect lamp and the decoration LED Various rendering operations including, etc. can be arbitrarily changed and modified without departing from the spirit of the present invention. In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes based on the occurrence of winnings, and is scored based on the occurrence of winnings by enclosing gaming media It can also be applied to an enclosed game machine that gives

  The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to a form distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium to a computer device included in the gaming machine such as the gaming machine 1, for example. A form distributed by preinstalling in a storage device such as a computer device may be adopted. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

  The game execution mode is not only executed by attaching a removable recording medium, but can also be executed by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It is also possible to execute directly using hardware resources on the other device side on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices or the like via a network.

[2. Second Embodiment]
Next, an embodiment of a gaming system including the gaming machine 1 described in the first embodiment will be described. As described above, a game ball payout rate may be designed by maintenance of game nails and the like. However, there is a problem that it is difficult to determine whether or not the payout rate is as designed because it is not possible to confirm from the outside what kind of maintenance has been performed on the game nail or the like. Therefore, an embodiment of a gaming system including a gaming device (information display device) capable of determining whether or not the gaming machine has a payout rate as designed will be described.

[2-1. System configuration]
FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating an example of a system configuration of the first gaming system 1000A in the present embodiment.
The first gaming system 1000A includes a plurality of gaming machines 1 installed on a gaming island, a data display device 1200 that is a type of gaming device and information display device provided corresponding to each gaming machine 1, and each gaming The game machine, the counting device and the recording medium processing device provided corresponding to the machine 1, the inter-unit counting unit 500, the hall computer 600 which is a kind of management device, and the number of players' stored balls and possession And a ball management computer 800, which is a type of management device for managing In the present embodiment, the gaming machine is the gaming machine 1 described in the first embodiment, and the description of the gaming machine 1 is omitted.

  At a predetermined position above each gaming machine 1, a data display device 1200 for displaying various information such as gaming information relating to gaming in the gaming machine 1 and store information relating to store sales is installed by a color liquid crystal screen. Yes. Since the data display device 1200 is a terminal that discloses information to a player or a player, it can also be referred to as an information disclosure terminal.

  In the present embodiment, the data display device 1200 uses the display setting data 691 that is setting information for the data display device 1200 provided by the hall computer 600 to display settings of the display unit 1230 included in the device itself. The light emission setting of the light emitting unit 1250 (the left frame LED 1251 and the right frame LED 1252) included in the device is performed.

  Here, the setting means that the operation of the device itself is determined so as to perform a specific operation. In the present embodiment, the gaming machine 1 provided corresponding to the data display device 1200 is referred to as “corresponding gaming machine 1”, and the inter-counter counting unit 500 provided corresponding to the data display device 1200. This is referred to as “corresponding unit 500”.

  In this embodiment, the setting data of the data display device 1200 is described as being provided by the hall computer 600 which is a kind of management apparatus. However, the ball management which is not a hall computer 600 but a kind of other management apparatus. The computer 800 may provide setting data. In addition, a management device such as a member management computer for managing member information of a player registered as a member or a card management computer for managing card information of a gaming card possessed by the player is installed in the store. The management device may provide the setting data.

  The data display device 1200 includes a display unit 1230 that is a display unit capable of displaying information related to the corresponding gaming machine 1, and a processing unit 1210 that is a display control unit that controls display of the display unit 1230. Further, the data display device 1200 includes an operation unit 1220 having a call button 1221 and a touch panel 1222 that are operation means.

  The display unit 1230 shows the number of game balls acquired by the player during the non-hit game state in the non-hit game state in the game machine 1 with respect to the number of game balls used by the player during the non-hit game state being in the non-hit state. Specific information based on the payout rate reference information, which is information related to the payout rate, which is the ratio of a certain payout number, and the actual payout rate, which is the actual payout rate of the corresponding gaming machine 1, and the corresponding game Information relating to the game history in the machine 1 (game history information) can be displayed.

  Here, the specific information includes information on the calculation result based on the payout rate reference information and the actual payout rate value, and information on the suitability of the actual payout rate value determined based on the payout rate reference range and the actual payout rate value ( Hereinafter, it is referred to as “payout rate suitability information”). The information related to the calculation result based on the payout rate reference information and the actual payout rate value includes, for example, an error in the actual payout rate value (hereinafter, referred to as the payout rate reference value calculated based on the payout rate reference information and the payout rate actual value). "Payout rate error"). Also, the payout rate suitability information includes, for example, information indicating the suitability of the actual payout rate in various display modes (color change icon in the color change mode, meter in the meter mode, payout rate error in the error mode). It is.

  Further, the data display device 1200 is configured to display a special display on the display unit 1230 separately from the display of the game information. The special display is a display that is specially executed in accordance with the establishment of a predetermined special display execution condition when various types of game information are displayed. In this embodiment, a gaming machine error display for notifying an error that has occurred in the corresponding gaming machine 1, a display device error display for notifying an error that has occurred in its own device, and a notification that a big hit has occurred in the gaming machine 1 Jackpot effect display for playing, simultaneous effect display for running effects such as running effects on a plurality of data display devices 1200, and an anti-sneak display for alerting the player who is playing on the gaming machine 1 to be immersed in the game , A special display such as a card forgotten display for alerting the user that he / she has forgotten to take a gaming card from the inter-unit counting unit 500 and a loan rate display for notifying the gaming ball lending rate on the gaming machine 1 included.

  The inter-counter counting unit 500 is provided adjacent to the left side (or right side) of each gaming machine 1 and is a game recording medium owned by the player, which is a kind of gaming card. Accepting and executing a process (a game enabling process) for enabling a game on the gaming machine 1 corresponding to the player. The inter-counter counting unit 500 includes a counting / dispensing unit that counts the number of balls acquired by the player as a local counting number of balls and pays out a game ball in response to a ball dispensing operation. For example, the count payout unit can have the same configuration as the count payout unit 380 included in the card unit 300 described later. The inter-counter counting unit 500 is also called an inter-machine (sand).

  The hall computer 600 comprehensively manages each gaming machine 1 installed in the store. Further, the hall computer 600 manages the data display device 1200 and the inter-unit counting unit 500 provided corresponding to each gaming machine 1 in an integrated manner.

  The ball management computer 800 manages the number of balls recorded on the ball card that the player possesses so that the player can use it again.

  Each gaming machine 1 is configured to be individually identifiable by a machine number, and the gaming machine 1, the data display device 1200, and the inter-counter counting unit 500 are connected to the hall computer 600 and the ball management computer 800 via the machine terminal 900. It is connected. In this figure, for simplification, four gaming machines 1 installed on the game island are illustrated.

[2-2. Signal and information flow]
FIG. 15 is a diagram illustrating an example of the flow of signals and information between the devices of the first gaming system 1000A. In this figure, the terminal 900 is not shown for the sake of simplicity.

  From the gaming machine 1, a gaming machine signal is output to the data display device 1200 and the hall computer 600. In addition, an out signal is output to the data display device 1200 and the hall computer 600 from the out ball detector 200 provided on the back surface of the gaming machine 1. These signals will be described later.

  Unit signals including a card insertion signal, a card ejection signal, a deposit signal, a consumption signal, a ball payout signal, a ball count signal, and a unit error signal are output from the inter-unit counting unit 500 to the data display device 1200 and the hall computer 600. The

The card insertion signal is a signal that is output when a gaming card is received, and a signal including the card ID of the received holding card is output.
The card discharge signal is a signal that is output when the received ball card is discharged.
The deposit signal is a signal that is output when the player has made a deposit. The deposit signal can be a signal output in units of a specific amount (for example, 100 yen).
The consumption signal is a signal that is output when the remaining amount is consumed. The consumption signal can also be a signal output in units of a specific amount (for example, 100 yen).
The ball payout signal is a signal that is output when the game ball is paid out, and is output every time the game ball is paid out. One payout of game balls can be, for example, 25 units.
The ball counting signal is a signal that is output when the game balls are counted, and is output every time the game balls are counted. The count of game balls can be, for example, one ball unit.
The unit error signal is a signal that is output when any improper or abnormal condition occurs in the inter-unit counting unit 500.

  From the hall computer 600, display device setting data 691 for the data display device 1200 to perform various settings is output to the data display device 1200. Further, the hall computer 600 outputs to the data display device 1200 a management device signal including a simultaneous performance signal for causing the data display device 1200 to perform a simultaneous performance, a periodic notification signal for performing a periodic notification, and the like. .

  From the inter-counter counting unit 500, an authentication request signal for requesting authentication of the ball card inserted in the own device is output to the ball management computer 800. The authentication request signal includes a unit ID that is an ID of the own device and a card ID recorded on the holding card.

  The ball management computer 800 executes an authentication process according to the authentication request signal output from the inter-counter counting unit 500 and transmits an authentication signal to the inter-counter counting unit 500. The authentication signal includes an authentication result (OK / NG).

[2-3. Outer end output of gaming machine]
FIG. 16 is a diagram illustrating an example of a gaming machine signal output from the external output board included in the gaming machine 1 to the external device in the present embodiment. The external device referred to here means an external device that is communicably connected to the gaming machine 1, and includes a data display device 1200 and a hall computer 600 in the present embodiment.

  From the external output board, as a gaming machine signal, a jackpot signal, a probable change signal, a time reduction signal, a start signal, a prize ball signal, and a security signal are externally output. In addition to the security signal, a signal such as an error signal indicating that an abnormality has occurred in the own device or a door opening signal indicating that the glass door of the own device has been opened may be output to the outside. .

The jackpot signal is a signal that is output when the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the jackpot gaming state.
The probability changing signal is a signal that is output when the gaming machine 1 is controlled to a probability changing state that is in a high probability state.
The medium / short time signal is a signal that is output when the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the short time state when the gaming machine 1 is in the high base state.
The start signal is a pulse signal having a predetermined width that is output when the display result of the special figure variable display unit is derived and displayed in the gaming machine 1.
The prize ball signal is a pulse signal having a predetermined width that is output every time the first specified number of balls is paid out in the gaming machine 1. The first specified number of balls may be “10 balls”, for example.
The security signal is a signal that is output when any irregularity or abnormality occurs in the gaming machine 1.

As described above, an out signal is output from the out ball detector 200 provided on the back surface of the gaming machine 1 to the data display device 1200 and the hall computer 600.
The out signal is a pulse signal having a predetermined width that is output every time the second specified number of balls (for example, 10 balls) is counted by the out ball detector 200. The second specified number of balls may be “10 balls”, for example.

[2-4. Configuration of inter-unit counting unit]
FIG. 17 is a block diagram illustrating an example of a functional configuration of the inter-unit counting unit 500.
The front plate of the inter-counter counting unit 500 is configured in a rectangular shape whose longitudinal direction is the vertical direction, and includes a ticket issuing button 551, a payout button 552, and a leaving button 553 in the front center portion of the inter-counter counting unit 500. An operation button 550 and a card insertion slot 560 for a player to insert / remove a ball card are provided.

  When the player presses the ticketing button 551, a possession card recording the number of possessed balls (the number of possessions) of the player at that time is issued from the card insertion slot 560. Further, when the player presses the payout button 552, a predetermined number of unit balls (for example, a multiple of 25 balls: 125 balls, etc.) of the number of possessed balls is paid back to the gaming machine 1 and the paid-out pachinko balls are used. Thus, the player can play the game. When the player presses the away button 553, the issue / return of the ball card from the inter-counter counting unit 500 is restricted, and the ball lending or ball payout by the ball card being accepted is restricted.

  Note that the gaming machine 1 is provided with a ball lending button for lending the game ball to a position near the ball dispensing tray from which the game ball is paid out, and a return button for returning the ball card from the inter-unit operation unit 500. It is usually done. Therefore, the inter-counter counting unit 500 may issue a ball card from the card insertion slot 560 in response to a pressing operation of a return button provided on the gaming machine 1.

  The card insertion slot 560 is connected to a holding card reader / writer (R / W) 570 built in a position corresponding to the card insertion slot 560, and is inserted from the card insertion slot 560 by the holding card R / W 570. The recorded information such as the card ID and the number of balls recorded on the held ball card is read and written.

  In addition, a control unit 505 for controlling the operation of the inter-counter counting unit 500 is provided at a substantially central position of the inter-counter counting unit 500 so as to be easily connected to each part constituting the inter-counter counting unit 500. The various operations of the inter-counter counting unit 500 are controlled by the control unit 505.

  The inter-counter counting unit 500 and the gaming machine 1 provide a lending-related signal associated with lending pachinko balls with a predetermined number of balls as a lending unit, and paying with paying out pachinko balls with a predetermined number of balls as a lending unit. It is configured to be able to send and receive related signals. The lending-related signals include lending request signals for lending gaming balls to the gaming machine 1 from the inter-counter counting unit 500, stand terminal lending completion signals and stand READY signals output from the gaming machines 1, and counting between the stands. Signals such as a unit READY signal and a terminal terminal lending request completion confirmation signal are included. Further, the gaming machine 1 outputs a game signal such as a big hit signal, a probability changing signal, a short-time signal, a prize ball signal, a start signal, and an out-ball detector 200 provided corresponding to the gaming machine 1. It is configured to be able to receive an out signal.

  The inter-unit counting unit 500 includes a control unit 505, an operation button 550, a sound output unit 560, a ball card insertion / ejection unit 565, a ball card R / W 570, a first communication unit 571, and a second And a communication unit 572.

  The control unit 505 includes a processing unit 510 configured to include a processor such as a CPU and DSP and an integrated circuit such as an ASIC, a storage unit 520 configured to include a storage device such as a ROM and a RAM, and time information. And a clock unit 530 capable of outputting calendar information and the like.

  The storage unit 520 stores an inter-counter counting unit processing program 521 that is read by the processing unit 510 and executed as inter-unit counting unit processing. In addition, the storage unit 520 stores reception card data 523 in which information such as the card ID and personal customization data of the coin card being received is recorded.

  The first communication unit 571 is a communication device for sending and receiving data and sending and receiving signals to and from the data display device 1200. For example, the first communication unit 571 includes a wired communication module that performs communication via a wired cable. .

  The second communication unit 572 is a communication device for transmitting / receiving data and signals to / from the ball management computer 800, and includes a wired communication module that performs communication via a wired cable, for example. . The second communication unit 572 transmits the reception card data 523 to the ball management computer 800 under the control of the processing unit 510.

  In the above description, for convenience, the first communication unit 571 and the second communication unit 572 are separately illustrated and described as two communication units, the first communication unit 571 and the second communication unit 572. May be configured as one communication unit. The same applies to communication units in other various apparatuses.

[2-5. Functional configuration of hall computer]
FIG. 18 is a diagram illustrating an example of a functional configuration of the hall computer 600.
The hall computer 600 includes a processing unit 610, an input unit 620, a display unit 625, a sound output unit 630, a clock unit 635, a first communication unit 640, a second communication unit 650, a ROM 670, and a hard disk 680. And a RAM 690, each of which is a computer system connected via a bus.

  The processing unit 610 is configured to include a processor such as a CPU and a DSP, and an integrated circuit such as an ASIC that control each unit of the hall computer 600 according to various programs such as a system program stored in the ROM 670. Device and arithmetic unit. In the present embodiment, the processing unit 610 includes a setting data generation unit 611, a game information totaling unit 613, and a sales totaling unit 615 as main functional units.

  The setting data generation unit 611 is a functional unit that operates according to the setting data generation program 671a stored in the ROM 670. The setting data generation unit 611 generates display device setting data 691 described later, and the generated display device setting data 691 is stored in the RAM 690. To store.

  The game information totaling unit 613 is a functional unit that totals game information of each gaming machine 1, and stores the totaled game information in the game totaling database 688 of the hard disk 680 as game totaling data.

  The sales totaling unit 615 is a functional unit that totals the sales information of each gaming machine 1, and stores the totaled sales information in the sales management database 689 of the hard disk 680 as sales management data.

  The input unit 620 is an input unit configured to include, for example, a keyboard and a mouse, and outputs a pressed key or button signal (operation signal) to the processing unit 610. By an operation input from the input unit 620, an instruction operation such as editing of data in various databases stored in the hard disk 680 is performed.

  The display unit 625 is a display device that performs various displays based on a display control signal output from the processing unit 610, and includes an LCD or the like. The display unit 625 displays data contents of various databases stored in the hard disk 680.

  The sound output unit 630 is a sound output device such as a speaker that outputs various sounds based on the sound output control signal output from the processing unit 610. From the sound output unit 630, for example, a warning sound or the like for notifying an administrator of a warning or the like when a warning is issued or an abnormality occurs is output.

  The clock unit 635 is an internal clock included in the hall computer 600, and includes, for example, a crystal oscillator including a crystal resonator and an oscillation circuit. The clocking time (including date) of the clock unit 635 is output to the processing unit 610.

  The first communication unit 640 is a communication device for performing communication with the gaming machine 1 and includes, for example, a wired communication module that performs communication via a wired cable. The first communication unit 640 receives the aforementioned gaming machine signal from the gaming machine 1 and also receives the aforementioned out signal from the out ball detector 200.

  The second communication unit 650 is a communication device for performing communication with the data display device 1200, and includes, for example, a wired communication module that performs communication via a wired cable. The second communication unit 650 transmits (distributes) display device setting data 691 to the data display device 1200 according to the control of the processing unit 610.

  The ROM 670 is a read-only nonvolatile storage device, and stores various programs such as a system program of the hall computer 600. In the present embodiment, the ROM 670 stores a management program 671 that is read by the processing unit 610 and executed as management processing. The management program 671 includes a setting data generation program 671a executed as setting data generation processing as a subroutine.

  The hall computer 600 may be configured not to include the ROM 670 as a storage device. In this case, the various programs described above may be stored in the hard disk 680, for example.

  The hard disk 680 is a readable and writable nonvolatile storage device, and stores various data related to display settings of the data display device 1200 and various databases related to games in the gaming machine 1. Specifically, a display content setting table 681, a display mode setting table 682, a special display setting table 683, a payout rate suitability information display setting table 684, a model information setting table 685, and device correspondence A relation table 686, a game total database 688, and a sales management database 689 are stored.

The display content setting table 681 is a table for setting the display content of the data display device 1200, and an example of the table configuration is shown in FIG.
The display content setting table 681 stores a gaming machine ID, a model name, a display screen, and a special display in association with each other.

The gaming machine ID is identification information (ID) for uniquely identifying each gaming machine 1 and is assigned to each gaming machine 1 individually.
The model name is the model name of the gaming machine 1 with the gaming machine ID.
The display screen is a type of screen displayed on the display unit 1230 of the data display device 1200.
The special display is the content of the special display to be displayed on the display unit 1230 of the data display device 1200.

This will be specifically described.
The gaming machine 1 with the gaming machine IDs P1 to P20 has a model name “Pachinko XXX”. Then, (1) general game history screen, (2) individual game history screen, and (3) menu screen are defined as display screens.

  (1) The general game history screen is a screen for displaying general game history information in the gaming machine 1. On this general game history screen, as general game history information, the total jackpot count, the total probability variation jackpot count, the total normal jackpot count, the total start count, the total ball hitting graph and the total jackpot history graph, payout rate propriety information are displayed. It is stipulated.

The total number of big hits is the total number of big hits (probability big hit, normal big hit) generated in the gaming machine 1.
The total probability variation jackpot number is the total number of probability variation jackpots generated in the gaming machine 1.
The total number of normal big hits is the total number of normal big hits generated in the gaming machine 1.
The total number of start times is the total number of start times in the gaming machine 1.
The total payout graph is a graph showing a change in the total payout of the gaming machine 1.
The general jackpot history graph is a graph showing the number of jackpots in the past predetermined period (for example, the past one week) generated in the gaming machine 1.
The payout rate suitability information is information for allowing a player or a store employee to confirm the suitability of the payout rate actually measured in the gaming machine 1.

  (2) The personal game history screen is a display screen for displaying personal game history information in the gaming machine 1. On this personal game history screen, as personal game history information, the number of individual jackpots, individual probability variation jackpot number, individual normal jackpot number, individual start number, individual ball chart and personal ball image, payout rate suitability information are displayed. It is stipulated.

The number of individual jackpots is the total number of individual jackpots (probability jackpots, normal jackpots) of the individual player generated in the gaming machine 1.
The personal probability variation jackpot number is the total number of individual probability variation jackpots of the individual player generated in the gaming machine 1.
The number of individual normal jackpots is the total number of normal jackpots of the individual player who has occurred in the gaming machine 1.
The individual start count is the total start count of individual players in the gaming machine 1.
The individual payout graph is a graph showing a change in the payout of individual players of the gaming machine 1.
The personal possession ball image is an image showing the personal possession ball of the player in the gaming machine 1. The personal possession image is displayed, for example, by matching 1000 balls with 1 dollar box and 10000 balls with one special box, and increasing or decreasing the dollar box and special box according to the increase or decrease of the number of balls. You can make it.

  (3) The menu screen is a display screen for a player who plays with the gaming machine 1 to select a menu. On the menu screen, as menu information, a volume / light quantity adjustment for allowing the player to adjust the volume and light quantity of the data display device 1200 and a method of using the data display device 1200 are explained to the player. And a display customization for allowing the player to freely customize the position, size, color and the like for displaying various information on the data display device 1200 are defined.

  Special display includes (1) jackpot effect display, (2) simultaneous effect display, (3) periodic notification display, (4) anti-slip display, (5) card forgotten display, (6) gaming machine error display , (7) display device error display, and (8) loan rate display.

  (1) The jackpot effect display is a display related to the effect that congratulates the occurrence of the jackpot when the jackpot occurs in the gaming machine 1. The jackpot effect display includes a display of a jackpot effect image, a jackpot effect image, and the like. For the purpose of celebrating the occurrence of a big hit in one gaming machine 1, the big hit effect display is executed as a special display.

  (2) The simultaneous effect display is a display related to the simultaneous effect performed simultaneously among the plurality of data display devices 1200. The simultaneous effect display includes display of a simultaneous effect image, a simultaneous effect image, and the like. The simultaneous effect display is executed as a special display for the purpose of enhancing the game motivation of the player by performing the simultaneous effect in conjunction with the plurality of data display devices 1200.

The following two methods can be mainly considered as a method for realizing the simultaneous production.
(1) The management device instructs each data display device 1200 to execute simultaneous effects.
(2) Each data display device 1200 performs a simultaneous performance independently.

  In the method (1), for example, the hall computer 600 that is a management device outputs a simultaneous effect signal that instructs each data display device 1200 to execute the simultaneous effect. Each data display device 1200 executes a simultaneous effect at the timing when the simultaneous effect signal is input from the hall computer 600. In this case, it is desirable to simultaneously output a simultaneous effect signal from the hall computer 600 to each data display device 1200 so that the timing of the simultaneous effect does not occur.

  In the method (2), each data display device 1200 executes a simultaneous effect based on the time measured internally and the elapsed time since the power is turned on. Specifically, the simultaneous effect is executed at a timing when the time becomes a predetermined time or when an elapsed time from the time when the power is turned on reaches a predetermined time. In this case, it is desirable to power on all the data display devices 1200 at the same time so as not to cause a shift in the timing of simultaneous performance.

  In this case, the process related to the simultaneous effect may be programmed in advance in the data display device 1200 so that any of the above methods (1) and (2) can be applied.

  In addition, it may be set on the hall computer 600 side which method (1) or (2) is applied to execute the simultaneous performance. In this case, setting data that determines which processing is to be applied to the data display device 1200 from the hall computer 600 is realized in the display device setting data 691 to be described later. What is necessary is just to deliver to the apparatus 1200.

  In the present embodiment, the simultaneous effect display includes a big hit running effect display. The jackpot running effect congratulates the data display device 1200 provided corresponding to the gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine 1 having the jackpot exists in the gaming machine 1 of the same model or the same island. This is an effect that displays a special video. Whether or not there is a big hit game machine 1 in the same model or gaming machine 1 of the same gaming island can be determined by whether or not a big hit signal is input from the same model or gaming machine 1 of the same gaming island. it can.

  In addition, when a big hit occurs in a plurality of gaming machines 1 of the same model or the same island and a big hit signal is input from a plurality of gaming machines 1 with a time difference, a big hit running effect is being executed for one gaming machine 1 If there is, the big hit running effect may be newly executed during the running big hit running effect, or the new big hit running effect may be executed after the running big hit running effect ends. Further, when a big hit occurs in another gaming machine 1 during the big hit running effect, execution of a new big hit running effect may be omitted.

  The above jackpot running effect can be realized by causing the data display device 1200 to display the jackpot video with a certain time difference from end to end of the game island. The big hit running effect is an effect that is performed at a constant time difference, but since it is an effect that is simultaneously performed by a plurality of data display devices 1200, in this embodiment, the big hit running effect is one of the simultaneous effects. This will be explained as one. The contents of the big hit running effect and various effects described later can be determined for each model of the gaming machine 1 or for each game island.

  Unlike the big hit running effect, in the individual data display device 1200, when a big hit occurs in the gaming machine 1 provided corresponding to the data display device 1200, a fanfare sound congratulating the big hit is displayed in the data display. The device 1200 may be output as a specific sound.

  In addition, when the number of balls possessed by the player increases with 1000 hits, 2000 shots, 3000 shots, etc. with the occurrence of a big hit, 1000 hits, 2000 hits, 3000 hits, etc. You may make it display the breakthrough display of the number of possession balls on the display part 1230, or perform the breakthrough effect which outputs the breakthrough notification sound of the number of possession balls from the sound output part 450 as a specific sound. Note that the number of possessed balls when executing the breakthrough effect may be 1000 shot units, 5000 shot units, or 10,000 shot units.

  (3) The periodic notice display is a display related to the notice that the data display device 1200 periodically makes. This periodic notice display includes display of various CM videos and CM images. The periodic notice display is executed as a special display for the purpose of advertising various products and services.

  (4) The stagnation prevention display is a display that alerts the player who plays with the gaming machine 1 to sneak into the game. This anti-intrusion display includes display of a message, a video, an image, etc. that alert the inversion. For the purpose of preventing the player from being immersed in the game and making a large investment, the anti-intrusion display is executed as a special display.

  (5) The forgotten card display is a display that alerts a player who plays with the gaming machine 1 to forget to remove the ball card from the inter-unit counting unit 500. The display of forgetting to remove a card includes a display of a message, a video, an image, etc. for calling attention to forgetting to remove a holding card. For the purpose of preventing the player from forgetting to take the possession card and matching theft, the forgotten card display is executed as a special display.

  (6) The gaming machine error display is a display indicating that an error including abnormality or fraud has occurred in the gaming machine 1. The abnormality of the gaming machine includes a failure of the gaming machine, the opening of the door, clogging, etc., and the illegality of the gaming machine includes a so-called goto action. A gaming machine error display is executed as a special display for the purpose of promptly calling a store clerk when an abnormality or fraud occurs in a gaming machine.

  (7) The display device error display is a display indicating that an error including abnormality or fraud has occurred in the data display device 1200. The abnormality of the display device includes detection of a failure of the display device or an illegal operation on the display device. A display device error display is executed as a special display for the purpose of promptly calling a store clerk when an abnormality or fraud occurs in the display device.

  (8) The loan rate display is a rate at which the game balls of the gaming machine 1 are loaned, and includes a display of a loan rate of 4 yen pachinko, 2 yen pachinko, and 1 yen pachinko. The loan rate display is executed as a special display for the purpose of enabling the player to know the loan rate of the gaming machine that performs the game.

  For the data display device 1200 provided corresponding to the gaming machine 1 of the same model, for example, a display screen to be displayed as a default can be determined as a general game history screen or a menu screen. By doing in this way, about the data display apparatus 1200 provided corresponding to the gaming machine 1 of the same model, a common screen can be displayed on all the devices, and the appearance can be improved.

  The above-mentioned special display may be the same display content regardless of the model of the gaming machine 1 or the game island, or may be different display content for each model or game island. . Even if the same display content is determined as the special display, the display mode of the special display may be determined so that the display is performed in a different manner for each model or each game island.

  Further, it is preferably for each model or for each gaming island, but in addition to this, for example, for each gaming ball lending rate (4 yen, 2 yen, 1 yen, etc.) in the gaming machine 1 or the type of gaming machine 1 ( Different special display contents and display modes may be determined for each type (max type, middle type, sweet digital, etc.) and for each type of gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine, slot machine, etc.).

  In addition, the above-mentioned special display may notify the player of the content by a message, may notify the player of the content by an image or video, or notify the player of the content by a combination of these. It is good also as what to do.

FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram of various index values related to payout rate reference information (design information) in the present embodiment, and shows index values in a table format.
In this table, the index value, the name of the index value, and the detailed contents of the index value are defined in association with each other.

  Here, the payout rate which is a problem in the present embodiment is the payout rate in the “non-big hit and low base state” and the “non-big hit and high base state”. In other words, the payout rate for the game balls paid out by winning the winning ball in the big winning game state (attacker) is not a problem, and it is paid by the winning ball by winning at the starting winning port or the general winning port. The issue is the payout rate of game balls.

  The index value “R1” has a name “low base payout number”, and its detailed content is “the number of payouts with prize balls in a non-hit and low base state”. In other words, the low base payout number R1 is the number of balls that have been paid out to the player by winning balls in the general winning opening and the starting winning opening constituting the gaming machine 1 in the low base state during non-big hit. However, in the gaming machine 1, in the low base state, there is basically no winning in the second starting winning opening (electricity chew), so the starting winning opening referred to here is the first starting winning opening (jaw). Point to.

  The name of the index value “S1” is “actual measured value of low base payout rate”, and the detailed content thereof is “ratio of R1 to the number of outs in non-big hit and low base state”. That is, the low base payout rate actual measurement value S1 is the ratio of the payout amount paid out to the player by the prize ball with respect to the out number in the low base state during the non-big hit.

  The index value “R2” has the name “high base payout number”, and the detailed content is “number of payouts with prize balls in non-big hit and high base state”. That is, the high base payout number R2 is the number of balls that are paid out to the player by winning balls in the general winning opening and the starting winning opening constituting the gaming machine 1 in the high base state during the non-big hit. However, in the gaming machine 1, in the high base state, not only the second start winning opening (electric chew) but also the first starting winning opening (navel) can be won. It refers to the first start winning opening (neck) and the second starting winning opening (electric chew).

  The name of the index value “S2” is “actual measured value of high base payout rate”, and the detailed content thereof is “ratio of R2 to the number of outs in a non-big hit and high base state”. That is, the high base payout rate actual measurement value S2 is the ratio of the payout amount paid out to the player by the prize ball with respect to the out number in the high base state during non-big hit.

  The index value “E1” is named “low base payout rate error”, and its detailed content is “difference between payout rate reference value and payout rate actual measurement value in low base state”. That is, the low base payout rate error U indicates how much the payout rate actual measurement value in the low base state deviates from the payout rate reference value determined for the low base state.

  The index value “E2” has the name “high base payout rate error” and the detailed content is “difference between the payout rate reference value and the payout rate actual measurement value in the high base state”. That is, the high base payout rate error V indicates how much the actual payout rate in the high base state deviates from the payout rate reference value determined for the high base state.

  Here, the payout rate reference value is a design value of the payout rate assumed by the gaming machine manufacturer, and is a value provided as an instruction manual from the gaming machine manufacturer to the store for each type of gaming machine. . The payout rate actual value is a value of the payout rate actually measured when a game is played on the gaming machine 1.

  In the present specification, the low base payout number R1 and the high base payout number R2 are collectively referred to as “payout number R”, and the low base payout rate actual value S1 and the high base payout rate actual value S2 are comprehensively described. This is expressed as “measurement rate S of payout rate”. Further, the low base payout rate error E1 and the high base payout rate error E2 are collectively referred to as “payout rate error E”.

FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram of the reference relative information in the present embodiment, and shows the reference relative state in a table format.
In this table, the reference index value, the name of the reference index value, and the detailed content of the reference index value are defined in association with each other.

  The name of the reference index value “α1” is “low base payout rate reference lower limit value”, and the detailed content is “lower limit value of payout rate reference range during non-big hit and low base state”.

  The name of the reference index value “β1” is “low base payout rate reference upper limit value”, and the detailed content thereof is “upper limit value of payout rate reference range in non-big hit and low base state”.

  The name of the reference index value “γ1” is “low base payout rate reference value”, and the detailed content thereof is “reference value of payout rate during non-big hit and low base state”.

  The low base payout rate reference lower limit value α1 and the low base payout rate reference upper limit value β1 define the low base payout rate reference ranges α1 to β1 that are the reference range of the payout rate in the non-hit and low base state.

  The name of the reference index value “α2” is “high base payout rate reference lower limit value”, and its detailed content is “lower limit value of payout rate reference range in non-big hit and high base state”.

  The name of the reference index value “β2” is “high base payout rate reference upper limit value”, and the detailed content thereof is “upper limit value of payout rate reference range during non-big hit and high base state”.

  The name of the reference index value “γ2” is “high base payout rate reference value”, and the detailed content thereof is “reference value of payout rate in non-big hit and high base state”.

  The high base payout rate reference lower limit α2 and the high base payout rate reference upper limit β2 define a high base payout rate reference range α2 to β2 that is a reference range of the payout rate in the high base state.

  Here, the payout rate reference range is the same as the payout rate reference value described above, and is the design range of the payout rate assumed by the gaming machine manufacturer, and each type of gaming machine is handled by the gaming machine manufacturer at the store. A numerical range provided as instructions.

  The payout rate reference value and the payout rate reference range are examples of the reference relative information according to the present invention, and the payout rate actual value is an example of the actual measurement relative value according to the present invention.

  Here, for the payout rate reference information including the payout rate reference value and the payout rate reference range, for example, the store manager refers to the instruction manual for each type of gaming machine 1 provided by the gaming machine manufacturer. The hall computer 600 can be stored by performing an operation to be input to the hall computer 600. Then, the display device setting data 691 including the payout rate reference information is transmitted from the hall computer 600 to the data display device 1200 provided corresponding to each game machine 1 of each model, whereby the data display device 1200 It is possible to calculate a payout rate error, determine whether or not the payout rate actual value is appropriate, and the like.

  Although different from the above, for example, a store employee refers to an instruction manual and directly inputs payout rate standard information corresponding to the model of the gaming machine 1 to the corresponding data display device 1200. By doing so, the payout rate reference information may be stored in the storage unit 1290 of the data display device 1200.

  The display mode setting table 682 is a table for setting the display mode for displaying the display contents on the display unit 1230 of the data display device 1200. An example of the table configuration is shown in FIG. .

  The display mode setting table 682 stores display screen-specific data and special display-specific data for each gaming machine ID and model name.

The display screen data is data determined for each display screen defined in the display content setting table 681, and an example of the data configuration is shown in FIG.
In the display screen data, display contents and display modes are defined in association with the display screen.

In the display screen, the type of display screen defined in the display content setting table 681 is defined. These display screens are display screens that are sequentially switched when a screen switching icon displayed on the display unit 1230 of the data display device 1200 is tapped.
In the display content, the display content displayed in the mode for the display screen is defined.
In the display mode, the display position, size (size), color, and the like of the display content on the display screen are determined.

This will be specifically described.
The data by display screen shown in FIG. 23 is data about the display screen “total game history screen”. In the mode “normal mode”, the display contents include “total number of big hits”, “total number of probable big hits”, “total The “usual number of jackpots”, “total number of start times”, “total game play graph”, “total jackpot history graph”, “service icon”, and “screen switching icon” are defined. The total game history screen is set to be displayed on the data display device 1200 as an initial display screen (default display screen), for example.

  The “total jackpot count” to “total jackpot history graph” are total game history information determined in the mode “normal mode” of the display content setting table 681, and “service icon” and “screen switching icon” are touch panels. By performing a tap operation on 1222, the icon is used for a player to provide a service or switch screens, and is an icon that is always displayed on the display unit 1230. These icons are a kind of operation information for the player to perform various operations.

  In the display mode, the position, size, color, etc. when each display content is displayed on the general game history screen are individually determined. For simplification, all are shown as “***” in the drawing. It is shown.

The special display-specific data is data determined for each special display defined in the display content setting table 681, and an example of the data configuration is shown in FIG.
The special display-specific data shown in this figure is data related to simultaneous production in the special display, and the special display, the type, the production No, and the production video are defined in association with each other.

In the special display, a simultaneous effect of the special displays defined in the display content setting table 681 is defined.
A simultaneous production is defined as the type.
In the production No., a number of simultaneous production of the type is defined.
In the effect video, video data used in the simultaneous effect of the type is defined.

This will be specifically described.
For example, a plurality of effects such as “big hit running effect”, “live effect”,... Are defined.
“Movie_R1” is defined as the production video for the production No. “1” of the big hit running production. For the production No. “1” in the live production, “Movie_L1” is defined as the production video.

The special display setting table 683 is a table for setting special display to be displayed on the display unit 1230 of the data display device 1200, and an example of the table configuration is shown in FIG.
The special display setting table 683 stores special display setting data for each gaming machine ID and model name.

  In the special display setting data, the priority and the special display are stored in association with each other for the gaming machine ID and the model name.

A numerical value from “1” to “8” is stored as the priority. The smaller the value, the higher the display priority.
In addition, for the special display, "Machine machine error display", "Display device error display", "Drinking prevention display", "Card removal forgotten display", "Big hit effect display", "Simultaneous effect display""," Periodic notice display "," lending rate display "are stored.

  In the present embodiment, the data display device 1200 performs control for causing the display unit 1230 to display a special display in accordance with the establishment of a special display execution condition that is an execution condition defined for each special display. Then, the special display is terminated when a predetermined time has elapsed since the execution of the special display was started.

  Further, when the special display execution condition is satisfied, the data display device 1200 determines whether or not a special display having a higher priority than the special display corresponding to the special display execution condition is being executed. If it is being executed, execution of special display corresponding to the special display execution condition is restricted. Conversely, if a special display with a lower priority than the special display corresponding to the special display execution condition is being executed, the special display being executed is terminated and the special display corresponding to the special display execution condition is terminated. Is displayed.

  Although different from the present embodiment, if a special display having a higher priority than the special display corresponding to the established special display execution condition is being executed, the process waits until the special display being executed ends. After the special display being executed ends, a special display corresponding to the special display execution condition may be displayed. If a special display with a lower priority than the special display corresponding to the established special display execution condition is being executed, the special display being executed is interrupted and the special display corresponding to the special display execution condition is displayed. After execution, the execution of the interrupted special display may be resumed.

The payout rate suitability information display setting table 684 is a table for setting the payout rate suitability information display of the data display device 1200, and an example of the table configuration is shown in FIG.
The payout rate setting table 684 includes display condition setting data, display mode setting data, and detailed display setting data.

In the display condition setting data, a display setting number, which is a display condition setting number, and a display condition in the display setting number are defined in association with each other.
In the display setting No “a1”, “always” is defined as a display condition. This means that the payout rate suitability information is set to be always displayed.
In the display setting No. “a2”, “-(always non-display)” is defined as a display condition. This means that the payout rate suitability information display is set to be always hidden.

  In the display setting No. “a3”, “the actual payout rate is out of the payout rate reference range” is defined as the display condition. This means that the payout rate suitability information is set to be displayed when the payout rate actual measurement value S is outside the payout rate reference range. When the actual payout rate S is within the payout rate reference range, the payout rate suitability information display is not displayed.

  In the display setting No. “a4”, “the actual payout rate is within the payout rate reference range” is defined as the display condition. This means that the payout rate suitability information is set to be displayed when the payout rate actual measurement value S is within the payout rate reference range. When the actual payout rate S is outside the payout rate reference range, the payout rate suitability information display is not displayed.

  In the display setting No. “a5”, “display operation using the setting remote controller” is defined as a display condition. This means that, when a signal instructing display of the payout rate suitability information is received from the setting remote controller 700 possessed by the store clerk, the payout rate suitability information is set to be displayed.

  In the display mode setting data, a display setting number that is a display mode setting number and a display mode in the display setting number are defined in association with each other.

  In the display setting No “b1”, a “color change mode” is defined as the display mode. This means that the payout rate suitability information display is set to be displayed in the color change mode. The color change mode is a mode for displaying whether or not the payout rate actual measurement value is appropriate by changing the color of a color change icon, which will be described later.

  In the display setting No “b2”, “meter mode” is defined as the display mode. This means that the payout rate suitability information display is set to be displayed in the meter mode. The meter mode is a mode for displaying the appropriateness of the payout rate actual measurement value by increasing / decreasing the meter described later.

  In the display setting No “b3”, “error mode” is defined as the display mode. This means that the payout rate suitability information display is set to be displayed in the error mode. The error mode is a mode for displaying the appropriateness of the payout rate actual value by displaying the payout rate error.

  The detailed display setting table is a table for detailed display setting in the display mode defined in the display mode setting data, and display conditions and display modes are determined for each display mode.

  The detailed display setting data shown at the top in FIG. 26 is data regarding the color change mode, and the type number, which is the type number, the condition, and the display color are determined in association with each other.

  For type No. “1”, “α <S <β” is set as a condition, and “green” is set as a display color. This means that when the actual payout rate S is larger than the payout rate reference lower limit value α and smaller than the payout rate reference upper limit value, the color change icon is set to be displayed in green in the color change mode. To do. That is, when the payout rate actual value S is within the payout rate reference range, a green display indicates that the payout rate actual value S is a safe range value (appropriate value).

  In type No. “2”, “S = α or β = S” is set as a condition, and “yellow” is set as a display color. This is to set the color change icon to be displayed in yellow in the color change mode when the actual payout rate S is equal to either the payout rate reference lower limit value α or the payout rate reference upper / lower value β. Means. That is, when the payout rate actual value S is a boundary value of the payout rate reference range, a yellow display indicates that the payout rate actual value S is a boundary area value (a value between the appropriate and inappropriate boundaries). To do.

  In type No. “3”, “S <α or β <S” is set as a condition, and “red” is set as a display color. This is to set the color change icon to be displayed in red in the color change mode when the actual payout rate S is smaller than the payout rate reference lower limit value α or larger than the payout rate reference upper limit value β. Means. That is, when the payout rate actual value S is a value outside the payout rate reference range, a red display notifies that the payout actual value S is a dangerous value (inappropriate value).

  Although not shown in the drawings, display conditions other than the color change mode (meter mode and error mode) are determined such as the display position / color / size of the payout rate propriety information display. ing.

  The above display condition setting data is a table for commonly setting the display conditions of the payout rate suitability information regardless of the type of display mode, but is displayed for each display mode defined in the display mode setting data. Conditions may be set individually.

The model information setting table 685 is a table for setting model information of the gaming machine 1 in the data display device 1200, and an example of the table configuration is shown in FIG.
The model information setting table 685 stores model information setting data for each ID and model of the gaming machine 1.

  Each model information setting data includes a gaming machine ID that is identification information of the gaming machine 1, a model name of the gaming machine 1, outer end output data of the gaming machine 1, and a payout rate of the gaming machine 1. Reference information data is stored.

  In the outer end output data, the use of the external output terminal (connector CN) from the gaming machine 1 to the external device and the type of signal to be output are determined.

  In the payout rate reference information data, a payout rate standard that associates a payout rate reference lower limit value, a payout rate reference upper limit value, and a payout rate reference value for each of the low base and high base types of the gaming machine 1 Information is defined.

This will be specifically described.
The data shown at the top of FIG. 27 is data relating to the ID of the gaming machine 1 “P1 to P20” and the model name “Pachinko XXX”. The outer end output data includes a jackpot signal from CN1, a probability changing signal from CN2, a time signal from CN3, a start signal from CN4, a winning ball signal from CN5, and a CN6 signal from CN6. It is defined that each security signal is output.

  In the payout rate reference information data, “α1” is set as the payout rate reference lower limit value, “β1” is set as the payout rate reference upper limit value, and “γ1” is set as the payout rate reference value for the type “low base”. For the type “high base”, “α2” is set as the payout rate reference lower limit value, “β2” is set as the payout rate reference upper limit value, and “γ2” is set as the payout rate reference value.

The device correspondence table 686 is a table that defines the correspondence between the gaming machine 1, the data display device 1200, and the inter-unit counting unit 500, and an example of the table configuration is shown in FIG.
The device correspondence table 686 includes a gaming machine ID, a model name, a corresponding display device ID that is identification information of the data display device 1200 corresponding to the gaming machine 1 with the gaming machine ID, and a gaming machine with the gaming machine ID. 1 is determined in association with the corresponding unit ID, which is identification information of the inter-unit counting unit 500 corresponding to 1.

FIG. 29 is a diagram illustrating an example of a data configuration of the display device setting data 691.
The display device setting data 691 includes a data display device ID 6911 that is an ID of the data display device 1200, a corresponding gaming machine ID 6912 that is an ID of the gaming machine 1 corresponding to the data display device 1200, and the data display device 1200. Corresponding unit ID 6913 which is the ID of the inter-counter counting unit 500 corresponding to, display content setting data 6914, display mode setting data 6915, special display setting data 6916, and payout rate suitability information display setting data 6917. And model information setting data 6918 are included.

  The display content setting data 6914 is data for setting the display content of the data display device 1200 having the data display device ID. Specifically, the game machine ID corresponding to the data display device ID is determined based on the device correspondence table 686 from the data records defined in the display content setting table 681 (see FIG. 19). The data record is extracted and used as display content setting data 6914.

  The display mode setting data 6915 is data for setting the display mode of the data display device 1200 of the data display device ID. Specifically, the gaming machine ID corresponding to the data display device ID is selected from the display mode setting data set in the display mode setting table 682 (see FIG. 22) based on the device correspondence table 686. The determined data is extracted and used as display mode setting data 6915.

  The special display setting data 6916 is data for setting the special display of the data display device 1200 of the data display device ID. Specifically, the display device ID corresponding to the data display device ID is selected from the special display setting data set in the special display setting table 683 (see FIG. 25) based on the device correspondence table 686. The determined data is extracted and used as special display setting data 6916.

  The payout rate suitability information display setting data 6917 is setting data related to the display of the payout rate suitability information of the data display device 1200 of the data display device ID. Specifically, the data display device ID is selected from the payout rate suitability information display setting data set in the payout rate suitability information display setting table 684 (see FIG. 26) based on the device correspondence table 686. Data determined for the corresponding display device ID is extracted and used as payout rate suitability information display setting data 6917.

  The model information setting data 6918 is data for setting a game model of the data display device 1200 of the data display device ID. Specifically, the display device ID corresponding to the data display device ID is selected from the model information setting data set in the model information setting table 685 (see FIG. 27) based on the device correspondence table 686. The determined data is extracted and used as model information setting data 6918.

  The game total database 688 is a database in which game total data related to each gaming machine 1 totaled by the game information totaling unit 613 is stored.

  The sales total database 689 is a database that stores total data related to sales in the gaming machine 1 installed in the store. The sales summary database 689 stores sales summary data obtained by summarizing information related to store sales. For example, it includes a percent (machine percent or premium percent), a payout rate, a customer delinquency rate, sales balls, premium balls, Data such as the amount of free gifts and the gross profit is aggregated and stored by the sales aggregation unit 615.

[2-6. Functional configuration of ball management computer]
FIG. 30 is a diagram illustrating an example of a functional configuration of the ball management computer 800.
The ball management computer 800 includes a processing unit 810, an input unit 820, a display unit 830, a communication unit 840, a clock unit 850, and a storage unit 860.

  The processing unit 810 is a control device and an arithmetic device that collectively control each unit of the ball management computer 800 in accordance with various programs such as a system program stored in the storage unit 860, such as a processor such as a CPU or DSP, an ASIC, or the like. The integrated circuit is configured.

  The input unit 820 is an input unit configured to include, for example, a keyboard and a mouse, and outputs a pressed key or button signal (operation signal) to the processing unit 810.

  The display unit 830 is a display device that performs various displays based on a display control signal output from the processing unit 810, and includes an LCD or the like. The display unit 830 displays data contents of various databases stored in the storage unit 860.

  The communication unit 840 is a communication device for performing communication with the inter-counter counting unit 500, and includes, for example, a wired communication module that performs communication via a wired cable. The communication unit 840 receives an authentication request signal from the inter-counter counting unit 500.

  The clock unit 850 is an internal clock included in the ball management computer 800, and includes, for example, a crystal oscillator including a crystal resonator and an oscillation circuit. The time measured (including date) of the clock unit 850 is output to the processing unit 810 as needed.

  The storage unit 860 stores a ball management program 861 that is executed as a ball management process by the processing unit 810, possession card management data 865, and unit management data 867.

  The possession card management data 865 is the management data of the possession card, for example, the possession card ID given to the possession card possessed by the player and the issue date and time when the possession card is issued And the number of balls possessed by the player are stored in association with each other.

  The unit management data 867 is management data of the inter-counter counting unit 500, and is stored in association with the ID of the gaming machine 1 and the corresponding data display device 1200 corresponding to the unit ID of the inter-counter counting unit 500, for example.

[2-7. Configuration of data display device]
[2-7-1. Appearance configuration]
FIG. 31 is a diagram illustrating an example of an external configuration of the data display device 1200.
The data display device 1200 is attached to a lamp plate that is openable and closable at an upper position on the side surface of the gaming island, and is installed above each gaming machine 1 corresponding to each gaming machine 1.

  The data display device 1200 includes a display unit 1230 that is a display unit configured to include a liquid crystal display in a central portion. Further, the data display device 1200 includes a left frame LED 1251 and a right frame LED 1252 as light emitting means on the left side and the right side as viewed from the player (as viewed from the side facing the gaming machine). Specifically, a left frame LED 1251 is provided on the left side adjacent to the display unit 1230, and a right frame LED 1252 is provided on the right side adjacent to the display unit 1230. That is, the left frame LED 1251 and the right frame LED 1252 are provided around the display unit 1230.

  Each of the left frame LED 1251 and the right frame LED 1252 is an LED module configured by covering a large number of LEDs with a lamp cover portion formed of a transparent resin material. The light emitters of the left frame LED 1251 and the right frame LED 1252 emit light in a light emission color designated by the control of the processing unit 1210 and the LED driver 1252 described later. A central portion sandwiched between the left frame LED 1251 and the right frame LED 1252 is provided with a display portion 1230 formed of a liquid crystal display device (LCD), and a call button 1221 operable by a player is provided on the lower frame portion.

  The call button 1221 is a button that is pressed by a player playing a game on the corresponding gaming machine 1 to call a store clerk. The call button 1221 is configured to call a store clerk by pressing the data display device 1200 regardless of whether the data display device 1200 is controlled in the normal mode or the energy saving mode.

  The left frame LED 1251 and the right frame LED 1252 emit light with the common light emission pattern described above in the normal display, and emit light with the individual light emission pattern described above when the special display is displayed. Further, the display unit 1230 is configured to be able to display game information in the gaming machine 1, and is configured to be able to display a special display in accordance with the establishment of the special display execution condition.

  The data display device 1200 is equipped with a control unit that performs control for confirming the input status of various signals in the device itself and executing game information aggregation and jackpot running effects. Here, the big hit running effect is executed by inputting a big hit running effect signal from the hall computer 600. In the case of executing the big hit running effect, the image effect for displaying the character on the display unit 1230 is executed after executing the light emitting effect of causing the left frame LED 1251 and the right frame LED 1252 to emit light.

  The jackpot running effect is not limited to the jackpot running effect signal transmitted from the hall computer 600. For example, the jackpot running effect is performed based on the jackpot signal transmitted from the corresponding gaming machine 1. Also good. Further, the big hit running effect may be realized by sequentially propagating the big hit running effect signal between the adjacent data display devices 1200.

  In addition, the data display device 1200 according to the present embodiment is configured to include LEDs, which are light emitting means, on the left and right sides of the display unit 1230, but the installation position of the light emitting means is not limited to this. For example, LEDs may be installed on the upper side or the lower side of the display unit 1230, or LEDs may be installed at four locations on the left side, right side, upper side, and lower side of the display unit 1230.

[2-7-2. Functional configuration]
FIG. 32 is a block diagram illustrating an example of a functional configuration of the data display device 1200.
The data display device 1200 includes a processing unit 1210, an operation unit 1220, a display unit 1230, a sound output unit 1240, a light emitting unit 1250, a first communication unit 1261, a second communication unit 1262, and a third communication unit. 1263, a short-range wireless communication unit 1265, a clock unit 1275, a power supply unit 1280, and a storage unit 1290.

  The processing unit 1210 is a control device and an arithmetic device that collectively control each functional unit included in the data display device 1200, and includes a processor such as a CPU or DSP and an integrated circuit such as an ASIC.

  The operation unit 1220 is an operation device for the player to perform various operations on the own device, and includes a call button 1221 and a touch panel 1222.

  The display unit 1230 is a display device that includes a display such as an LCD, and displays various types of information under the control of the processing unit 1210. The touch screen 1222 is formed integrally with the display unit 1230 to form a touch screen.

  The sound output unit 1240 is a sound output device configured with a speaker or the like, and outputs various sounds according to the control of the processing unit 1210.

  The light emitting unit 1250 is a light emitting device that includes an LED or the like, and is provided in the left frame LED 1251 provided in the left case frame of the display unit 1230 and the right case frame of the display unit 1230. And a right frame LED 1252.

  The first communication unit 1261 is configured by including a wired communication module and the like, and is a communication device for performing communication with the corresponding gaming machine 1. The first communication unit 1261 receives a gaming machine signal from the corresponding gaming machine 1 and also receives an out signal from the out ball detector 200.

  The second communication unit 1262 includes a wired communication module and the like, and is a communication device for performing communication with the corresponding unit 500. Second communication unit 1262 receives a unit signal from corresponding unit 500.

  The third communication unit 1263 has a wired communication module and the like, and is a communication device for communicating with the hall computer 600. The third communication unit 1263 receives a management device signal and display device setting data 691 from the hall computer 600.

  The short-range wireless communication unit 1265 includes a wireless communication module and the like, and is a communication device for performing short-range wireless communication with a setting remote controller 700 possessed by a store clerk. The short-range wireless communication unit 1265 receives various display settings including a payout rate suitability information display from the setting remote controller 700, a display-related signal for selecting whether to display, switching display modes, and the like.

  The clock unit 1275 is an internal clock of the data display device 1200, and outputs the clocked time (timed time) to the processing unit 1210.

  The power supply unit 1280 is a power supply device connected to each function unit included in the data display device 1200, and supplies power to each function unit of the data display device 1200 according to the control of the power supply control unit 1212.

  The storage unit 1290 is a storage device that includes a memory such as a ROM, an EEPROM, or a RAM. The storage unit 1290 stores a data display device processing program 1291 that is read out by the processing unit 1210 and executed as display device processing. The data display device processing program 1291 includes, for example, a payout rate index value calculation program 1291a executed as a payout rate index value calculation process and a display processing program 1291b executed as a display process as subroutines.

  The storage unit 1290 also has data for presentation 1293 for performing various effects by the data display device 1200, payout rate total data 1295, game history total data 1297, and display device setting received from the hall computer 600. Data 691 is stored.

The payout rate total data 1295 is data storing the total value related to the payout rate in the corresponding gaming machine 1, and an example of the data configuration is shown in FIG.
In the payout rate total data 1295, a base, a winning opening, a prescribed number of winning balls, a payout number, an out number, an actual payout rate value, and a payout rate error are stored in association with each other.

  The base includes “low base” and “high base”. However, as described above, the low base and the high base mean strictly “non-big hit and low base state” and “non-big hit during medium and high base state”, respectively.

In the prescribed number of winning balls, a prescribed value for the number of winning balls by winning a prize for each winning opening is determined.
The number of payouts stores the total number of game balls actually paid out to the player by winning at each winning opening. The number of payouts is synonymous with the number of prize balls in the first embodiment.
The total number of outs calculated based on the out signal transmitted from the out-sphere detector 200 is stored in the number of outs.
The payout rate actual value stores a value (%) obtained by dividing the payout number by the out number and multiplying by “100”.
In the payout rate error, a value (%) obtained by subtracting the payout rate reference value from the actual payout rate value is stored.

  The game history total data 1297 is data that stores a total value of game history information in the corresponding gaming machine 1.

[2-8. processing]
[2-8-1. Hall computer processing]
FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of management processing executed by the processing unit 610 of the hall computer 600 according to the management program 671 stored in the ROM 670.

  First, the processing unit 610 executes the process of loop A for each data display device 1200 (A1 to A7). The process of Loop A is a process executed in order for each data display device 1200.

  In the processing of loop A, the processing unit 610 performs setting data generation processing in accordance with the setting data generation program 671a stored in the ROM 670 (A1).

  Specifically, the setting data generation unit 611 includes a display content setting table 681, a display mode setting table 682, a special display setting table 683, and a payout rate suitability information display setting table 684 stored in the hard disk 670. Based on the model information setting table 685 and the device correspondence table 686, the display device setting data 691 for the data display device 1200 is generated using the method described above. Then, the processing unit 610 stores the generated display device setting data 691 in the RAM 690 (A3).

  Next, the processing unit 610 transmits the generated display device setting data 691 to the data display device 1200 (A5). Then, the processing unit 610 moves the processing to the next data display device 1200.

  When the processing of the loop A is completed, the game information totaling unit 613 totals the game data of each gaming machine 1 and stores it as game total data in the game total database 688 of the hard disk 680 (A7).

  Next, the processing unit 610 determines whether or not the execution condition for the big hit running effect is satisfied (A11). The execution condition of the big hit running effect is to input a big hit signal from any type of gaming machine 1. If it is determined that the execution condition is satisfied (A11; Yes), a big hit running effect signal is transmitted to the data display device 1200 corresponding to the model of the gaming machine 1 (A13).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the execution condition for the big hit running effect has not been established (A11; No), the processing unit 610 determines whether the execution condition for other types of simultaneous effects has been established (A15), If it is determined that it is established (A15; Yes), a simultaneous effect signal corresponding to the established execution condition is transmitted to the data display device 1200 (A17).

  Although different from the present embodiment, when the data display device 1200 performs a simultaneous effect, the data display device 1200 does not perform the simultaneous effect based on the simultaneous effect signal transmitted from the hall computer 600. Based on the output result of the unit 1275, simultaneous production may be performed. For example, a simultaneous effect may be performed every time the elapsed time from when the data display device 1200 is turned on reaches a certain time.

  After A13 or A17, the processing unit 610 determines whether it is a periodical notification timing (A19). The periodical notification timing can be determined as a timing at regular time intervals (for example, every 3 hours or every 6 hours), for example. When there are a plurality of types of contents to be periodically notified, the timing for each different time interval may be determined as the periodic notification timing.

  If it determines with it being a periodical notification timing (A19; Yes), the process part 610 will transmit a periodical notification signal to the corresponding data display apparatus 1200 (A21).

  Next, the processing unit 610 determines whether or not to end the processing (A23). For example, when the power to the hall computer 600 is turned off when the store is closed, it is determined that the process is to be ended. If it determines with continuing a process (A23; No), the process part 610 will return a process to A9. If it is determined that the process is to be ended (A23; Yes), the processing unit 610 ends the management process.

[2-8-2. Data display device processing]
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of data display device processing executed by the processing unit 1210 of the data display device 1200 according to the data display device processing program 1291 stored in the storage unit 1290.

  First, the processing unit 1210 determines whether or not it is the setting timing of its own device (C1). The setting timing can be, for example, the timing when the power of the own device is turned on. The setting timing in this case may be determined by confirming whether or not the set flag indicating that the display contents and operation contents of the own apparatus are set is set to “ON”. The set flag may be set to “ON” after a setting process described later is executed, and cleared to “OFF” when the data display device 1200 is turned off at the end of the store operation. .

  When it is determined that it is the setting timing (when it is determined that the set flag is “OFF”) (C1; Yes), the processing unit 1210 requests the hall computer 600 for the display device setting data 691, and the hall computer 600 The display device setting data 691 is acquired from (C3).

  In this case, the data display device 1200 may establish communication with the hall computer 600 and request the display device setting data 691 or the data display device 1200 and the hall computer 600 can always communicate with each other. The display device setting data 691 may be automatically distributed from the hall computer 600 to the data display device 1200.

  Next, the processing unit 1210 executes a setting process (C5). Specifically, the display device setting data 691 is referred to, display content to be displayed on the display unit 1230 is determined based on the display content setting data 6914, and displayed on the display unit 1230 based on the display mode setting data 6915. The display mode to be displayed is determined, and the priority of special display to be displayed on the display unit 1230 is determined based on the special display setting data 6916. Further, based on the payout rate suitability information display setting data 6917, the display unit 1230 determines whether or not to display the payout rate suitability information display and the display mode. Then, the display unit 1230 is allowed to perform display based on the determined content. Further, the processing unit 1210 determines the model information of the corresponding gaming machine 1 based on the model information setting data 6918, and sets various index values such as an actual payout rate value and a payout rate error.

  Next, the processing unit 1210 starts executing the game history total data update process (C7). Specifically, the game history is totaled based on the gaming machine signal transmitted from the corresponding gaming machine 1, and the process of updating the gaming history total data 1297 in the storage unit 1290 is started. More specifically, when a start signal is received, “1” is added to the start count and updated, and when a big hit signal is received, “1” is added to the big hit count and updated. When a signal during probability change and a signal during time reduction are received, the number is updated by adding “1” to the number of probability change big hits. Update by adding "1".

  Further, the processing unit 1210 starts executing the payout rate total data update process (C9). Specifically, a process of calculating an index value necessary for calculating the actual payout rate based on the gaming machine signal transmitted from the corresponding gaming machine 1 and updating the payout rate aggregate data 1295 in the storage unit 1290 is performed. Start.

  Specifically, the processing unit 1210 determines the current base state. Specifically, when the time reduction signal is not received from the corresponding gaming machine 1, the low base state is determined. Further, when a time-short / medium signal is received from the corresponding gaming machine 1, it is determined that the high base state.

  When the big hit signal is not received from the corresponding gaming machine 1 and is in the low base state, every time a prize ball signal is received from the corresponding gaming machine 1, it corresponds to the low base state of the payout rate totaling data 1295 The first specified number of balls (10 balls) is added to the number of payouts to be updated. When an out signal is received from the out ball detector 200, the second specified ball number (10 balls) is added to the out number corresponding to the low base state of the payout rate total data 1295 and updated.

  On the other hand, when the jackpot signal is not received from the corresponding gaming machine 1 and is in the high base state, the high base state of the payout rate total data 1295 is received every time a prize ball signal is received from the corresponding gaming machine 1. The first specified number of balls (10 balls) is added to the number of payouts corresponding to and updated. Further, when an out signal is received from the out ball detector 200, the second specified number of balls (10 balls) is added to the number of outs corresponding to the high base state of the payout rate totaling data 1295 and updated.

  Next, the processing unit 1210 executes a payout rate index value calculation process according to the payout rate index value calculation program 1291a stored in the storage unit 1290 (C11).

FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing an exemplary flow of a payout rate index value calculation process.
First, the processing unit 1210 determines whether or not the corresponding gaming machine 1 is in a non-hit (E1). Specifically, when the jackpot signal is not received from the corresponding gaming machine 1, it is determined that the corresponding gaming machine 1 is not hitting the jackpot. If it is determined that a non-big hit is not being made (a big hit is being made) (E1; No), the processing unit 1210 ends the payout rate index value calculation process.

  If it is determined that the corresponding gaming machine 1 is in a non-hit (E1; Yes), the processing unit 1210 determines the base state of the corresponding gaming machine 1 (E2). Specifically, when the time / medium signal is received from the corresponding gaming machine 1, the corresponding game machine 1 is determined to be in the high base state, and when the time / medium signal is not received from the corresponding gaming machine 1. The corresponding gaming machine 1 is determined to be in the low base state.

  If the low base state is determined (E2; low base state), the processing unit 1210 determines whether it is the low base payout rate actual value calculation timing (E3). Here, various timings can be determined as the low base payout rate actual value calculation timing. For example, the timing may be a fixed time (for example, every hour), or may be a timing each time the number of outs stored in the payout rate total data 1295 reaches a fixed number (for example, 100 balls). In addition to this, the calculation of the actual payout rate may be instructed to the data display device 1200 via the hall computer 600 or the like by the store manager.

  If it is determined that it is the low base payout rate actual value calculation timing (E3; Yes), the processing unit 1210 executes low base payout rate actual value calculation processing (E5). Specifically, referring to the payout rate aggregate data 1295, the low base payout rate actual measurement value (%) is obtained by dividing the payout number stored in association with the low base state by the out number and multiplying by 100. The calculated payout rate corresponding to the low base state of the payout rate total data 1295 is updated.

  Next, the processing unit 1210 executes a low base payout rate error calculation process (E7). Specifically, the low base payout rate reference value of the corresponding gaming machine 1 stored in the model information setting data 6918 of the display device setting data 691 is subtracted from the actually measured low base payout rate calculated in E5. To calculate the low base payout rate error (%), and update the payout rate error corresponding to the low base state of the payout rate total data 1295.

  Next, the processing unit 1210 sets the low base payout rate suitability information display update flag to “ON” (E9). The low base payout rate suitability information display update flag is a flag indicating that the display of the low base payout rate suitability information on the display unit 1230 is updated, and is initially set to “OFF”. Then, the processing unit 1210 ends the payout rate index value calculation process.

  On the other hand, if the high base state is determined (E2; high base state), the processing unit 1210 determines whether it is the high base payout rate actual value calculation timing (E11). As with the low base payout rate actual value calculation timing, various timings can be determined for the high base payout rate actual value calculation timing.

  If it is determined that it is the high base payout rate actual value calculation timing (E11; Yes), the processing unit 1210 executes high base payout rate actual value calculation processing (E13). Specifically, with reference to the payout rate total data 1295, the high base payout rate actual measurement value (%) is obtained by dividing the payout number stored in association with the high base state by the out number and multiplying by 100. The calculated payout rate corresponding to the high base state of the payout rate total data 1295 is updated.

  Next, the processing unit 1210 executes a high base payout rate error calculation process (E15). Specifically, the high base payout rate reference value of the corresponding gaming machine 1 stored in the model information setting data 6918 of the display device setting data 691 is subtracted from the actual high base payout rate calculated in E13. To calculate the high base payout rate error (%), and update the payout rate error corresponding to the high base of the payout rate total data 1295.

  Next, the processing unit 1210 sets the high base payout rate suitability information display update flag to “ON” (E17). The high base payout rate suitability information display update flag is a flag indicating that the display of the high base payout rate suitability information on the display unit 1230 is updated, and is initially set to “OFF”. Then, the processing unit 1210 ends the payout rate index value calculation process.

  Returning to the data display device processing of FIG. 35, if the payout rate index value calculation processing is executed, the processing unit 1210 executes payout rate suitability determination processing (C13). Specifically, the payout rate reference lower limit α of the corresponding gaming machine 1 in which the actual payout rate value calculated in the payout rate index value calculation process is stored in the model information setting data 6918 of the display device setting data 691. And within the payout rate reference range defined based on the payout rate reference upper limit β, that is, “appropriate” if “α ≦ S ≦ β”, and out of the payout rate reference range, that is, “S <α or β <S”. If there is, it is determined as “inappropriate”.

  Next, the processing unit 1210 determines whether or not the result of determining whether or not the payout rate is appropriate (C15). If it is determined that the payout rate is inappropriate (C15; No), the processing unit 1210 sets the gaming machine ID of the corresponding gaming machine 1. The data is output to the hall computer 600 (C17). By doing in this way, the manager of the store can grasp the gaming machine 1 in which the payout rate may be inappropriate, and opens the glass door frame 3a of the gaming machine 1 to the store clerk. An instruction can be given to confirm the display monitor 26.

  After C17 or if the payout rate suitability determination result is appropriate (C15; Yes), the processing unit 1210 executes display processing according to the display processing program 1291b stored in the storage unit 1290 (C19). ).

FIG. 37 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the flow of display processing.
First, the processing unit 1210 executes screen display control processing (G1). Specifically, control for switching the display screen is executed in accordance with an operation for switching the display screen being displayed by the player (hereinafter referred to as “screen switching operation”).

  Thereafter, the processing unit 1210 executes a special display control process (G3). Specifically, it is determined whether or not a special display execution condition is satisfied. If it is determined that the special display execution condition is satisfied, the special display is displayed on the display unit 1230.

  Here, the special display execution condition can be determined as follows, for example.

(1) Big hit effect display "Big hit signal from corresponding pachinko machine ON"

(2) Simultaneous effect display “Simultaneous effect signal ON from hall computer”

(3) Periodic notification display “Regular notification signal from hall computer ON”

(4) Overflow prevention display (A) “The big hit signal from the corresponding pachinko machine turned off and the number of fluctuations reached the specified number”
(B) “Probability change signal from the corresponding pachinko machine ON → OFF”
(A) is a case where a so-called humming occurs. For example, the specified number of times can be set to “1000 times”. If a sneak occurs, the player may be exposed and may continue to play the game to make an excessive investment.
(B) is a case where the probability variation state has ended. When the probability change state ends, the game returns to the normal state, and if the game is continued as it is, there is a possibility that the player may lose money by taking out the balls that have been earned.

(5) Card removal forgotten display (A) “Push-in signal from the corresponding pachinko machine ON → OFF & lapse of specified time”,
(B) “Probability changing signal from the corresponding pachinko machine ON → OFF & the number of possessed balls has reached the specified number of balls”
(A) is a case where a certain period of time has elapsed since the player stopped driving the game ball. In this case, there is a possibility that the player has paused the game temporarily due to a toilet break or the like. Therefore, in order to prevent the gaming card from being stolen when the player forgets to take the gaming card and leaves the seat, the forgotten card display is executed. For example, a time such as 1 minute can be set as the specified time.
(B) is a case where the number of possessed spheres is equal to or greater than a certain number in a state where the probability variation state has been completed. In order to prevent the player from losing the gaming card and losing the game card when the player has obtained a lot of balls in the probability change state and the probability change state has ended, a notification that the card has been forgotten is executed. As the specified number of balls, a number of balls such as “10000 shots” can be set.

(6) Gaming machine error display “Security signal ON from compatible pachinko machines”

(7) Display device error display “Detection or fraud detection of own device”

(8) Loan rate display “Detect loan rate display operation”

  Next, the processing unit 1210 executes a payout rate suitability information display control process (G5).

FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of payout rate suitability information display control processing.
First, the processing unit 1210 determines whether or not the setting of the payout rate suitability information display stored in the payout rate suitability information display setting data 6917 of the display device setting data 691 is “display” (H1). ), If it is determined to be “display” (H1; Yes), it is determined whether or not the payout rate suitability information display update flag is “ON” (H3).

  If it is determined that the payout rate suitability information display update flag is “ON” (H3; Yes), the processing unit 1210 determines the type of the payout rate suitability information display update flag (H5). If it is determined that the type is “low base” (H5; low base), the processing unit 1210 executes low base payout rate suitability information display update processing (H7). Specifically, based on the display mode and the detailed display setting data stored in the payout rate suitability information display setting data 6917 of the display device setting data 691, the payout rate in the low base state in the display mode is displayed. Update the display of suitability information. Then, the processing unit 1210 sets the low base payout rate suitability information display update flag to “OFF” (H9), and ends the payout rate suitability information display control processing.

  If it is determined that the type of the payout rate suitability information display update flag is “high base” (H5; high base), the processing unit 1210 executes a high base payout rate suitability information display update process (H11). Specifically, based on the display mode and the detailed display setting data stored in the payout rate suitability information display setting data 6917 of the display device setting data 691, the payout rate in the high base state in the display mode is displayed. Update the display of suitability information. Then, the processing unit 1210 sets the high base payout rate suitability information display update flag to “OFF” (H13), and ends the payout rate suitability information display control processing.

  Returning to the display process of FIG. 37, if the payout rate suitability information display control process is executed, the processing unit 1210 determines whether or not to update the display of the game history information (G7), and if it is determined to update. (G7; Yes), a game history display update process for updating the display of the currently displayed game history is executed (G9). Then, the processing unit 1210 ends the display process.

  Returning to the data display device process of FIG. 35, if the display process is executed, the processing unit 1210 executes the light emission process (C21). Specifically, the light emitting unit 1250 (the left frame LED 1251 and the right frame LED 1252) is controlled to emit light with a predetermined light emission pattern.

Next, the processing unit 1210 determines whether or not the special effect execution condition is satisfied (C23). The special performance execution condition can be determined as one of the following conditions, for example.
(1) A signal for instructing execution of a special effect (a big hit running effect signal, another type of simultaneous effect signal, a periodic notification signal) is received from the hall computer 600.
(2) The simultaneous effect signal has been received from the adjacent data display device 1200.

  If it is determined that the special effect execution condition is satisfied (C23; Yes), the processing unit 1210 executes the special effect process (C25). Specifically, a special effect corresponding to the established special effect execution condition (a big hit running effect, other types of simultaneous effects, a periodic notification effect) is executed.

  Next, the processing unit 1210 determines whether or not to end the processing (C27). If it is determined to continue the processing (C27; No), the processing returns to C1. If it is determined that the process is to be ended (C27; Yes), the processing unit 1210 ends the data display device process.

[2-9. Display screen]
39 to 42 are diagrams illustrating examples of display screens displayed on the display unit 1230 of the data display device 1200. FIG.

FIG. 39 (1) is a diagram showing an example of the total game history screen.
This general game history screen is a display screen displayed on the display unit 1230 of the data display device 1200 corresponding to the gaming machine 1 of the model “Pachinko XXX”. In this general game history screen, as the total game history information, “total jackpot count”, “total probability variable jackpot count”, “total normal jackpot count”, “total start count”, and “total output ball graph” And a “total jackpot history graph” is displayed.

  In addition, a service icon for the player to select a service and a screen switching icon for switching the screen are displayed at the lower left portion of the general game history screen. When the service icon is tapped, the display screen is switched to a service selection screen (not shown), and the player can select a service from the service selection screen. Further, when a screen switching icon is tapped, the currently displayed screen can be sequentially switched to another screen.

  In addition, a payout rate suitability information display 1230A in the color change mode is displayed in the lower right portion of the general game history screen. This payout rate suitability information display 1230A includes two types of base icons, a low base icon indicating a low base state and a high base icon indicating a high base state, and the color change for each base icon. Are used to display individual color change icons indicating whether or not the payout rate is appropriate. In the low base state, the low base icon is displayed in reverse video (the high base icon is non-inverted), and the color of the individual color change icon displayed thereunder changes to notify the appropriateness of the low base payout rate actual value. Is done. On the other hand, in the high base state, the high base icon is highlighted (the low base icon is non-inverted), and the color of the individual color change icon displayed below it changes to determine whether the high base payout rate actual measurement value is appropriate. Is notified.

  Here, for example, as shown in the detailed display setting table of FIG. 25, the color change icon is “green”, “S = α or β = S” when the condition of “α <S <β” is satisfied. It is set so as to change to “yellow” when the condition is satisfied, and to “red” when the condition “S <α or β <S” is satisfied.

FIG. 39 (2) is a diagram showing another example of payout rate suitability information display on the general game history screen.
A payout rate suitability information display 1230B in meter mode is displayed in the lower right part of the general game history screen. The payout rate suitability information display 1230B displays individual meters for displaying the suitability of the payout rate corresponding to each of the two types of base icons, the low base icon and the high base icon. In the low base state, the low base icon is displayed in reverse video (the high base icon is not inverted), and the individual meters displayed below it are increased or decreased to notify the appropriateness of the low base payout rate actual measurement value. On the other hand, in the high base state, the high base icon is highlighted (the low base icon is non-inverted), and the individual meter displayed below it is increased or decreased to notify the appropriateness of the high base payout rate actual measurement value. .

  For example, the display of the meter clarifies the payout rate reference range by dividing the rectangular frame formed in the horizontal direction indicating the payout rate with vertical lines corresponding to the payout rate reference lower limit value and the payout rate reference upper limit value, respectively. Configured as a meter. In the figure, the meter display is a horizontal meter display, but it may be a vertical meter display.

FIG. 39 (3) is a diagram showing another example of payout rate suitability information display on the general game history screen.
A payout rate suitability information display 1230C in the error mode is displayed at the lower right portion of the general game history screen. In the payout rate suitability information display 1230C, payout rate errors are individually displayed corresponding to two types of base icons, a low base icon and a high base icon. In the low base state, the low base icon is displayed in reverse video (the high base icon is non-inverted), and the payout rate error is displayed below it, thereby informing the appropriateness of the low base payout rate actual value. On the other hand, in the high base state, the high base icon is displayed in reverse video (the low base icon is non-inverted), and the payout rate error is displayed below it, thereby informing the appropriateness of the high base payout rate actual measurement value.

FIG. 40 (1) is a diagram showing another example of payout rate suitability information display on the general game history screen.
In the lower right part of the general game history screen, a payout rate suitability information display 1230D in the color change mode is displayed. This payout rate propriety information display 1230D displays the propriety of the payout rate by a color change icon in the same manner as the payout rate propriety information display 1230A in FIG. 39 (1). A common color change icon is displayed for two types of base icons, a low base icon and a high base icon. In the low base state, the low base icon is lit and displayed (the high base icon is not lit), and the color of the common color change icon is changed to notify the appropriateness of the low base payout rate actual measurement value. On the other hand, in the high base state, the high base icon is lit and displayed (the low base icon is not lit), and the color of the common color change icon is changed to notify the appropriateness of the high base payout rate actual measurement value.

FIG. 40 (2) is a diagram showing another example of payout rate suitability information display on the general game history screen.
A payout rate suitability information display 1230E in meter mode is displayed in the lower right portion of the general game history screen. The payout rate propriety information display 1230E displays the propriety of the payout rate by a meter in the same manner as the payout rate propriety information display 1230B in FIG. 39 (2), but unlike the payout rate propriety information display 1230B, A common meter is displayed for the two types of base icons, the icon and the high base icon. In the low base state, the low base icon is lit and displayed (the high base icon is not lit), and the common meter is increased or decreased to notify the appropriateness of the measured value of the low base payout rate. On the other hand, in the high base state, the high base icon is lit and displayed (the low base icon is not lit), and the common meter is increased or decreased to notify the appropriateness of the high base payout rate actual measurement value.

FIG. 40 (3) is a diagram showing another example of payout rate suitability information display on the general game history screen.
A payout rate suitability information display 1230F in the error mode is displayed at the lower right portion of the general game history screen. The payout rate suitability information display 1230E displays a payout rate error in the same manner as the payout rate suitability information display 1230C in FIG. 39 (3), but unlike the payout rate suitability information display 1230C, The payout rate error is displayed in common for the two types of base icons. In the low base state, the low base icon is lit and displayed (the high base icon is not lit), and the low base payout rate error is displayed. On the other hand, in the high base state, the high base icon is lit up (the low base icon is not lit), and the high base payout rate error is displayed.

FIG. 41A is a diagram illustrating an example of the special display.
FIG. 41 (1) shows a display screen that is displayed when the condition for executing the big hit effect display is satisfied during the display of the general game history screen. A big hit effect display is displayed.

FIG. 41 (2) is a diagram showing another example of special display.
FIG. 41 (2) is a display screen that is displayed when a game machine error display execution condition is satisfied while the general game history screen is being displayed. In the center of the screen, “An error has occurred in the pachinko game machine”. "Please call the store clerk." A gaming machine error message is displayed.

FIG. 41 (3) is a diagram showing another example of the special display.
FIG. 41 (3) shows a display screen that is displayed when the display device error execution condition is satisfied while the general game history screen is displayed. In the center of the screen, “An error has occurred in the display device. Please call me a store clerk "message is displayed.

FIG. 42 (1) is a diagram showing another example of special display.
FIG. 42 (1) is a display screen that is displayed when the execution condition of the anti-sloping display is established during the display of the general game history screen. In the center of the screen, “Please be careful not to be too addicted to the game”. Please see the message "Please avoid."

FIG. 42 (2) is a diagram showing another example of the special display.
Fig. 42 (2) is a display screen that is displayed when the conditions for executing the forgotten card display are met while the general game history screen is displayed. "The card is forgotten to be displayed" message.

FIG. 42 (3) is a diagram showing another example of the special display.
FIG. 42 (3) is a display screen that is displayed when the loan rate display execution condition is satisfied while the general game history screen is displayed. In the center of the screen, “ball lending is 540 yen → 125 balls. The loan rate display with the message “is displayed.

[2-10. Application]
With the payout ratio appropriateness determination displays 1230A to 1230F displayed on the display unit 1230 of the data display device 1200 shown in FIG. 39 and FIG. 40, the player or the employee of the store has the appropriate payout rate of the corresponding gaming machine 1. It can be confirmed whether or not.

  If a player playing a game on the gaming machine 1 confirms the display and determines that the payout rate is inappropriate, he calls the store clerk by pressing the call button, and the payout rate is incorrect. It can be pointed out that there is a possibility. At this time, the store clerk checks the payout rate suitability information display displayed on the display unit 1230, and if the player's indication is appropriate, opens the glass door frame 3a of the gaming machine 1, A display monitor 29 (see FIG. 4) provided in the center of the main board 11 is confirmed.

  As described in the first embodiment, the ratio (%) is determined based on the total number of prize balls (total number of prize balls) and the number of prize balls by winning the second starting prize opening (Den Chu) and the big prize opening ( It is calculated as the percentage of the number of winning balls by winning the (Attacker). In the present embodiment, as described above, in the calculation of the measured value of the low base payout rate, the prize balls for winning in the general winning opening and the first starting winning opening (navel) are targeted. For this reason, the low base payout rate actual measurement value can be estimated as “100 (%) − role ratio (%)”, and conversely, the role ratio is “100 (%) − low base payout rate actual value (%)”. Can be estimated as. That is, it can be said that there is a substantial correlation between the payout rate in the non-big hit and low base state in the present embodiment and the role ratio described in the first embodiment.

  On the other hand, as described in the first embodiment, the run ratio (%) is calculated as the ratio of the number of winning balls by winning the winning prize (attacker) out of the total number of winning balls (total number of winning balls). Is done. That is, the ratio of the number of prize balls in the big hit gaming state to the total number of prize balls can be calculated as the run ratio.

  Here, the calculation of the above-mentioned role ratio / continuity ratio can also be realized in the data display device 1200. In this case, the data display device 1200 is configured with a prize ball counter (game state correspondence counter) corresponding to each gaming state (big hit gaming state, low base state, high base state, etc.) of the corresponding gaming machine 1, By adding the number of prize balls to the prize ball counter corresponding to the gaming state of the gaming machine 1 when the prize ball signal is received from the corresponding gaming machine 1, the number of prize balls in each gaming state is counted individually. Then, based on the count value of the prize ball counter, the hand ratio / run ratio calculation process may be executed to calculate the hand ratio / run ratio.

  In this case, the store clerk of the store refers to the role ratios and linkage ratios displayed on the display monitor 29 of the corresponding gaming machine 1 to determine whether or not a defect that actually affects the payout rate has occurred. be able to. If it is determined that a problem has occurred, the game machine 1 can be stopped, and the game machine 1 can be repaired (for example, the game nails are repaired).

[2-11. Effect]
In the first gaming system 1000 </ b> A, a data display device 1200 is provided corresponding to the gaming machine 1. The data display device 1200 includes a display unit 1230 that is a display unit capable of displaying game information in the corresponding gaming machine 1. The display unit 1230 is acquired by the player during the non-big hit (during the non-advantaged state) for the out number (used game value) which is the game value used by the player during the non-big hit (during the non-advantaged state) in the gaming machine 1 Payout rate reference information (reference relative information), which is information related to a payout rate (relative value) reference, which is the ratio of the number of payouts (acquired game value), which is a game value, and an actual measurement of the payout rate at the corresponding gaming machine 1 The payout rate measured value (actually measured relative value), which is a value, payout rate suitability information (specific information) based on the payout rate measured value, and game history information in the corresponding gaming machine 1 can be displayed.
According to this, it becomes possible to confirm the payout rate suitability information based on the payout rate reference information and the payout rate actual measurement value regarding the payout rate reference during the non-big hit of the corresponding gaming machine 1 by display. As a result, it is possible to determine whether or not the gaming machine 1 has a payout rate as designed.

[3. Third Embodiment]
Next, the second gaming system 1000B in the present embodiment will be described.

[3-1. System configuration]
FIG. 43 is a diagram illustrating an example of a system configuration of the second gaming system 1000B.
Second gaming system 1000B, a plurality of gaming machines 1 installed on the gaming island, a mobile terminal 250 that is a terminal device owned by the user, a gaming device and information display provided corresponding to each gaming machine 1 A data display device 400 which is a kind of device, a game counting device 500 which is a kind of gaming device, a counting device and a recording medium processing device provided corresponding to each gaming machine 1, and a hall which is a kind of management device A computer 600, a ball management computer 800, which is a kind of management device for managing the number of players' stored balls and possession, and a server 980, which is a kind of management device for managing personal game history information of the player And comprising.

  The mobile terminal 250 is a terminal device owned by a user who has visited the store, and includes, for example, a mobile phone (including a smartphone) carried by the user. In the present embodiment, the portable terminal 250 is equipped with an IC chip for non-contact communication (for example, Felica (registered trademark) chip), and uses the IC chip to contact the data display device 400 with a non-contact type. It is configured to be able to communicate. The mobile terminal 250 is configured to be able to communicate with the server 980 using a communication network N such as the Internet, and is a code reader for reading a two-dimensional code (for example, QR code (registered trademark)). The two-dimensional code displayed on the data display device 400 can be read.

[3-2. Signal and information flow]
FIG. 44 is a diagram illustrating an example of the flow of signals and information between the devices of the second gaming system 1000B. In this figure, for simplicity of explanation, illustration of the terminal 900 and the server 980 is omitted.

  From the gaming machine 1, a gaming machine signal is output to the data display device 400 and the hall computer 600. Further, an out signal is output to the data display device 400 and the hall computer 600 from the out ball detector 200 provided on the back of the gaming machine 1. These signals will be described later.

  Unit signals including a card insertion signal, a card ejection signal, a deposit signal, a consumption signal, a ball payout signal, a ball count signal and a unit error signal are output from the inter-unit counting unit 500 to the data display device 400 and the hall computer 600. The These signals are the same as those in the first gaming system 1000A.

  From the hall computer 600, display device setting data 691 for the data display device 400 to make various settings is output to the data display device 400. In addition, a management device signal is output from the hall computer 600 to the data display device 400. The management device signal includes, for example, a signal such as a running motion effect signal that instructs the data display device 400 to execute a running motion effect described later.

  From the inter-counter counting unit 500, an authentication request signal for requesting authentication of the ball card inserted in the own device is output to the ball management computer 800. The authentication request signal includes a unit ID that is an ID of the own device and a card ID recorded on the holding card.

  The ball management computer 800 executes an authentication process according to the authentication request signal output from the inter-counter counting unit 500 and transmits an authentication signal to the inter-counter counting unit 500. The authentication signal includes an authentication result (OK / NG).

  The data display device 400 uses an operation to the operation unit 420 or non-contact communication, and information recording start operation for starting recording of personal game history information from the portable terminal 250 and information for ending recording of personal game history information. The recording end operation is configured to be accepted. Then, the data display device 400 displays the two-dimensional code (for example, QR code (registered trademark)) obtained by encoding the access information such as the URL for accessing the server 980 on the liquid crystal display unit 430, so that the personal game history information is displayed. It is configured to be able to output information that can be specified. In addition, the data display device 400 outputs the stored / updated personal game history information to the hall computer 600 in association with the mobile ID of the mobile terminal 250. The personal game history information is an example of personal game information that is game information of individual players.

  The server 980 is a management device installed in the store. For the players registered as members in the store, for example, a member ID, a mobile ID that is an ID of the mobile terminal 250 owned by the player, personal game history information, and the like Is managed. The server 980 acquires the player's personal game history information stored / updated by the data display device 400 via the hall computer 600, and corresponds the acquired personal game history information to the player's member ID and mobile ID. Add and remember. Then, in response to access from the mobile terminal 250, the personal game history information is downloaded to the mobile terminal 250.

[3-3. Data display device]
[3-3-1. Appearance configuration]
FIG. 45 is a diagram illustrating an example of an external configuration of the data display device 400. FIG. 45 (1) is a front view of the data display device 400, and FIG. 45 (2) is a right side view of the data display device 400. Show.

  The data display device 400 includes a liquid crystal display unit 430 capable of displaying information related to a game of the gaming machine 1 mainly for a player who plays with the corresponding gaming machine 1, and the game for the player and other players. And a segment display unit 440 capable of displaying information related to the game of the gaming machine 1.

  The liquid crystal display unit 430 is a display unit configured by a liquid crystal display formed on a base portion on the front surface of the housing of the data display device 400. The liquid crystal display unit 430 is a liquid crystal display based on a conventionally known driving method such as a simple matrix method or an active matrix method. By driving the liquid crystal by applying the voltage of the sub-pixel of the panel, it is possible to display information related to the game of the corresponding gaming machine 1 by the liquid crystal display method. The liquid crystal display unit 430 corresponds to the first display unit.

  The segment display unit 440 is a display unit composed of a 7-segment display (so-called 7-segment) formed on the door on the side of the housing of the data display device 400, and is conventionally known such as a dynamic drive method or a static drive method. By turning on the segment LED based on the driving method, information related to the game of the corresponding gaming machine 1 can be displayed by the segment display method. Specifically, the segment display unit 440 is configured to include a three-digit large 7-segment display, and displays information related to the game of the corresponding gaming machine 1 by lighting the 7-segment display. To do.

  The segment display part 440 includes a right segment display part 440A formed on the right door part 403A provided on the right side when viewed from the data display apparatus 400 side, and a left door part 403B provided on the left side when viewed from the data display apparatus 400 side. The left segment display unit 440B is formed to have two display units. The right door portion 403A and the right seg display portion 440A are provided on the left side of the drawing, and the left door portion 403B and the left seg display portion 440B are provided on the right side of the drawing. These two segment display units 440 (right segment display unit 440A and left segment display unit 440B) correspond to a second display unit and a third display unit.

  The liquid crystal display unit 430 and the seg display unit 440 (right seg display unit 440A, left seg display unit 440B) are display patterns (hereinafter referred to as “liquid crystal seg link display patterns”) that perform display linked to each other under the control of the processing unit 410. And a display pattern for performing independent display (hereinafter referred to as “liquid crystal seg independent display pattern”), information related to the game of the corresponding gaming machine 1 can be displayed. The liquid crystal segment linked display pattern corresponds to the first display pattern, and the liquid crystal segment independent display pattern corresponds to the second display pattern.

  In addition to the display patterns described above, the left and right segment display units 440 (right segment display unit 440A and left segment display unit 440B) are display patterns that perform display linked to each other (hereinafter referred to as “segment segment display patterns”). )) And a display pattern (hereinafter referred to as a “seg independent display pattern”) that performs a considerably independent display, information related to the game of the corresponding gaming machine 1 can be displayed.

  Further, the data display device 400 provides an effect of irradiating light toward the front area of the gaming machine 1 when the corresponding gaming machine 1 starts controlling the big hit gaming state (hereinafter referred to as “irradiation effect”). Is configured to run. The irradiation effect can be rephrased as a light emission effect.

  Here, the front area of the gaming machine 1 is an area on the near side of the installation location of the corresponding gaming machine 1 and means an area covering a part or the whole of the casing of the gaming machine 1. Since the player plays the seated game, the seated player is also included in this front region.

  Specifically, the data display device 400 includes a processing unit 410 for executing processing related to the irradiation effect, and a light emitting unit 480 that emits light in the irradiation effect, and causes the light emitting unit 480 to emit light. Realize the production.

  As will be described later, the light emitting unit 480 includes a first spot LED 480a to a third spot LED 480c formed on the base portion 401A on the front surface of the data display device 400 and a first appeal formed on the door portion 403 of the data display device 400. An LED 480d and a second appeal LED 480e are provided. These light emitting units 480 are installed so that spherical frame bodies in which light emitters with strong directivity (for example, bullet-type LEDs) are sealed are fitted into the base body portion 401 and the door portion 403, respectively. By freely rotating the body, it is configured as a movable body capable of changing the light irradiation direction by the light emitting body (LED). If the light irradiation direction changes, the light irradiation region also changes. Therefore, the light emitting unit 480 can change the light irradiation direction and the irradiation region. It should be noted that the light emitter that constitutes the light emitting unit 480 may be a light emitter other than a bullet-type LED. Further, a structure different from the structure in which the frame body in which the light emitter is encapsulated is fitted may be applied.

  In addition, a speaker as a sound output unit 450 is installed in the lower right part of the main body substrate on the front surface of the data display device 400 so that the sound output port faces the front surface. The installation position of the sound output unit 450 can be changed as appropriate. For example, the sound output unit 450 may be installed at any position on the upper surface of the housing or on the side surface of the housing of the data display device 400.

  Here, the forward and backward directions with reference to the data display device 400 are the front-rear direction, the right and left directions with respect to the data display device 400 are the left and right directions, and the upward and downward directions with reference to the data display device 400 Are defined as the vertical direction.

[3-3-2. Opening and closing mode]
46 and 47 are views for explaining the configuration of the data display device 400 and the opening / closing mode of the door, and a perspective view of the data display device 400 is shown.

  The housing of the data display device 400 has a base body portion 401 having a horizontally long rectangular shape in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and a right door configured to protrude from the right end portion and the left end portion of the base body portion 401 to the player side. It has a part 403A and a left door part 403B. The left and right door portions 403 are each designed so that the width thereof is half the width of the base portion 401.

  A liquid crystal display unit 430 having a horizontally long rectangular shape in the left-right direction when viewed from the front is formed on the front surface of the base body 401. The liquid crystal display unit 430 is formed in a direction facing the player, and a player who plays with the gaming machine 1 can visually recognize the liquid crystal display unit 430 from the gaming position. That is, the liquid crystal display unit 430 is formed in a direction in which the player can visually recognize from the gaming position where the player plays.

  On one side of the left and right surfaces of the door unit 403, a seg display unit 440 for displaying information for a player who plays with the gaming machine 1 and surrounding players is formed. The segment display unit 440 is formed such that the right segment display unit 440A is formed on the outer surface of the right door unit 403A, and the left segment display unit 440B is formed on the outer surface of the left door unit 403B, and the door unit 403 is closed. In this case, the player can see from the gaming position, while the player cannot see from the gaming position when the door 403 is opened, but the surrounding players (for example, from the edge of the gaming island, A player who looks over the gaming machine 1 and selects the gaming machine 1 that starts the game is configured to be visible.

  The segment display unit 440 can provide information on the game of the corresponding gaming machine 1 by lighting a large three-digit segment. For this reason, in a state where the door part 403 is closed, a player who plays with the corresponding gaming machine 1 can easily see the information displayed on the seg display part 440, and passes behind the corresponding gaming machine 1. A player as a passerby can easily view the information displayed on the segment display unit 440, and an appealing effect to the passerby can be expected. In addition, when the door 403 is opened, a player who is away from the player's own device (for example, a location several meters to 10 meters away from the store) can easily visually recognize information displayed on the seg display 440. It becomes possible. For this reason, it can be said that the segment display unit 440 is configured to have higher visibility from a distance than the liquid crystal display unit 430.

  Two first spot LEDs 480a are arranged side by side in the center on the upper side of the liquid crystal display unit 430 formed on the front surface of the base body 401, and two second spots in the center on the lower side of the liquid crystal display unit 430. The LEDs 480b are arranged side by side. Further, one third spot LED 480c is disposed at each of the upper and lower ends of the liquid crystal display unit 430. The front surface of the base body 401 is referred to as a first display area, and the LED section formed of spot LEDs configured in the first display area is referred to as a first display area LED section 481.

  The spot LED is a light emitter provided to realize an irradiation effect in which a player who plays a game on the corresponding gaming machine 1 is spotted, and light emitted from the spot LED is referred to as a spotlight. That is, the spot LED is configured to be able to irradiate light on a front area of the corresponding gaming machine 1 in order to hit the spot on the corresponding gaming machine 1.

  In addition, two first appeal LEDs 480d are arranged side by side on the upper side of the segment display unit 440 formed on the front surface of the door unit 403, and two second appeal LEDs 480e are arranged on the lower side of the segment display unit 440. Has been. The front surface of the door portion 400A is referred to as a second display region, and the LED portion formed of the appeal LED configured in the second display region is referred to as a second display region LED portion 482.

  The appeal LED is a light-emitting body provided to realize an irradiation effect that appeals the gaming state in the gaming machine 1 corresponding to a player playing in the surrounding gaming machine 1 or a player watching the game. The light emitted from the appeal LED is referred to as appeal light. In other words, the appeal LED is configured to be able to irradiate light to the peripheral area of the corresponding gaming machine 1 in order to appeal the game state of the corresponding gaming machine 1 to surrounding players.

  The first display area LED unit 481 and the second display area LED unit 482 are respectively connected to a drive unit unit 483 having an LED drive unit 483a and a motor drive unit 483b, and the LED display unit 483a of the LED drive unit 483a by a light emission control signal from the processing unit 410 is connected. The LED is caused to emit light according to the light emission control, and the frame body can be rotated according to the motor control of the motor drive unit 483b by the drive control signal from the processing unit 410.

  The left and right door portions 403 are configured to be foldable and accommodated inward. Specifically, the left and right door portions 403 (the right door portion 403A and the left door portion 403B) can be rotated in both the front and rear directions around the left and right hinge portions 405 (the right hinge portion 405A and the left hinge portion 405B), respectively. It is configured. When the door part 403 is rotated, the seg display part 440 is also integrally rotated. Therefore, rotating the door part 403 means that the seg display part 440 is rotated. In the present embodiment, the data display device 400 executes an operation effect by rotating the segment display unit 440.

  In addition, although the segment display part 440 is comprised so that rotation is possible, this means that the segment display part 440 is movable. Moreover, since the relative position of the segment display unit 440 is changed by rotating the segment display unit 440, it means that the segment display unit 440 can be displaced. For this reason, the above-mentioned operation effect can be paraphrased as a movable effect, a rotation effect, and a displacement effect.

  The left and right door portions 403 are designed to have a width that is half of the width of the base portion 401 excluding the hinge portion 405. When the left and right door portions 403 are closed, the base portion 401 is exactly overlapped. At this time, the left and right door portions 403 are parallel to the base body portion 401, and the liquid crystal display portion 430 is covered with the left and right door portions 403. Since the left and right door portions 403 can be folded inward in this way, the left and right door portions 403 are folded when the data display device 400 is installed on the game island or removed from the game island. The installation work and the removal work can be easily performed. On the other hand, the height of the door 403 is designed so that only the liquid crystal display unit 430 is covered with the left and right doors 403 closed, and even if the left and right doors 403 are closed. The appeal LED is not covered.

  The left and right door portions 403 are configured to be automatically openable and closable (single-opened and double-opened), respectively, by driving a driving device configured to include a stepping motor or the like configured in the hinge portion 405, for example. Specifically, a pulse signal is output to a pulse oscillator connected to the stepping motor according to the control of the processing unit 410, and the rotation angle of the stepping motor is controlled by this pulse signal, so that the left and right door portions 403 can be moved to an arbitrary angle. It is configured to be able to rotate. In addition, the method (structure, mechanism, control) for implement | achieving opening / closing of the left-right door part 403 is not restricted to said method, Various conventionally well-known methods are applicable.

  Further, the segment display unit 440 is not visible to the player because it is directed to the side when the door 403 is open, but is visible to the player because it is directed to the front when the door 403 is closed. Thus, the data display device 400 is in the first state in which the player can visually recognize the liquid crystal display unit 430 but the player cannot visually recognize the seg display unit 440 (while other players can visually recognize the player). (The segment display unit 440 is perpendicular to the liquid crystal display unit 430) and the player cannot see the liquid crystal display unit 430, but the player can see the segment display unit 440. It is also possible to enter the second state (the state where the segment display unit 440 is parallel to the liquid crystal display unit 430).

  In the following description, for each of the left and right door portions 403, a state where the door portion 403 is closed so as to cover the liquid crystal display portion 430 is referred to as an opening / closing angle “0 degree”. A state where the opening / closing angle increases in the positive direction and the door 403 opens perpendicularly to the front side (player side) will be described as a state where the opening / closing angle is “90 degrees”.

  46 (1) is a diagram showing the opening / closing mode A. FIG. The opening / closing mode A is a state in which the left and right door portions 403 are each set to an opening / closing angle “90 degrees”.

  FIG. 46 (2) is a diagram showing the opening / closing mode B. FIG. The opening / closing mode B is a state in which the left and right door portions 403 are each set to an opening / closing angle “0 degree”.

  FIG. 47 (1) is a diagram showing the opening / closing mode C. FIG. The opening / closing mode C is a state in which the right door portion 403A is set to “0 degrees” and the left door portion 403B is set to “90 degrees”.

  FIG. 47 (2) is a diagram showing the opening / closing mode D. The opening / closing mode D is a state in which the right door portion 403A is set to “90 degrees” and the left door portion 403B is set to “0 degrees”.

  FIG. 48 is a diagram illustrating an example of the display mode of the display unit of the data display device 400 corresponding to each of the above open / close modes.

48A is a diagram illustrating an example of a display mode corresponding to the open / close mode A. FIG.
In the opening / closing mode A, the left and right door portions 403 are in a state in which the opening / closing angle is “90 degrees”, respectively, so that the entire liquid crystal display portion 430 is visible to the player. In this case, it is preferable that the liquid crystal display unit 430 display information related to the game of the corresponding gaming machine 1 and information that should be preferentially notified to the player (information highly important to the player). It is. On the other hand, the left and right segment display units 440 are not visible to the player, but the surrounding players are visible, and therefore information related to the game of the corresponding gaming machine 1 and information to be displayed on the liquid crystal display unit 430. It is preferable to display different information (information that is less important to the player) and information that enhances the advertisement effect / appeal effect.

  In FIG. 48 (1), the number of big hits (total number of big hits, number of probable big hits, normal number of big hits) in the corresponding gaming machine 1 and the number of player's balls, jackpot history graph, output ball graph, etc. on the liquid crystal display unit 430 The game history information including the information is displayed. The display pattern in this case corresponds to an independent display pattern in which the liquid crystal display unit 430 and the segment display unit 440 perform independent display.

48 (2) is a diagram illustrating an example of a display mode corresponding to the open / close mode B. FIG.
In the opening / closing mode B, the left and right door portions 403 are in a state in which the opening / closing angle is set to “0 degree”, so that the entire liquid crystal display portion 430 is covered with the door portion 403 and the segment display portion 440 is visually recognized by the player. It becomes possible. In this case, the left and right segment display units 440 display information related to the game of the corresponding gaming machine 1 and should be preferentially notified to the player (information highly important to the player). It is preferable. On the other hand, since the liquid crystal display unit 430 is covered and cannot be visually recognized, it is not necessary to display information on the liquid crystal display unit 430.

  FIG. 48 (2) shows an example in which numerical information corresponding to the number of balls possessed by a player who plays with the corresponding gaming machine 1 is displayed on the left and right segment display units 440. Specifically, an example is shown in which the lower three digits of the number of balls are displayed on the left seg display unit 440B, and the upper two digits of the number of balls are displayed on the right seg display unit 440A. This display pattern is a seg-linked display pattern for performing a linked display on the left and right seg display units 440. However, since the display is independent between the liquid crystal display unit 430 and the segment display unit 440, the relationship between the liquid crystal display unit 430 and the segment display unit 440 is a liquid crystal segment independent display pattern.

FIG. 48 (3) is a diagram illustrating an example of a display mode corresponding to the open / close mode C.
In the open / close mode C, the right door 403A is set to “0 degree” and the left door 403B is set to “90 degrees”. It is covered with the door portion 403A, and the right half area is exposed from the front. In this case, in the exposed areas of the right seg display unit 440A and the liquid crystal display unit 430, information related to the game of the corresponding gaming machine 1 and information to be preferentially notified to the player (importance to the player) High information) is preferably displayed. On the other hand, the left seg display unit 440B is invisible to the player, but is visible to surrounding players, and thus is information related to the game of the corresponding gaming machine 1 and includes the right seg display unit 440A and the liquid crystal display unit 430. It is preferable to display information that is different from the information displayed on the screen (information that is less important to the player) or information that enhances the advertising effect / appeal effect.

  FIG. 48 (3) shows an example in which numerical information corresponding to the number of possessed balls owned by a player who plays with the corresponding gaming machine 1 is displayed on the right seg display portion 440A and the liquid crystal display portion 430. Specifically, an example is shown in which the lower two digits of the number of balls are displayed on the liquid crystal display unit 430, and the upper three digits of the number of balls are displayed on the right segment display unit 440A. This display pattern is a liquid crystal seg linked display pattern for performing display linked with the liquid crystal display unit 430 and the right seg display unit 440A.

FIG. 48 (4) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode corresponding to the open / close mode D.
In the open / close mode D, the right door portion 403A is set to “90 degrees” and the left door portion 403B is set to “0 degrees”. Covered by the door portion 403B, the left half area is exposed when viewed from the front. In this case, in the exposed areas of the left seg display unit 440B and the liquid crystal display unit 430, information relating to the game of the corresponding gaming machine 1 and information to be preferentially notified to the player (importance to the player) High information) is preferably displayed. On the other hand, the right seg display unit 440A cannot be visually recognized by the player, but the surrounding players can be visually recognized. Therefore, the right seg display unit 440A is information related to the game of the corresponding gaming machine 1, and is the left seg display unit 440B and the liquid crystal display unit 430. It is preferable to display information that is different from the information displayed on the screen (information that is less important to the player) or information that enhances the advertising effect / appeal effect.

  FIG. 48 (4) shows an example in which numerical information corresponding to the number of possessed balls owned by a player who plays with the corresponding gaming machine 1 is displayed on the left seg display portion 440B and the liquid crystal display portion 430. Specifically, an example is shown in which the lower three digits of the number of balls are displayed on the left segment display unit 440B, and the upper two digits of the number of balls are displayed on the liquid crystal display unit 430. This display pattern is a liquid crystal seg-linked display pattern for performing display linked with the liquid crystal display unit 430 and the left seg display unit 440B.

FIG. 49 is a diagram illustrating an example of a cover configured to be detachable from the segment display unit 440.
The segment display unit 440 is configured so that a transparent plastic lid 447 covering the entire segment display unit 440 can be attached and detached. The display surface of the segment display unit 440 protrudes from the housing surface with the door 403 open (the right door 403 protrudes to the right and the left door 403 protrudes to the left). An outward fitting step 441 that forms a step between the housing surface of the seg display unit 440 and the display surface of the seg display unit 440 is provided.

  The plastic lid 447 shown in this figure is a lid member in which a peripheral wall 443 projects from the outer peripheral edge of the bottom plate 442, and has a tray shape in which the bottom plate 442 and the peripheral wall 443 are integrally formed of a light-transmitting plastic material. Have. An inward fitting step 444 that forms a step between the surface of the bottom plate 442 where the peripheral wall 443 protrudes and the end surface (tray-shaped edge surface) of the peripheral wall 443 is provided. By fitting the mating step portion 444 with the outward fitting step portion 441, the inner surface of the inward fitting step portion 444 is engaged with the outer surface of the outward fitting step portion 441, and the plastic lid 447 The segment display unit 440 is integrated.

  Further, the recess formed by the bottom plate 442 and the peripheral wall 443 of the plastic lid 447 is configured to be able to insert a POP advertisement 445 for notifying the player of various types of information. In the POP advertisement 445, for example, information related to sales of a store where the gaming machine 1 is installed and information related to an event performed in the store can be posted.

  In this figure, as an example of the POP advertisement 445, a POP advertisement 445 indicating that the day is Ladies' Day which is one of the event days is shown. When the POP advertisement 445 is inserted into the recess of the plastic lid 447 and the inward fitting step 444 is fitted to the outward fitting step 441 of the door 403, the POP advertisement 445 is attached to the bottom plate 442. It is supported by being sandwiched between the display surface of the segment display unit 440 and covers the display screen of the segment display unit 440.

  In addition, since the plastic lid 447 has translucency, the inserted POP advertisement 445 can be visually recognized by the player from the outside through the bottom plate 442. The gaming machine 1 in which the ladies' day POP advertisement 445 is displayed on the corresponding data display device 400 is a stand exclusively for women, and only women can play games.

  Note that the POP advertisement is not limited to notification of the above event data. For example, new machine information indicating that the gaming machine 1 installed corresponding to the data display device 400 is a new machine, Various kinds of information such as a yen pachinko, a 2-yen pachinko, information indicating that it is a 1-yen pachinko, and information indicating the model name of the gaming machine 1 can be posted.

  Thus, by making it possible to attach the plastic lid 447 to the segment display unit 440, it is possible to prevent the player from visually recognizing information for players other than the player. Further, by attaching a plastic lid 447 with a POP advertisement interposed, surrounding players can confirm information regarding the store and the gaming machine 1. In addition, when the segment display unit 440 is covered with a POP advertisement or the like in this manner and the fact that the latent probability variation state is displayed on the segment display unit 440, the display is displayed to the player and the game other than the player. When the customer does not want to show to the customer, the display of the segment display unit 440 can be made invisible.

  Here, in order to set the segment display unit 440 so as not to display that the latent probability changing state is displayed, the hall computer 600 or each data display device 400 side sets the latent probability changing state to the segment display unit 440. It is necessary to perform a setting process for preventing display. On the other hand, when the segment display unit 440 is covered with a cover such as a POP advertisement, such setting processing is not required, and it is temporarily displayed on the segment display unit 440 that the latent probability changing state is displayed. However, this can be prevented from being visually recognized by a player and a player other than the player.

  In addition, for example, on an event day such as Ladies' Day, only the player who is the subject of the event (for example, a female customer) may remove the POP advertisement and perform the operation for making the segment display unit 440 visible. Good. Further, when a player (for example, a female customer) who is the subject of such an event plays a game, the POP advertisement is removed and the door 403 is folded inward (the second state described above). After making the segment display unit 440 visible to the player, the segment display unit 440 may display the latent probability variation state. According to this, only a specific player such as an event target person can visually recognize the display content of the segment display unit 440.

  In FIG. 49, the plastic lid 447 is illustrated as a cover that covers the segment display unit 440 of the data display device 400, but the cover is not limited to this. If the cover is a lid, it is not limited to the plastic lid 447 but may be a glass lid or a wooden lid. Moreover, it is good also considering the housing which surrounds the segment display part 440 as a cover other than a lid | cover as a cover which concerns on this invention. The housing can be, for example, a colored plastic, vinyl, or wooden housing.

FIG. 50 is a diagram showing an example of the housing in this case.
A housing 448 is configured to be detachable so as to surround the entire door 403 on which the segment display unit 440 is formed. Specifically, a housing 448 formed in a U-shape in front view so as to surround a surface of the door portion 403 other than the bonding surface of the hinge portion 405 is configured to be attachable to the door portion 403. By attaching such a housing 448 to the door portion 403, it is possible to create a state in which the seg display portion 440 cannot be further visually recognized by a player playing a game machine.

  Note that the housing 448 may have a bottomed structure including a bottom that surrounds the inner surface of the door 403, or may have a bottomless structure that does not include a bottom. When the bottomed structure is adopted, the inner surface of the door portion 403 is surrounded by the housing 448, so that even the inner surface of the door portion 403 is not visible to the player, as if the player It is possible to create a state as if they were isolated.

  In addition, the above-described cover is not necessarily a cover that covers the entire segment display unit 440, and may be a cover that covers a part of the segment display unit 440. For example, a cover that covers only the center of the segment display unit 440 may be used, or a cover that covers the right half, left half, upper half, and lower half of the segment display unit 440. Moreover, it is good also as a cover body which covers the circumference | surroundings of the segment display part 440. FIG.

  In this case, the content displayed on the display unit 1230 of the data display device 1200 of the above-described embodiment may be displayed on the liquid crystal display unit 430 of the data display device 400. Also, other information may be displayed on the segment display unit 440 of the data display device 400.

[3-3-3. Functional configuration]
FIG. 51 is a diagram illustrating an example of a functional configuration of the data display device 400.
The data display device 400 includes a processing unit 410, an operation unit 420, a liquid crystal display unit 430, a segment display unit 440, a door rotation control unit 445, a sound output unit 450, a first communication unit 461, 2 communication unit 462, third communication unit 463, non-contact communication unit 464, short-range wireless communication unit 465, clock unit 470, light emitting unit 480, storage unit 490, and power supply unit 495. Configured.

  The processing unit 410 is a control device and an arithmetic device that collectively control each functional unit included in the data display device 400, and includes a processor such as a CPU or DSP and an integrated circuit such as an ASIC.

  The operation unit 420 is an operation device for a player to perform various operations on the player's own device. For example, a call button 421 for calling a store clerk, an operation stop button 422 for stopping an operation effect, and an irradiation effect. The light emission stop button 423 for stopping the light and a touch panel 425 are provided. The operation stop button 422 and the light emission stop button 423 are buttons for stopping the respective effects when the player feels that the operation effects and the irradiation effects are troublesome.

  In addition to the above, for example, on the menu screen or the like displayed on the liquid crystal display unit 430, the player changes various settings related to the operation effect and the irradiation effect (whether or not the effect is performed, adjustment of the effect mode, etc.) May be possible.

  The liquid crystal display unit 430 is a display device that includes a liquid crystal display, and displays various information on a liquid crystal display under the control of the processing unit 410. The touch screen 425 is configured integrally with the liquid crystal display unit 430 to form a touch screen.

  The segment display unit 440 is a display device that includes a 7-segment display and the like, and displays various information in a segment according to the control of the processing unit 410. The segment display unit 440 includes a right segment display unit 440A and a left segment display unit 440B.

  The door rotation control unit 445 is a control device for rotating the door unit 403 on which the segment display unit 440 is formed. The door rotation control unit 445 controls the drive device (stepping motor or the like) connected to the right door unit 403A to the right. The left door 403B is controlled to rotate by controlling the right door rotation control unit 445A that controls the rotation of the door 403A and the driving device (stepping motor or the like) connected to the left door 403B. And a door rotation control unit 445B.

  The sound output unit 450 is a sound output device configured with a speaker or the like, and outputs various sounds according to the control of the processing unit 410. From the sound output unit 450, sound, sound effects, and the like corresponding to the type of operation effect to be executed are output in the operation effect described later.

  The first communication unit 461 includes a wired communication module and the like, and is a communication device for performing communication with the corresponding gaming machine 1. The first communication unit 461 receives a gaming machine signal from the corresponding gaming machine 1 and also receives an out signal from the out ball detector 200.

  The second communication unit 462 includes a wired communication module and the like, and is a communication device for performing communication with the corresponding unit 500. The second communication unit 462 receives a unit signal from the corresponding unit 500.

  The third communication unit 463 includes a wired communication module and the like, and is a communication device for performing communication with the hall computer 600. The third communication unit 463 receives a management device signal and display device setting data 691 from the hall computer 600.

The non-contact communication unit 464 is a communication device for performing non-contact communication with the mobile terminal 250 owned by the user. The non-contact type communication unit 464 includes an IC reader / writer (not shown) provided at a predetermined position on the front surface of the data display device 400 (for example, below the base unit 401).
By detecting that the mobile terminal 250 has been deceived by this IC reader / writer, an information recording start operation for starting recording of personal game history information and an information recording end operation for finishing recording of personal game history information can be accepted. It is configured.

  The information recording start operation and the information recording end operation are not received by non-contact communication, but a reception button for receiving these operations is configured in the operation unit 420, and by pressing this reception button, An information recording start operation and an information recording end operation may be received. In addition, a reception icon for receiving an operation is displayed on the liquid crystal display unit 430 that is configured integrally with the touch panel 425, and an information recording start operation and an information recording end operation are received by a touch operation of the reception icon. Good.

  The short-range wireless communication unit 465 includes a wireless communication module and the like, and is a communication device for performing short-range wireless communication with a setting remote controller 700 possessed by a store clerk. The short-range wireless communication unit 465 is configured to be able to perform various settings based on a setting signal transmitted from the setting remote controller 700.

  The clock unit 470 is an internal clock of the data display device 400 configured to include an RTC (real time clock), a power-on timer, and the like, and outputs timing information to the processing unit 410. The time information includes a time that is a time that is timed and a time that is a time that is timed.

  The light emitting unit 480 is a light emitting device that includes LEDs and the like, and includes a first display region LED unit 481, a second display region LED unit 482, and a drive unit unit 483.

  As described above, the first display area LED unit 481 includes the first spot LED 480a, the second spot LED 480b, and the third spot LED 480c. Further, the second display area LED unit 482 includes a first appeal LED 480d and a second appeal LED 480e.

  In addition, as described above, the drive unit unit 483 includes the LED drive unit 483a and the motor drive unit 483b.

The power supply unit 495 is a power supply device connected to each function unit included in the data display device 400 and supplies power to each function unit of the data display device 400.

  The storage unit 490 is a storage device that includes a memory such as a ROM, EEPROM, or RAM, and stores various programs executed by the processing unit 410 and various data. The storage unit 490 stores a data display device processing program 491 that is read by the processing unit 410 and executed as a data display device process as a program.

  The data display device processing program 491 is a payout rate index value calculation program 491a executed as a payout rate index value calculation process, a display processing program 491b executed as a display process, and an operation effect program 491c executed as an action effect process. And an irradiation effect program 491d executed as an irradiation effect process and an individual game history information recording program 491e executed as an individual game history information recording process as subroutines.

  Further, in the storage unit 490, as data, production data 493, payout rate totaling data 495, personal game history information recording table 496, personal game history information recording data 497, number-of-balls data 498, Display device setting data 691 is stored.

  The effect data 493 includes images (still images, moving images, etc.) and sound (for example, for the data display device 400 to execute various effects (big hit running effect, simultaneous effect, periodic notification effect, operation effect, irradiation effect, etc.). Voice, music, etc.).

  The payout rate total data 495 is data storing a total value related to the payout rate in the corresponding gaming machine 1, and the data structure thereof is the same as the payout rate total data 1295.

The personal game history information recording table 496 is a table in which conditions for recording personal game history information are set. An example of the table configuration is shown in FIG.
In the personal game history information recording table 496, recording flags, conditions, and processes are stored in association with each other.

The recording flag is a flag set in association with the condition, and a value of “0” to “6” is set.
The condition is a condition for setting a corresponding recording flag.
The process is a process executed when the corresponding recording flag is set.

This will be specifically described.
In the recording flag “0”, “other than the conditions of the recording flags 1 to 6” is set as a condition, and “− (none)” is set as a process.
In the recording flag “1”, “information recording start operation is performed” is set as a condition, and “reading and recording flag 2 of personal game history information is set” is set as a process.

  In the recording flag “2”, “information recording start preparation process in progress” is set as a condition, and “display preparation screen & set recording flag 3” is set as a process. The information recording start preparation process is a process for preparing to start recording of the personal game history, and includes a login process for logging in to the data display device 400. The information recording start preparation process will be described as requiring a certain time (for example, about 10 seconds) to be completed.

In the recording flag “3”, “information recording” is set as a condition, and “individual game history information is updated” as a process.
In the recording flag “4”, “information recording end operation is performed” is set as a condition, and “update of personal game history information & recording flag 5 is set” is set as a process.

  In the recording flag “5”, “information recording end preparation process in progress” is set as a condition, and “display preparation screen & set recording flag 6” is set as a process. The information recording end preparation process is a process for preparing to end the recording of the personal game history, and includes a logout process for logging out from the data display device 400. Similar to the information recording start preparation process, the information recording end preparation process will be described as requiring a certain time (for example, about 10 seconds) to be completed.

  In the recording flag “6”, “when information recording ends” is defined as a condition, and “output information capable of identifying personal game history information & set recording flag 0” is defined as a process. The information that can identify the personal game history information is, for example, access information such as a URL for accessing the server 980 from the portable terminal 250.

  The personal game history information data 497 is data in which personal game history information in the corresponding gaming machine 1 is recorded, and is updated as needed by the processing unit 410 in the personal game history information recording process executed according to the personal game history information recording program 491e. The

  The number of possessed balls data 498 is data on the number of balls possessed by a player who plays with the corresponding gaming machine 1 and is updated based on the ball payout signal and the ball counting signal output from the inter-unit counting unit 500. .

  The display device setting data 691 is data for setting the own device acquired from the hall computer 600.

[3-4. Hall computer]
FIG. 53 is a diagram showing a configuration of the hard disk 680 of the hall computer 600 in the second gaming system 1000B.
The hard disk 680 stores an effect setting table 687 in addition to the data and tables described above.

  The effect setting table 687 is a setting table for effects executed by the data display device 400, and includes an opening / closing setting table 6871, an operation effect setting table 6872, and an irradiation effect setting table 6873. .

FIG. 54 is a diagram showing an example of the table configuration of the open / close setting table 6871. As shown in FIG.
In the open / close setting table 6871, the open / close mode, the open / close of the right segment display unit 440A, and the open / close of the left segment display unit 440B are stored in association with each other. As the opening / closing mode, the above-described opening / closing modes A to D are stored, and the opening / closing of the right seg display unit 440A and the left seg display unit 440B corresponding to each opening / closing mode is stored. This open / close setting table 6871 is used for initial setting of the open / close state of the data display device 400 and for changing the setting of the open / close state.

FIG. 55 is a diagram showing an example of a table configuration of the operation effect setting table 6872. As shown in FIG.
The operation effect setting table 6872 stores operation effect setting data for each gaming machine ID that is the ID of the gaming machine 1 and for each model name. In each operation effect setting data, effect type setting data is stored in association with the gaming machine ID and the model name.

  The effect type setting data is data for setting the type of operation effect to be executed by the data display device 400 provided corresponding to the gaming machine 1 having the game machine ID and the model name, and the effect is the number of the effect type. Priority that is an index value of which action effect is to be preferentially executed when the type No and the execution conditions set for the action effects of a plurality of types are simultaneously satisfied and the action effects to be executed compete. The degree, the content of the effect type that is the content of the corresponding effect type, and the execution condition that is the condition for executing the corresponding effect type are stored in association with each other. In the operation effect setting data at the top of FIG. 55, numbers “0” to “5” are stored as the effect type No.

This will be specifically described.
For the effect type No. “0”, “-(none)” is defined as the priority, “-(none)” is defined as the content of the effect type, and “-(none)” is defined as the execution condition. This means that the data display device 400 is set not to execute an operation effect.

  For the performance type No. “1”, “5” is set as the priority, “the number-of-balls operation effect” is set as the content of the performance type, and “the probability changing signal is received from the corresponding game machine” is set as the execution condition. It has been. The number-of-balls operation effect is an operation effect executed based on the number of balls possessed by a player who plays with the corresponding gaming machine 1, and triggered by the corresponding gaming machine 1 being controlled to the probable gaming state. This means that the data display device 400 executes the number-of-balls operation effect.

  In the effect type No. “2”, “4” is set as the priority, “hit action effect” as the effect type content, and “received the jackpot signal from the corresponding gaming machine” as the execution condition. . The jackpot action effect is an action effect that is executed based on the occurrence of the jackpot in the corresponding gaming machine 1, and the data display device 400 receives the jackpot action effect when the corresponding gaming machine 1 is controlled to the jackpot gaming state. Means to execute.

  In the effect type No. “3”, “3” is set as the priority, “countdown operation effect” is set as the content of the effect type, and “the timekeeping time has become the countdown start time” is set as the execution condition. The countdown operation effect is an operation effect that notifies the player of the time until a specific event occurs by counting down.

  Here, the specific event that is the target of the countdown operation effect can be determined as an event such as the start of a simultaneous operation effect or the closing of a store, for example. Specifically, it is possible to notify the player of the time until the next simultaneous action effect is started and the remaining time until the store closing time by counting down.

  In addition, there are stores that allow a game to be played by applying a so-called quantitative system. Quantitative system means that if the game value acquired by a player playing a game on a gaming machine (the number of balls earned for a pachinko machine or the number of medals earned for a slot machine) reaches the upper limit of quantification, It means operations that are restricted. In addition, the operation for limiting the game in this case means an operation for resetting and stopping the game machine even if the game state is advantageous for the player. Therefore, the fixed quantity system is applied to the game in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, and the occurrence of the stop is a specific event, and the remaining number of balls until the stop in the game in the corresponding gaming machine 1 (by the stop) The number of balls that can be acquired by the player may be notified to the player by a countdown operation effect.

  Further, in a store to which the above-described quantitative system is applied, it is conceivable to apply an operation in which a player is allowed to play a game by setting a time zone in which the quantitative system is opened as an operation method of the quantitative system. Therefore, the release of the quantitative system and the release of the quantitative system are designated as specific events, and the remaining time until the quantitative system is released and the remaining time until the quantitative system is released are notified to the player by a countdown operation effect. Also good.

  In the effect type No. “4”, “2” is set as the priority, “running operation effect” is set as the content of the effect type, and “running effect signal received from the hall computer” is set as the execution condition. In the running operation effect, in any one of the gaming machines 1 of the same model name, a winning game is won with a symbol of “777” and the number of consecutive resorts is a specified number (10 series, 20 series, 30 series, etc.) ) Is a motion effect that is executed based on the winning of a specific jackpot, such as having won the big jackpot, and the data display device 400 is running when the execution of the running motion effect is instructed from the hall computer 600. This means that an action presentation is performed.

  In the effect type No. “5”, “1” is set as the priority, “simultaneous operation effect” is set as the content of the effect type, and “the timekeeping time has become the simultaneous effect start time” is set as the execution condition. . The simultaneous action effect is an action effect that is simultaneously executed in the data display device 400 corresponding to the gaming machine 1 having the same model name, and the data is triggered when the time measured by the clock unit 470 becomes the simultaneous effect start time. It means that the display device 400 performs a simultaneous operation effect.

  Further, the data corresponding to the operation effect of each effect type defined in the above-described effect type setting data is stored in the operation effect setting data. In the operation effect setting data at the top of FIG. 55, the data corresponding to each of the operation effects of the effect types No. “1” to “5” in the effect type setting data is used for setting the number of motion effects. Data, jackpot action effect setting data, countdown action effect setting data, running action effect setting data, and simultaneous action effect setting data are stored.

FIG. 56 is a diagram showing an example of the above-described operation effect setting data.
FIG. 56 (1) is a diagram showing an example of the data for setting the number of movements in the number of balls, the opening / closing order, the number of consecutive resorts, the opening / closing mode, and each display unit (right seg display unit, liquid crystal display unit, left The display mode of the segment display unit) is determined in association with each other.

The opening / closing order is an order in which the left and right door portions 403 of the data display device 400 are opened and closed.
The number of consecutive resorts is the total number of wins won for the probability change jackpot in the probability change gaming state to be transferred after the first time as the probability change jackpot that triggers the transition from the normal state to the probability change gaming state in the gaming machine 1 (continuously. The number of wins for the probable big hit.
The open / close modes are the open / close modes A to D of the door portion 403 of the data display device 400 defined in the open / close mode setting table 6871.
The display mode of each display unit is a mode in which the number of balls is displayed on each of the right seg display unit, the liquid crystal display unit, and the left seg display unit of the data display device.

This will be specifically described.
As the opening / closing order, the fifth order of “1” to “5” is determined.
In the opening / closing sequence “1”, the number of consecutive resorts “1 to 3 stations”, the opening / closing mode “A”, the right seg display section “all-digit number”, and the liquid crystal display section “all-digit number” However, the left seg display part “all digits of the number of balls” is defined.

  In the opening / closing sequence “2”, the number of consecutive resorts “4 to 6” is set, the opening / closing mode “B” is set, the right segment display unit “remaining number of balls” is displayed, and the liquid crystal display unit “− (none)” is set. The left seg display section “up to the last 3 digits of the number of balls” is defined.

  In the opening / closing sequence “3”, the number of consecutive houses “7 to 9 stations”, the opening and closing mode “C”, the right seg display section “remaining number of balls”, and the liquid crystal display section “last 2 numbers of balls” "Segment" is defined in the left seg display part "all digits of the number of balls".

  In the opening / closing sequence “4”, the number of consecutive resorts “10 to 19 stations”, the opening and closing mode “D”, the right segment display section “all number of balls”, and the liquid crystal display section “number of remaining balls” However, the left segment display section “up to the last 3 digits of the number of balls” is defined.

  In the opening / closing sequence “5”, the number of consecutive resorts “20 or more”, the opening / closing mode “A”, the right seg display part “all number of balls”, the liquid crystal display part “all numbers of balls”, The left seg display part “all digits of the number of balls” is defined.

  For the above-mentioned number-of-balls operation effect setting data, the data display device 400 may execute an operation effect that changes the opening / closing mode of the door portion 403 in five stages according to the number of consecutive games in the corresponding gaming machine 1. It has been established. The number of consecutive resorts can be determined based on the jackpot signal and the probability changing signal output from the corresponding gaming machine 1.

  FIG. 56 (2) is a diagram showing an example of data for setting the big hit action effect, the opening / closing order, the big hit round, the opening / closing mode, and each display unit (right segment display unit, liquid crystal display unit, left segment display unit) ) Are associated with each other. The jackpot round is a round (R) in the jackpot gaming state of the corresponding gaming machine 1.

This will be specifically described.
As the opening / closing order, the fifth order of “1” to “5” is determined.
In the opening / closing sequence “1”, the big hit round “1R to 3R”, the opening / closing mode “A”, the right seg display part “all the numbers of probability variation big hits”, the liquid crystal display “the number of big hits (total, probability variation, normal) The “all digits” and the left segment display section “normal big hit count all digits” are respectively defined.

  In the opening / closing sequence “2”, the big hit round “4R to 6R”, the open / close mode “D”, the right segment display section “all digits of probability change big hits”, the liquid crystal display “total jackpot remaining digits” A segment display section “up to the last digit of the total number of big hits” is defined.

  In the opening / closing sequence “3”, the big hit round “7R-9R”, the opening / closing mode “B”, the right segment display part “all digits of probability change big hit”, the liquid crystal display part “-(none)” is the left segment Each of the display sections “normal number of big hits all digits” is defined.

  In the opening / closing sequence “4”, the big hit round “10R to 12R”, the opening / closing mode “C”, the right segment display section “total big hit number remaining digits”, and the liquid crystal display section “up to the last one digit of the total big hit number” The left seg display portion “normal number of big hits all digits” is defined respectively.

  In the opening / closing sequence “5”, the big hit round “13R to 15R”, the open / close mode “A”, the right seg display part “all the number of positive chance big hits”, the liquid crystal display part “the number of big hits (total, positive, normal) The “all digits” and the left segment display section “normal big hit count all digits” are respectively defined.

  The data display device 400 executes an operation effect in which the data display device 400 changes the opening / closing mode of the door portion 403 in five steps according to the big hit round in the big hit game state of the corresponding gaming machine 1 for the above big hit operation effect setting data. Is stipulated. The jackpot round can be determined based on the jackpot signal and the prize ball signal output from the corresponding gaming machine 1. For example, it is assumed that the big winning opening is opened 10 times per round of the big winning gaming state, and 15 game balls are won by winning for each opening of the big winning opening. In this case, since the total number of winning balls per round is 150, if the gaming machine 1 outputs a signal of 1 pulse per 10 balls, the prize is received while the jackpot signal is being received. When the ball signal is received 10 times, it can be determined that one round is completed.

  FIG. 56 (3) is a diagram illustrating an example of countdown operation effect setting data, and the opening / closing order, the remaining count number, the opening / closing mode, and each display unit (right segment display unit, liquid crystal display unit, left segment display) Part) is defined in association with each other. The remaining count number is the remaining time (for example, seconds) until a specific event occurs.

This will be specifically described.
As the opening / closing order, the fifth order of “1” to “5” is determined.
In the opening / closing sequence “1”, the remaining count number “999-800”, the opening / closing mode “A”, the right segment display section “all count numbers”, and the liquid crystal display section “all count numbers” are left segments. The display part “all digits of the count” is defined.

  In the opening / closing sequence “2”, the remaining count number “799-600”, the opening / closing mode “B”, the right seg display part “all digits of the count number”, the liquid crystal display part “− (none)” The display part “all digits of the count” is defined.

  In the opening / closing sequence “3”, the remaining count number “599-400” is displayed, the opening / closing mode “C” is displayed, the right segment display unit “count remaining digit number” is displayed, and the liquid crystal display unit “last two digits” is left The segment display part “all digits of count” is defined.

  In the opening / closing sequence “4”, the remaining count number “399 to 200” is set, the opening / closing mode “D” is set, the right segment display unit “all digits of the count number” is displayed, and the liquid crystal display unit “− (none)” is set to the left segment. The display part “all digits of the count” is defined.

  In the opening / closing sequence “5”, the remaining count number “199 to 0”, the opening / closing mode “A”, the right segment display section “all count number digits”, and the liquid crystal display section “all count number digits” are left segment. The display part “all digits of the count” is defined.

  In the countdown operation effect setting data described above, it is determined that the data display device 400 executes an operation effect that changes the opening / closing mode of the door portion 403 in five stages according to the remaining count number until the event occurs. . The remaining count number can be determined based on the time measured output from the clock unit 470 included in the data display device 400.

  FIG. 56 (4) is a diagram showing an example of the running motion effect setting data. Reference / propagation, propagation offset from the reference time, code (own machine number−reference machine number), and | own machine number. -The reference stand number | and the opening / closing mode are defined in association with each other.

The reference / propagation is a reference / propagation type of the data display device 400. The type “reference” is the data display device 400 corresponding to the gaming machine 1 (the gaming machine 1 in which the big hit has occurred) that is triggered by the execution of the running action effect, and the type “propagation” is the reference data display device. This is a data display device 400 that propagates from 400 and executes a running motion effect.
The propagation offset from the reference time is the time when the data display device 400 of the type “reference” starts executing the running motion effect, and the data display device 400 of the type “propagation” starts executing the running motion effect. It is time until.
The code (own unit number−reference unit number) is obtained by subtracting the reference unit number, which is the unit number where the reference data display device 400 is installed, from the own unit number, which is the unit number where the own data display device 400 is installed. The sign of the value.
| Own stand number−reference stand number | is an absolute value obtained by subtracting the reference stand number from the own stand number.
The opening / closing mode is an opening / closing mode of the door 403 in the data display device 400.

This will be specifically described.
The reference / propagation “reference” includes a propagation offset “0 second” from the reference time, a positive / negative “− (none)”, an own vehicle number−a reference vehicle number “− (none)”, and an open / close transition “(set) A) "is defined respectively.

  In the reference / propagation “propagation”, a propagation offset from the reference time “| own number−reference table number | × 3 seconds” is defined, and “positive” and “negative” are defined as signs. In the signs “positive” and “negative”, the setting of the open / close transition ((Setting B)...) Corresponding to the value of | own stand number−reference stand number |

  In the above-mentioned running motion effect setting data, a time difference (offset) is provided in the data display device 400 of the adjacent car number on the basis of the data display device 400 of the car number where the big hit has occurred, and the motion effect is sequentially propagated. It is determined to let you. When a big hit occurs, the hall computer 600 outputs a reference running motion effect signal for instructing execution of the running motion effect to the data display device 400 of the reference stand number, and other than the reference stand number (propagation stand number) By outputting a propagation running operation effect signal including a reference table number and a reference time to the data display device 400, the data display device 400 other than the reference table number (propagation table number) generates a big hit. The machine number of the gaming machine 1 and the occurrence time of the jackpot can be grasped.

  Then, the data display device 400 calculates the propagation offset from the reference time corresponding to the device itself, and determines that the time corresponding to the propagation offset has elapsed from the reference time based on the time measured output from the clock unit 470. In this case, the execution of the running motion effect is started. In addition, in the setting (setting A, setting B,...) Shown in parentheses, the data display device 400 for each car number is selected according to the opening / closing transition in which the running motion effect is propagated. Arbitrary opening / closing modes can be set.

  FIG. 56 (5) is a diagram showing an example of simultaneous action effect setting data, and the opening / closing order, opening / closing offset, opening / closing mode, and display units (right segment display unit, liquid crystal display unit, left segment display unit) ) Are associated with each other. The opening / closing offset is the time (for example, seconds) until the door 403 is opened / closed in the opening / closing mode of the next opening / closing sequence.

This will be specifically described.
As the opening / closing order, the fifth order of “1” to “5” is determined.
In the opening / closing sequence “1”, the opening / closing offset “0 second”, the opening / closing mode “A”, the right seg display portion “-(none)”, the liquid crystal display portion “(setting a)”, the left seg display portion “-(None)” is defined respectively.

  In the opening / closing sequence “2”, the opening / closing offset “10 seconds”, the opening / closing mode “B”, the right seg display part “(setting b)”, the liquid crystal display part “− (none)”, the left seg display part “(Setting c)” is defined.

  In the opening / closing sequence “3”, the opening / closing offset “20 seconds”, the opening / closing mode “C”, the right segment display section “(setting d)”, the liquid crystal display section “(setting e)”, the left segment display section “(Setting f)” is defined.

  In the opening / closing sequence “4”, the opening / closing offset “30 seconds”, the opening / closing mode “D”, the right segment display unit “(setting g)”, the liquid crystal display unit “(setting h)”, the left segment display unit “(Setting i)” is defined.

  In the opening / closing sequence “5”, the opening / closing offset “40 seconds”, the opening / closing mode “A”, the right seg display portion “-(none)”, the liquid crystal display portion “(setting j)”, the left seg display portion “-(None)” is defined respectively.

  The data for simultaneous action effect setting data defines that the data display device 400 executes an action effect that changes the opening / closing mode of the door part 403 in five stages according to the execution condition of the simultaneous action effect. The opening / closing offset can be determined based on the time measured output from the clock unit 470 included in the data display device 400. In addition, in the settings (setting a, setting b,...) Shown in parentheses, an arbitrary display mode corresponding to the type of simultaneous action effect to be executed can be set.

  In the operation effects defined in the various setting data described above, the sound output unit 450 is displayed in addition to displaying the information corresponding to the liquid crystal display unit 430 and the segment display unit 440 by opening and closing the door unit 403 of the data display device 400. Can be set to output sound and sound effects. For example, in the number-of-balls operation effect and the jackpot operation effect, the larger the number of consecutive games and the jackpot round, the larger the sound effect is output, and in the countdown operation effect, the smaller the remaining count number, What is necessary is just to perform the setting which outputs the audio | voice which alert | reports that the time until generation | occurrence | production approaches more.

  Operation with a sense of unity and unity between the data display devices 400 corresponding to the same model or gaming machine of the same gaming island by performing the setting related to the above-mentioned operation presentation in units of the corresponding gaming machine model or gaming island. An effect can be realized, and an effect of excitement by the effect can be produced. This effect is particularly noticeable in the above-described running motion effect and simultaneous motion effect.

In addition, by making it possible for the store side to set whether or not to execute an operation effect, the data display device 400 can execute an operation effect according to the model and characteristics of the gaming machine. For example, the normal data change device and the ST device have different types of operation effects to be executed by the corresponding data display device 400, and the corresponding data display device has a max type, a middle type, and a sweet digital type game machine. Settings such as different types of operation effects to be executed by 400 can be made. In addition, for the data display device 400 corresponding to the type of gaming machine in which the simultaneous performance is executed, settings are made such that the running motion effect and the simultaneous motion effect are not executed in order to prevent the effects from competing. be able to.
The same applies when the gaming machine is a slot machine.

  The above-mentioned various motion effect setting data are merely some examples of setting data related to motion effects, and in addition to these motion effect setting data, various motion effect setting data are defined. It is possible to keep. For example, in addition to the above, the jackpot symbol (333, 777, etc.) is displayed on the liquid crystal display unit 430 and the segment display unit 440 of the data display device 400 corresponding to the gaming machine 1 in which the jackpot has occurred, and the operation effect is executed. For example, data for setting motion effects may be determined.

FIG. 57 is a diagram showing an example of the table configuration of the irradiation effect setting table 6873. As shown in FIG.
In the irradiation effect setting table 6873, the light emission mode of the light emitting unit 480 of the data display device 400 provided corresponding to the gaming machine 1 is associated with the gaming machine ID that is the ID of the gaming machine 1 and its model name. The light emission mode setting data for setting and the motor drive setting data for setting the drive mode of the motor of the light emitting unit 480 of the data display device 400 are stored.

  In the light emission mode setting data, the “mode” of the irradiation effect instructed via the hall computer 600 or the like, the “big hit type” that is the big hit type of the corresponding gaming machine 1, and the gaming machine 1 is in a high probability state “Probability change” indicating whether or not (probability fluctuation state), “High base” indicating whether or not the gaming machine 1 is in a high base state, and whether or not the gaming machine 1 is in a latent probability changing state. The “latency” shown, the light emission mode of the light emitting unit 480 included in the data display device 400, and the light emission flag are stored in association with each other.

  The motor drive setting data includes a “mode” instructed via the hall computer 600 and the like, a “big hit number of consecutive games” indicating the number of consecutive big hits (number of consecutive games) in the high probability state of the gaming machine 1, A driving mode of a motor included in the light emitting unit 480 included in the data display device 400 and a driving flag are stored in association with each other.

  Here, the number of jackpot reams can be determined based on the number of times that the data display device 400 has received a jackpot signal in a state where the corresponding game machine 1 is outputting a time-shortening signal or a probability changing signal. .

  Although different from the present embodiment, the signal to be output from the gaming machine 1 includes a mid-long-zone signal indicating that the big hit is in the big hit, and the big hit is received while receiving the mid-long hit signal. Based on the number of occurrences, the number of jackpot reams may be determined.

The light emission mode setting data will be specifically described.
The “mode” includes “normal mode” indicating normal time, “direction mode” for irradiation effect, “security mode” for crime prevention, and “maintenance mode” for device maintenance. The data display device 400 is configured to be able to change these modes in response to a mode instruction signal output from the hall computer 600 and a mode instruction signal transmitted from the setting remote controller 700. Yes.

  In “big hit type”, “-(none)” indicating that the gaming state of the corresponding gaming machine 1 is in a normal state and “gaming state” of the corresponding gaming machine 1 is in an unfavorable state. “Non-big hit”, “surprise” indicating that the gaming state of the corresponding gaming machine 1 is a sudden big hit (also referred to as “2R-probability big hit”), and the gaming state of the corresponding gaming machine 1 is the opening of the big prize opening “5R” indicating that the number of executions of the round game, which is a cycle, is a big hit, which is 5 times, and the number of executions of the round game, in which the game state of the corresponding gaming machine 1 is an open cycle of the big prize opening, is 15 times. “15R” indicating that it is a big hit.

  Here, the jackpot type can be determined based on the gaming machine signal output from the corresponding gaming machine 1 by the data display device 400. In this case, the corresponding gaming machine 1 is configured so that a signal that can identify a big hit type such as a sudden hit (2R probability change big hit), a 5R big hit, or a 15R big hit is included in the gaming machine signal and output externally. The data display device 400 may determine the jackpot type based on the machine signal.

  Specifically, the data display device 400 determines that the jackpot type is “-” (that is, the normal state) if none of the jackpot signal, the probability changing signal, and the time reduction signal is input from the corresponding gaming machine 1. If the jackpot signal is not input and at least one of the probability changing signal and the short-time signal is input, it can be determined that the jackpot type is “no hit”. In addition, when a big hit signal indicating a sudden hit big hit (2R probability variable big hit) is input, it can be determined as a big hit type “rush hit”. When a big hit signal indicating 5R big hit is input, a big hit type “5R” is determined. When a jackpot signal indicating 15R jackpot is input, it can be determined that the jackpot type is “15R”.

  “Probability change” is a flag indicating whether or not the corresponding gaming machine 1 is in a probability fluctuation state. “◯” indicates a probability variation state, and “x” indicates a non-probability variation state. In the “accuracy change” of the light emission mode setting data, the accuracy and the latency are “x” indicating a non-probability variation state. The data display device 400 can determine “probability change” when a probability change signal and a time reduction signal are input from the corresponding gaming machine 1.

  “High base” is a flag indicating whether or not the corresponding gaming machine 1 is in a high base state. “◯” indicates a high base state, and “X” indicates a low base state. The data display device 400 can determine “high base” when the time-short / medium signal is input from the corresponding gaming machine 1 but the probability changing signal is not input.

  “Hidden” indicates whether or not the corresponding gaming machine 1 is in the latent probability changing state. “◯” indicates the latent probability variation state, and “×” indicates the non-latency probability variation state. The latent probability variation state does not clearly notify the player that the probability state is high even if the probability variation is won, and in the high probability state, there is also support by the electric starter such as the second starting prize opening (electric chew). Probability is different from suddenness in that it is a probability change that is not performed. In the “latency” of the light emission mode setting data of the present embodiment, “◯” is set only in the latent probability changing state. The data display device 400 can determine “latent” when the probability changing signal is input from the corresponding gaming machine 1 but the time reduction signal is not input.

  The “first display area” includes a first spot LED 480a, a second spot LED 480b, and a third spot LED 480c, and the light emission modes of these spot LEDs are set. The light emission modes include “lighting (large)”, “lighting (small)”, and “off”, and the above-mentioned “mode”, “big hit type”, “probability variation”, “high base”, “latency” Are set in association with each other.

  Illumination indicates that the LED is on, and extinguishing indicates that the LED is off. Illumination (large) indicates a light amount of about 1000 lumens (lm), for example, and lighting (small) indicates a light amount of about 300 lumens (lm), for example. That is, in the case of lighting (large), the irradiated light is brighter than that of lighting (small). The light quantity in this case can be replaced with, for example, luminous intensity (unit: candela), illuminance (unit: lux), luminance (unit: candela per square meter), power consumption (unit: watts), and the like.

  The “second display area” includes a first appeal LED 480d and a second appeal LED 480e, and the light emission modes of these spot LEDs are set. As in the “first display area”, the light emission modes include “lighting (large)”, “lighting (small)”, and “light-off”, and the aforementioned “mode”, “big hit type”, “probability change”. ”,“ High base ”, and“ latency ”.

  The “light emission flag” is associated with the light emission modes of the first to third spot LEDs 480a to 480c in the “first display area” and the first and second appeal LEDs 480d and 480e in the “second display area”. Flag is set. Values of “1” to “11” are set in the light emission flag of the light emission mode setting data of the present embodiment.

  An example of association of the light emission flag of the light emission mode setting data will be described. However, the association of the light emission flag described below is merely an example, and it is needless to say that the setting can be changed as appropriate.

(1) Normal state When the mode is “normal mode”, the big hit type is “− (none)”, the probability variation is “×”, the high base is “×”, and the latency is “×”, the first spot LED 480a is The light is turned on (small), the other spot LEDs and each appeal LED are turned off, and “1” is set as the light emission flag. Thereby, the player can play a game without embarrassment.

(2) Probability change state When the mode is “effect mode”, the big hit type is “non-hit”, the probability change is “◯”, the high base is “x”, and the latency is “x”, the first spot LED 480a and the second The spot LED 480b is turned on (small), and the third spot LED 480c is turned off. Further, the first appeal LED 480d is turned on (small), the second appeal LED 480e is turned off, and “2” is set as the light emission flag. In other words, the player can play the game without embarrassment, but because the first spotlight and the second spotlight are turned on (small), it becomes an effect different from the normal state, Players can have a sense of superiority. Further, since the first appeal light is turned on (small), it is possible to appeal to the players around the corresponding gaming machine 1 that it is different from the normal state. It is possible to draw attention to the player who plays.

(3) Probability change state and high base state The first spot when the mode is "production mode", the big hit type is "no hit", the probability change is "○", the high base is "○", and the latency is "X" The LED 480a and the second spot LED 480b are turned on (small), and the third spot LED 480c is turned off. The first appeal LED 480d and the second appeal LED 480e are turned on (small), and “3” is set as the light emission flag. In other words, the player can play the game without embarrassment, but because the first spotlight and the second spotlight are turned on (small), it becomes an effect different from the normal state, You can have a sense of superiority. In addition, since the first appeal light and the second appeal light are lit (small), it is possible to appeal to players around the corresponding gaming machine 1 that it is different from the normal state. It is possible to draw attention to a player who plays with the gaming machine 1 to be played.

(4) High base state When the mode is “production mode”, the big hit type is “non-hit”, the probability variation is “×”, the high base is “◯”, and the latency is “×”, the first spot LED 480a The 2-spot LED 480b is turned on (small), and the third spot LED 480c is turned off. Further, the first appeal LED 480d and the second appeal LED 480e are turned off, and “4” is set as the light emission flag. In other words, the player can play the game without embarrassment, but because the first spotlight and the second spotlight are turned on (small), it becomes an effect different from the normal state, You can have a sense of superiority.

  In the present embodiment, the appeal LED is not turned on only in the high base state. Thereby, a player who is playing near the corresponding gaming machine 1 can play a game without worrying about the gaming machine 1.

(5) High Base State and Latency Probability Change State If the mode is “Production Mode”, the jackpot type is “No Hit”, the probability change is “×”, the High Base is “O”, and the Latency is “O” The spot LED 480a and the second spot LED 480b are turned on (small), and the third spot LED 480c is turned off. The first appeal LED 480d and the second appeal LED 480e are turned on (small), and “3” is set as the light emission flag. In other words, the player can play the game without embarrassment, but because the first spotlight and the second spotlight are turned on (small), it becomes an effect different from the normal state, You can have a sense of superiority. Furthermore, since the first appeal LED 480d and the first appeal LED are turned on (small), the light emission mode is the same as the “probability change state and the high base state”. That is, a player who is playing a game on the corresponding gaming machine 1 can grasp that the gaming state is the high base state, but can grasp it because the latent probability changing state is not clearly notified to the player. Can not. However, the players around the corresponding gaming machine 1 can know that the gaming machine 1 is in the latent probability changing state due to the presence of the appeal light.

(6) Latency probability change state When the mode is “effect mode”, the big hit type is “non-hit”, the probability change is “×”, the high base is “×”, and the latency is “◯”, the first spot LED 480a is lit. (Small), and the second spot LED 480b and the third spot LED 480c are turned off. Further, the first appeal LED 480d and the second appeal LED 480e are turned on (small), and “5” is set as the light emission flag. That is, the player can play the game without bothering him. Furthermore, when the first appeal light and the second appeal light are turned on (small), it is possible to appeal to the players around the corresponding gaming machine 1 that they are different from the normal state. That is, a player playing a game on the corresponding gaming machine 1 is playing a game in the same way as in the “normal state”, whereas surrounding players have a gaming state of the corresponding gaming machine 1. It can be understood that this is different from the normal state.

(7) When the sudden hit mode is “effect mode” and the hit type is “surprise”, the first spot LED 480a and the second spot LED 480b are turned on (large), and the third spot LED 480c is turned off. The first appeal LED 480d and the second appeal LED 480e are turned on (small), and “6” is set as the light emission flag. That is, since the first spot LED 480a and the second spot LED 480b are lit (large), the player can play a game with a sense of excitement. Furthermore, when the first appeal LED 480d and the second appeal LED 480e are turned on (small), it is appealed to the players around the corresponding gaming machine 1 that they are different from the normal state. A player or the like around the corresponding gaming machine 1 can recognize that the gaming machine 1 is different from the normal state, and thus can pay attention to the gaming machine 1.

(8) 5R big hit (non-probability change)
When the mode is “effect mode”, the big hit type is “5R”, and the probability variation is “x”, the first spot LED 480a and the second spot LED 480b are turned on (large), and the third spot LED 480c is turned off. The first appeal LED 480d and the second appeal LED 480e are turned on (small), and “6” is set as the light emission flag. That is, since the first spotlight and the second spotlight are turned on (large), the player can play a game with a sense of excitement. Furthermore, when the first appeal light and the second appeal light are turned on (small), it is possible to appeal to the players around the corresponding gaming machine 1 that they are different from the normal state. A player or the like around the corresponding gaming machine 1 can recognize that the gaming machine 1 is different from the normal state, and thus can pay attention to the gaming machine 1.

(9) 5R big hit (probability change)
When the mode is “production mode”, the big hit type is “5R”, and the probability variation is “◯”, the first spot LED 480a and the second spot LED 480b are lit (large), and the third spot LED 480c is lit (small). It becomes. Further, the first appeal LED 480d and the second appeal LED 480e are turned on (small), and “7” is set as the light emission flag. That is, since the first spotlight and the second spotlight are turned on (large), the player can play a game with a sense of excitement. Furthermore, since the third spotlight is turned on (small), it is possible to have a higher feeling than “5R big hit (non-probability change)”. Furthermore, when the first appeal light and the second appeal light are turned on (small), it is possible to appeal to the players around the corresponding gaming machine 1 that they are different from the normal state. Since the players around the gaming machine 1 can recognize that the gaming machine 1 is different from the normal state, the gaming machine 1 can focus on the gaming machine.

(10) 15R big hit (non-probability change)
When the mode is “production mode”, the big hit type is “15R”, and the probability variation is “×”, the first spot LED 480a and the second spot LED 480b are lit (large), and the third spot LED is lit (large). It becomes. The first appeal LED 480d and the second appeal LED 480e are turned on (small), and “8” is set as the light emission flag. That is, since the first spotlight and the second spotlight are turned on (large), the player can play a game with a sense of excitement. Furthermore, since the third spotlight is turned on (large), it is possible to have a sense of uplifting more than “5R big hit”. Furthermore, when the first appeal light and the second appeal light are turned on (small), it is possible to appeal to the players around the corresponding gaming machine 1 that they are different from the normal state. Since the players and the like around the gaming machine 1 can recognize that the gaming machine 1 is different from the normal state, attention can be paid to the gaming machine 1.

(11) 15R big hit (probability variation)
When the mode is “production mode”, the big hit type is “15R”, and the probability variation is “◯”, the first spot LED 480a and the second spot LED 480b are lit (large), and the third spot LED is lit (large). It becomes. The first appeal LED 480d and the second appeal LED 480e are turned on (large), and “9” is set as the light emission flag. That is, since the first spotlight, the second spotlight, and the third spotlight are turned on (large), the player can play a game with a sense of excitement. Furthermore, when the first appeal light and the second appeal light are turned on (large), the gaming state is a “15R big hit (probability change)” state for the players around the corresponding gaming machine 1. Will be appealing. Since the players around the gaming machine 1 can recognize that the gaming machine 1 is different from the normal state, the gaming machine 1 can focus on the gaming machine.

(12) Crime prevention mode When the mode is "crime prevention mode", the first spot LED 480a and the second spot LED 480b are lit (large) regardless of the type of game state (big hit type, probability change, high base, latency) The other LEDs are turned off, and “10” is set as the light emission flag. The direction of the first spotlight and the second spotlight will be described in “motor drive setting data”, but the direction of the first spotlight and the second spotlight is different from that in the effect mode, and the corresponding gaming machine 1 The face of the player who is playing the game is changed so that it can be easily grasped. As will be described later, this is intended for crime prevention.

(13) Maintenance mode When the mode is "maintenance mode", each LED is turned off and "11" is set as the light emission flag. That is, in the maintenance mode, for example, since the mode is set when the corresponding gaming machine 1 is inspected, each LED is turned off in consideration of the safety of the workplace.

Next, the motor drive setting data will be specifically described.
The “mode” includes a “production mode”, a “crime prevention mode”, and a “maintenance mode” as in the light emission mode setting data.

  “Number of jackpots” includes “other than 15R jackpot” indicating “other than 15R jackpots”, “first time” indicating the first state of 15R jackpots, and “2” indicating that the number of pools per 15R jackpot is the second or more. After the first ".

  The “first display area” includes the first spot LED 480a, the second spot LED 480b, and the third spot LED 480c, and the motor driving modes of the first to third spot LEDs are set. Examples of motor driving modes include “−70 deg (downward)”, “−65 deg (downward)”, “−50 deg (downward)”, “−45 deg (downward)”, “rotation”, “ (Setting of each part) "and is set in association with the above-mentioned" mode "and" number of jackpot consecutive resorts ".

  The “second display area” includes the first appeal LED 480d and the second appeal LED 480e, and the mode of motor driving of the first and second spot LEDs is set respectively. Examples of motor driving modes include “15 deg (upward)”, “0 deg”, and “rotation”. Like the first display area, the “mode” and “number of jackpots” are described above. Are set in association with each other.

  An example of associating drive flags of motor drive setting data will be described. However, the association of drive flags described below is merely an example, and it goes without saying that the setting can be changed as appropriate.

(1) Drive flag “1”
When the mode is “effect mode” and the number of jackpots is “other than 15R jackpot”, the driving mode of the first spot LED motor is “−70 deg (downward)” and the driving mode of the second spot LED motor is “ −65 deg (downward) ”, and the driving mode of the third spot LED motor is“ (setting of each part) ”. Also, the driving mode of the first appeal LED motor is “+15 deg (upward)”, the driving mode of the second appeal LED motor is “−15 deg (downward)”, and “1” is set as the driving flag. In other words, the first spotlight is irradiated downward 70 deg, and the second spotlight is irradiated downward 65 deg, so that the spotlight is irradiated toward the body part of the player who plays the game machine 1 correspondingly. The Further, the first appeal light is irradiated toward the upward 15 deg and the second appeal ride is irradiated toward the downward 15 deg, so that the appeal light is directed slightly upward and downward in the data display device 400. Irradiated.

(2) Drive flag “2”
When the mode is “production mode” and the number of jackpots is “first time”, the driving mode of the first spot LED motor is “−70 deg (downward)”, and the driving mode of the second spot LED motor is “−”. 65 deg (downward) ", and the driving mode of the third spot LED motor is" rotation ". Further, the driving mode of the first appeal LED motor is “+15 deg (upward)”, the driving mode of the second appeal LED motor is “−15 deg (downward)”, and “2” is set as the driving flag. That is, the first spotlight is irradiated downward 70 deg, the second spotlight is irradiated downward 65 deg, and the third spotlight is irradiated while rotating. Others are the same as the drive flag “1”.

(3) Drive flag “3”
When the mode is “production mode” and the number of jackpots is “second time or later”, the driving mode of the first spot LED motor is “−70 deg (downward)”, and the driving mode of the second spot LED motor is “ −65 deg (downward) ”, and the driving mode of the third spot LED motor is“ rotation ”. Further, the drive mode of the first appeal LED motor is “rotation”, the drive mode of the second appeal LED motor is “rotation”, and “3” is set as the drive flag. That is, the first spotlight is irradiated downward 70 deg, the second spotlight is irradiated downward 65 deg, and the third spotlight is irradiated while rotating. Further, the first appeal light and the second appeal light are irradiated while rotating.

(4) Drive flag “4”
When the mode is “security mode”, the driving mode of the first spot LED motor is “−50 deg (downward)”, the driving mode of the second spot LED motor is “−45 deg (downward)”, and the third spot The driving mode of the LED motor is “(setting of each part)”. Further, the drive mode of the first appeal LED motor is “+15 deg (upward)”, the drive mode of the second appeal LED motor is “−15 deg (downward)”, and “4” is set as the drive flag. In other words, the first spotlight is irradiated downward 50 deg, and the second spotlight is irradiated downward 45 deg, so that the spotlight is irradiated toward the face portion of the player who is playing the game machine 1 correspondingly. The The appeal light is the same as the drive flag “1”.

(5) Drive flag “5”
When the mode is “maintenance mode”, the driving mode of each motor is “(setting of each part)”. This is because it is necessary to inspect the light emitting unit 480 for maintenance, so that the direction of each LED can be individually set on the store side.

  The above-described irradiation mode setting data is freely defined for the data display device 400 in various units such as for each device, for each corresponding gaming machine 1 model, for each gaming island on which the gaming machine 1 is installed. be able to.

  For the first spot LED 480a to the third spot LED 480c constituting the first display area LED unit 481, the light emission mode (LED in the light emission mode setting data is set so that at least a part of the irradiation regions by these spot LEDs overlap. It is desirable to determine the driving mode (such as the angle for driving the LED) in the motor driving setting data. By doing in this way, since a player can be irradiated simultaneously with a plurality of spot LEDs, it is possible to enhance the production effect.

  Further, the contents of the light emission mode setting data and the motor drive setting data shown in the irradiation mode setting data are merely examples, and these contents can be changed as appropriate. For example, according to the acquisition status of the player's game value such as the number of possessed balls and the number of stored balls owned by the player who plays with the corresponding gaming machine 1, the light emission mode in the light emission mode setting data and the motor drive setting data A driving mode may be determined. By doing in this way, it becomes possible to give a player a more special feeling.

58 and 59 are explanatory diagrams of the principle of irradiation effects in the present embodiment.
In the following description, the front-rear direction based on the gaming machine 1 and the data display device 400 is “X-axis”, the left-right direction based on the gaming machine 1 and the data display device 400 is “Y-axis”, the gaming machine 1 and data The vertical direction with reference to the display device 400 will be described as the “Z axis”.

58 (1) and (2) are left side views of the gaming machine 1 and the data display device 400. FIG.
The first spot LED 480a and the second spot LED 480b constituting the first display area LED unit 481 indicate images (irradiation images) in the irradiation direction serving as the respective references by dotted lines. For example, an angle around the Y axis is defined as a first light distribution angle “α”, and a downward direction toward the paper surface is defined as a negative angle (−deg). In addition, a reference axis in the irradiation direction by the upper and lower first spot LEDs 480a and the second spot LEDs 480b is illustrated as a first light distribution axis.

  At this time, FIG. 58 (1) shows a state in which the spot LED motor is controlled so that the first light distribution angle becomes “α = α1”. In this state, the first spot LED 480a and the second spot LED 480a are controlled. Light is emitted toward the body part of the player who plays the game machine 1 by the LED 480b. This state corresponds to the motor drive setting data shown in FIG. 57 in which the mode corresponds to “effect mode”, the first spot LED motor corresponds to “−70 deg”, and the second spot LED motor corresponds to “−65 deg”. .

  FIG. 58 (2) shows a state in which the spot LED motor is controlled so that the first light distribution angle becomes “α = α2”. In this state, the first spot LED 480a and the second spot LED 480b are shown. Therefore, light is irradiated toward the face of the player who plays the game machine 1. This state corresponds to the motor drive setting data shown in FIG. 57 in which the mode corresponds to “security mode”, the first spot LED motor corresponds to “−50 deg”, and the second spot LED motor corresponds to “−45 deg”. .

  By doing in this way, when there is a possibility of illegal acts such as goto acts or theft by the player, the player's face is unclear due to reasons such as low illuminance of the light emitting unit 480 However, the security camera 950 installed on the ceiling of the store makes it possible to clearly display the player's face, so that the player who played the role of lighting and illegal acts such as goto or theft was stored in the store It becomes easy to specify by the side. In the crime prevention mode, since the player's face is illuminated, it is assumed that the player feels a sense of incongruity different from the normal time, and an effect of suppressing illegal activities can be expected.

  In the crime prevention mode, in order to clearly show a scene where an illegal act is performed, light may be emitted in a direction in which it is easy to grasp the player's hand. Moreover, you may make it irradiate light in the direction which is easy to grasp | ascertain each of a player's face and hand with several spot LED.

FIG. 59 (1) is a top view of the gaming machine 1 and the data display device 400.
For example, the angle around the Z axis is defined as the second light distribution angle “β”. Further, the reference axis in the irradiation direction by the left and right third spot LEDs 480c is shown as a second light distribution axis.

  At this time, in FIG. 59 (1), the second light distribution angle corresponding to the third spot LED 480c provided in the left part of the first display area is “β = β1”, and the first display is directed toward the front. The state in which the spot LED motor is controlled so that the second light distribution angle corresponding to the third spot LED 480c provided in the right part of the region is “β = β2” is shown. When the third spot LED 480c is rotated in the downward direction around the Y axis in this state, light is emitted toward the player. This state is, for example, a state in which the mode corresponds to “effect mode” and the third spot LED motor corresponds to “(setting of each part)” or “rotation” in the motor drive setting data shown in FIG.

FIG. 59 (2) is a front view of the gaming machine 1 and the data display device 400.
An image in the irradiation direction (irradiation image) by the first appeal LED 480d and the second appeal LED 480d constituting the second display area LED unit 482 is indicated by a dotted line. For example, an angle around the X axis is defined as a third light distribution angle “γ”, and an upward direction toward the paper surface is defined as a positive angle (+ deg). In addition, the reference axis in the irradiation direction by the upper and lower first appeal LEDs 480d and the second appeal LED 480e is illustrated as a third light distribution axis.

  At this time, in FIG. 59 (2), the third light distribution angle corresponding to the appeal LED provided in the second display area on the right side when viewed from the front is “γ = γ1”, and the second display area on the left side when viewed from the front. 2 shows a state in which the appeal LED motor is controlled so that the third light distribution angle corresponding to the appeal LED provided in is “γ = γ2”. In this state, the first appeal LED 480d and the second appeal LED 480e are shown. Therefore, the light is emitted slightly upward and downward. This state corresponds to the motor drive setting data shown in FIG. 57, for example, in a state where the mode corresponds to “effect mode”, the first appeal LED motor corresponds to “+15 deg”, and the second appeal LED motor corresponds to “−15 deg”. is there.

  In addition, although it demonstrated briefly here, spot LED and appeal LED are comprised so that light can be irradiated to a corresponding direction by rotation around each axis | shaft.

  Moreover, in said operation | movement effect, you may make it perform the light emission effect (irradiation effect) by making spot LED and appeal LED light-emit. That is, for each of the various operation effects described above, operation effect setting data that defines the light emission mode of the spot LED and the appeal LED and the driving mode of the motor is determined in accordance with the above-described irradiation effect setting data. Based on the effect setting data, the data display device 400 may also execute a light emission effect (irradiation effect) in the operation effect. In this case, the LED light emission mode and the motor drive mode can be set as appropriate on the store side according to the type of operation effect.

FIG. 60 is a diagram illustrating an example of a data configuration of display device setting data 691 transmitted from the hall computer 600 to the data display device 400 in the present embodiment.
The display device setting data 691 includes production setting data 6919 in addition to the data described above. The effect setting data 6919 is generated based on various effect setting tables (open / close setting table 6871, operation effect setting table 6872, irradiation effect setting table 6873) included in the effect setting table 687. Data. Specifically, the data determined based on the device correspondence table 686 among the data of the opening / closing mode determined in the opening / closing setting table 6871 and the operation effect setting data determined in the operation effect setting table 6872. The data display device ID determined based on the device correspondence table 686 among the data determined for the gaming machine ID corresponding to the display device ID and the irradiation effect setting data set in the irradiation effect setting table 6873. Data including data defined for the corresponding gaming machine ID is used as the effect setting data 6919.

  In addition, the hall computer 600 instructs the data display device 400 to start the execution of the irradiation effect and the mode instruction signal for instructing the irradiation effect mode (effect mode, crime prevention mode, maintenance mode). Irradiation effect start instruction signal, irradiation effect end instruction signal for instructing the end of execution of the irradiation effect, irradiation effect stop instruction signal for instructing stop of execution of the irradiation effect, and instructing to cancel the change of the irradiation mode A signal including a reset signal for output is output as a management device signal.

[3-5. processing]
FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of the operation effect process executed by the processing unit 410 of the data display device 400 according to the operation effect program 491c stored in the storage unit 490 in the present embodiment.

  First, the processing unit 410 is transmitted from the setting remote controller 700 such as a gaming machine signal output from the corresponding gaming machine 1, a unit signal output from the corresponding unit, a management device signal output from the hall computer 600, and the like. An external signal including a signal to be received is determined (K1).

  Next, the processing unit 410 determines whether or not the operation effect stop setting has been made (K3). If it is determined that the operation effect has been set (K3; Yes), the process proceeds to K31. On the other hand, if it is determined that the operation effect stop setting is not made (K3; No), the processing unit 410 determines whether or not the operation effect execution condition is satisfied (K5). Specifically, one of the execution conditions (execution conditions for the operation effect setting data in FIG. 55) defined in the operation effect setting data stored in the effect setting data 6919 of the display device setting data 691. It is determined whether or not the above execution conditions are satisfied.

  If it determines with operation | movement effect execution conditions not being satisfied (K5; No), the process part 410 will move a process to K21. On the other hand, if it is determined that the execution condition is satisfied (K5; Yes), the processing unit 410 determines the type of motion effect corresponding to the satisfied execution condition (K7).

  Next, the processing unit 410 determines whether or not the operation effect to be executed is in competition (K9). Specifically, in K7, it is determined whether or not there are a plurality of types of motion effects corresponding to the established execution conditions (that is, whether or not the execution conditions corresponding to the plurality of types of motion effects are satisfied simultaneously). To do.

  If it determines with not competing (K9; No), the process part 410 will move a process to K13. If it determines with competing (K9; Yes), the process part 410 will determine the kind of operation | movement effect made into execution object (K11). Specifically, based on the priority stored in the motion effect setting data included in the effect setting data 6919 of the display device setting data 691, the highest priority among the types of competing motion effects. The type of motion effect is determined as the type of motion effect to be executed.

  Thereafter, the processing unit 410 refers to the operation effect setting data included in the effect setting data 6919 of the display device setting data 691 to determine the opening / closing mode (effect mode) of the door 403 (L13). And the process part 410 starts execution of an operation effect (K15).

  Next, the processing unit 410 determines whether or not the operation effect is being executed (K17), and if it is determined that the operation effect is not being executed (K17; No), the process proceeds to K31. On the other hand, if it determines with performing (K17; Yes), the process part 410 will determine whether the opening / closing mode change conditions of the door part 403 were satisfied (K19). Specifically, in the setting data corresponding to the action effect being executed among the action effect setting data included in the effect setting data 6919 of the display device setting data 691, the opening / closing order next to the current opening / closing order. It is determined whether or not a condition corresponding to is established. If it determines with not having been materialized (K19; No), the process part 410 will move a process to K23.

  On the other hand, if it determines with the opening / closing mode change condition having been satisfied (K19; Yes), the process part 410 will change the opening / closing mode of the door part 403 (K21). Thereafter, the processing unit 410 determines whether or not an operation effect end condition is satisfied (K23). Specifically, in the setting data corresponding to the action effect being executed among the action effect setting data 6919 included in the effect setting data 6919 of the display device setting data 691, the condition corresponding to the last opening / closing order is set. It is determined whether or not it is established. If it is determined that it has not been established (K23; No), the process proceeds to K27.

  On the other hand, if it determines with operation | movement effect completion | finish conditions having been satisfied (K23; Yes), the process part 410 will end the operation | movement effect in execution (K25). Thereafter, processing unit 410 determines whether or not an operation effect stop condition is satisfied (K27). Specifically, it is determined whether or not a pressing operation of the operation stop button 422 is detected, or whether a stop instruction signal for stopping the operation effect is received from the hall computer 600 or the setting remote controller 700. If it determines with not having been materialized (K27; No), the process part 410 will move a process to K31.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the motion effect stop condition is satisfied (K27; Yes), the processing unit 410 stops the motion effect being executed (K29). Next, the processing unit 410 determines whether or not to end the process (K31). If it is determined that the process is to be continued (K31; No), the process returns to K1. On the other hand, if it determines with complete | finishing a process (K31; Yes), the process part 410 will complete | finish an operation | movement effect process.

  FIG. 62 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the flow of irradiation effect processing executed by the processing unit 410 of the data display device 400 according to the irradiation effect program 491c stored in the storage unit 490. This process is a process executed as a subroutine process in the data display device process executed by the processing unit 410 according to the data display device processing program 491 stored in the storage unit 490.

  In addition, processes other than the irradiation effect process (payout rate-related process, special effect process, display process, and the like) can be realized as substantially the same process as the process executed by the data display device 1200 described in the second embodiment. Therefore, the description is omitted.

  First, the processing unit 410 is transmitted from the setting remote controller 700 such as a gaming machine signal output from the corresponding gaming machine 1, a unit signal output from the corresponding unit, a management device signal output from the hall computer 600, and the like. An external signal including a signal to be transmitted is determined (L1).

  Next, the processing unit 410 determines whether or not the irradiation effect is set to stop (L3). If it is determined that the irradiation effect has been set (L3; Yes), the processing proceeds to L31. On the other hand, if it is determined that the irradiation effect stop setting has not been made (L3; No), the processing unit 410 determines whether or not the irradiation effect start condition is satisfied (L5).

Here, the irradiation effect start condition can be determined as, for example, that any of the following conditions is satisfied.
(A-1) A signal that can identify an advantageous state (a jackpot signal (such as 5R, 15R), a probability changing signal, a short-time signal) is newly received from the corresponding gaming machine 1.
(A-2) The irradiation effect start instruction signal has been received from the hall computer 600.
(A-3) An irradiation effect start instruction signal has been received from the setting remote controller 700.
(A-4) A security signal has been received from the corresponding gaming machine 1.

The condition (A-1) is that when the corresponding gaming machine 1 starts control to an advantageous state (big hit gaming state (probability, 5R, 15R, etc.), probability variation state, high base state, latent probability variation state, etc.) This means that the execution of the irradiation effect is started.
The condition (A-2) means that the execution of the irradiation effect is started when an instruction to execute the irradiation effect is given via the hall computer 600 by the store manager or the like.
The condition (A-3) means that the execution of the irradiation effect is started when an instruction to execute the irradiation effect is given via the setting remote control 700 by a store clerk or the like.
The condition of (A-4) is that when it is detected that some abnormality has occurred in the corresponding gaming machine 1, the execution of the irradiation effect is started for the purpose of leaving it to a player or a store clerk. It means to do.

  If it determines with the irradiation production | presentation start conditions not being satisfied (L5; No), the process part 410 will move a process to L13. On the other hand, if it is determined that the irradiation effect start condition is satisfied (L5; Yes), the processing unit 410, based on the determination result of the L1 external signal, the light emission setting data and the motor included in the irradiation effect setting data 6919. The light emission flag and the drive flag are determined with reference to the drive setting data (L7). Then, the processing unit 410 sets the determined light emission flag and driving flag (L9).

  Next, the processing unit 410 issues a control command to the LED drive unit 483a and the motor drive unit 483b based on the set content of L9 (L11). Thereby, light emission by the 1st display area LED part 481 and the 2nd display area LED part 482 is performed, and execution of an irradiation effect is started.

  Thereafter, the processing unit 410 determines whether or not the irradiation effect is being executed (L13). If it is determined that the irradiation effect is not being executed (L13; No), the process proceeds to L31. On the other hand, if it is determined that the irradiation effect is being executed (L13; Yes), the processing unit 410 determines whether the irradiation effect end condition is satisfied (L15).

Here, the irradiation effect end condition can be determined, for example, as the following condition corresponding to each of the irradiation effect start conditions.
(B-1) The reception of the signal corresponding to (A-1) is terminated.
(B-2) An irradiation effect end instruction signal has been received from the hall computer 600.
(B-3) The irradiation effect end instruction signal is received from the setting remote controller 700.
(B-4) The security signal is no longer received from the corresponding gaming machine 1.

  If it determines with the irradiation production | generation end conditions not being satisfied (L15; No), the process part 410 will move a process to L21. On the other hand, if it determines with the irradiation production | generation end conditions having been satisfied (L15; Yes), the process part 410 will stop the control command to the LED drive unit 483a and the motor drive unit 483b (L17). Thereby, the execution of the irradiation effect ends. Then, the processing unit 410 resets the flags (light emission flag and drive flag) (L19).

Next, the processing unit 410 determines whether or not the irradiation mode change cancellation condition is satisfied (L21).
Here, the irradiation mode change cancellation condition can be determined as one of the following conditions being satisfied, for example.
(C-1) A reset signal has been received from the hall computer 600.
(C-2) A reset operation on the operation unit 420 is detected.
(C-3) A reset operation has been detected from the setting remote control 700.
(C-4) Detecting power-off of the device itself.

The condition of (C-1) means that the change of the irradiation mode is canceled when an instruction to cancel the change of the irradiation mode is given via the hall computer 600 by the store manager or the like.
The condition of (C-2) means that the change of the irradiation mode is canceled when an instruction to cancel the change of the irradiation mode is given via the operation unit 420 by a store clerk or the like.
The condition of (C-3) means that the change of the irradiation mode is canceled when an instruction to cancel the change of the irradiation mode is given via the setting remote control 700 by a store clerk or the like.
The condition of (C-4) means that the change of the irradiation mode is canceled when the power supply of the own device is cut off.

  If it determines with the irradiation mode change cancellation conditions not being satisfied (L21; No), the process part 410 will move a process to L25. On the other hand, if it determines with the irradiation mode change cancellation conditions having been satisfied (L21; Yes), the process part 410 will reset a flag (light emission flag and drive flag) (L23). Thereby, the irradiation mode in the irradiation effect is initialized.

Next, the processing unit 410 determines whether or not the irradiation effect stop condition is satisfied (L25).
Here, the irradiation effect stop condition can be determined as, for example, that one of the following conditions is satisfied.
(D-1) Detecting pressing of the light emission stop button 423.
(D-2) The irradiation effect stop instruction signal is received from the hall computer 600.
(D-3) The irradiation effect stop instruction signal is received from the setting remote controller 700.

The condition of (D-1) means that the execution of the irradiation effect is stopped according to the stop operation when the player who plays with the corresponding gaming machine 1 feels that the irradiation effect is troublesome.
The condition of (D-2) means that the execution of the irradiation effect is stopped when an instruction to stop the irradiation effect is given via the hall computer 600 by the manager of the store or the like.
The condition of (D-3) means that the execution of the irradiation effect is stopped when an instruction to stop the irradiation effect is given via the setting remote control 700 by a store clerk or the like.

  If it determines with the irradiation effect stop conditions not being satisfied (L25; No), the process part 410 will move a process to L31. On the other hand, if it determines with the irradiation effect stop conditions having been satisfied (L25; Yes), the process part 410 will stop the control command to the LED drive unit 483a and the motor drive unit 483b (L27). Thereby, the execution of the irradiation effect is stopped. Then, the processing unit 410 performs irradiation effect stop setting (L29).

  If the irradiation effect restart condition corresponding to each of the above-described irradiation effect stop conditions is satisfied after the irradiation effect stop setting is made in L29, the flag (light emission) set when the execution of the irradiation effect is stopped is established. Based on the flag and the drive flag, the execution of the irradiation effect may be resumed.

  Next, the processing unit 410 determines whether or not to end the process (L31). If it is determined that the process is to be continued (L31; No), the process returns to L1. On the other hand, if it determines with complete | finishing a process (L31; Yes), the process part 410 will complete | finish an irradiation effect process.

  FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of the personal game history information recording process executed by the processing unit 410 of the data display device 400 according to the personal game history information recording program 491e stored in the storage unit 490.

  First, the processing unit 410 reads the current recording flag value (M1). Next, the processing unit 410 determines whether or not the recording flag is set to “1” (M3). As can be seen from the personal game history information recording table 496 (see FIG. 52), the recording flag is set to “1” when an information recording start operation is accepted. For this reason, when the information recording start operation is received from the portable terminal 250 via the non-contact communication unit 464, the processing unit 410 sets “1” in the recording flag.

  If it is determined that “1” is set in the recording flag (M3; Yes), the processing unit 410 starts reading the personal game history information (M5). Then, the processing unit 410 sets “2” in the recording flag (M7). As can be seen from the personal game history information recording table 496 (see FIG. 52), information recording start preparation processing is executed while “2” is set in the recording flag. For this reason, when the processing unit 410 sets “2” in the recording flag, the processing unit 410 starts executing the information recording start preparation process.

  When “1” is not set in the recording flag (M3; No), or after M7, the processing unit 410 determines whether “2” is set in the recording flag (M9). If it is determined that it is set (M9; Yes), the processing unit 410 determines whether the information recording start preparation process being executed is completed (M11), and if it is determined that it is completed. (M9; Yes) After the preparation completion screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display unit 430, “3” is set in the recording flag (M13). As can be seen from the personal game history information recording table 496 (see FIG. 52), the personal game history information is recorded / updated while “3” is set in the recording flag.

  When “2” is not set in the recording flag (M9; No), or after M13, the processing unit 410 determines whether “3” is set in the recording flag (M15). If it is determined that the recording flag is not set (M15; No), the processing unit 410 determines whether “4” is set in the recording flag (M17). As can be seen from the personal game history information recording table 496 (see FIG. 52), “4” is set in the recording flag when an information recording end operation is accepted. For this reason, when the information recording start operation is received from the portable terminal 250 via the non-contact communication unit 464, the processing unit 410 sets “4” in the recording flag.

  If it is determined that “4” is set in the recording flag (M17; Yes), the processing unit 410 performs a setting to stop updating the personal game history information (M19). Then, the processing unit 410 sets “5” in the recording flag (M21). As can be seen from the personal game history information recording table 496 (see FIG. 52), while the recording flag is set to “5”, the information recording end preparation process is executed. Therefore, when the processing unit 410 sets “5” in the recording flag, the processing unit 410 starts executing the information recording end preparation process.

  When “4” is not set in the recording flag (M17; No), or after M21, the processing unit 410 determines whether “5” is set in the recording flag (M23). If it is determined that it is set (M23; Yes), the processing unit 410 determines whether the information recording end preparation process being executed is completed (M27), and if it is determined that it is completed. (M27; Yes) After the preparation completion screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display unit 430, “6” is set to the recording flag (M13). As can be seen from the personal game history information recording table 496 (see FIG. 52), the recording flag is set to “6” when the information recording process is completed.

  When “5” is not set in the recording flag (M23; No), or after M27, the processing unit 410 determines whether “6” is set in the recording flag (M29). If it is determined that it is set (M29; Yes), the processing unit 410 controls to output information that can identify the personal game history information (M31). Specifically, for example, the liquid crystal display unit 430 is controlled to display a two-dimensional code including access information such as a URL for accessing the server 980 from the portable terminal 250.

  When “6” is not set in the recording flag (M29; No), or after M33, the processing unit 410 ends the personal game history information recording process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in M11 that the information recording start preparation process has not been completed (M11; No), if it is determined in M15 that the recording flag is set to “3” (M15; Yes), or M25 When it is determined that the information recording end preparation process is not completed in (M25; No), the processing unit 410 executes the updating process (M35). Then, the processing unit 410 ends the personal game history information recording process.

FIG. 64 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the flow of a first updating process that is an example of the updating process executed by the processing unit 410.
First, the processing unit 410 determines whether or not the personal game history information update condition is satisfied (N1). Specifically, the game information is acquired based on the gaming machine signal output from the corresponding gaming machine 1, and it is determined whether or not it is necessary to update the personal gaming history information.

  If it is determined that the personal game history information update condition is satisfied (N1; Yes), the processing unit 410 determines whether “3” is set in the recording flag (N3). If it is determined that it is set (N3; Yes), the personal game history information data 497 in the storage unit 490 is updated with the game information acquired based on the gaming machine signal output from the corresponding gaming machine 1 ( N5). Then, the processing unit 410 ends the first updating process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that “3” is not set in the recording flag (N3; No), the processing unit 410 displays on the liquid crystal display unit 430 a screen in preparation for notifying the user that preparation is in progress. (N7). Specifically, if the recording flag is “2”, the information recording start preparation process is notified, and if the recording flag is “5”, the player is notified that the information recording end preparation process is being executed. Then, the processing unit 410 ends the first updating process. If it is determined that the personal game history information update condition is not satisfied (N1; No), the processing unit 410 ends the first updating process.

  Here, in the case where the recording flag is not set to “3” in spite of the execution of the first updating process, the recording flag is “2” in the personal game history information recording process. When the recording start preparation process is not completed (M9 in FIG. 63; Yes → M11; No), that is, when the information recording start preparation process is being executed, and when the recording flag is “5” and the information recording end preparation is performed This is either the case where the process is not completed (M23 in FIG. 63; Yes → M25; No), that is, the case where the information recording end preparation process is being executed. In this case, the fact that the personal game history information update condition is satisfied (N1; Yes) means that the corresponding gaming machine is being executed during the execution of either one of the information recording start preparation process and the information recording end preparation process. 1 means that a game was played.

  If a game is played in the gaming machine 1 during execution of the preparation process, the personal game history information cannot be properly updated, and in some cases, information that is not normal due to garbled data is used as the personal game history information. May be provided to the user. Therefore, in the first updating process, if the personal game history information update condition is satisfied during the execution of either the information recording start preparation process or the information recording end preparation process, Restrict update of game history information.

Here, limiting the update of the personal game history information means that when the personal game history information update condition is satisfied during the execution of either one of the information recording start preparation process and the information recording end preparation process, This means that the personal game history information is not updated until the processing being executed is completed. That is, when updating is limited during execution of the information recording start preparation process, the information recording start preparation process is completed and “3” is set in the recording flag (M11 in FIG. 63; Yes → M13). ) Do not update personal game history information. In other words, when the information recording start preparation process is completed and the recording flag is set to “3” (M11 in FIG. 63; Yes → M13), the restriction on updating of the personal game history information is released. In this case, since the recording flag is determined to be “3” in the first updating process (N3; Yes), the personal game history information is updated (N5).
The same applies to the case where updating is restricted during execution of the information recording end preparation process.

  Here, depending on the player, a player who makes a trial hit to confirm the state of the gaming machine 1 and then records personal game history information to make a transition to a full-fledged game, or personal game history information is recorded. It is thought that there is a player who continues to play the game by recording personal game history information after realizing that he forgot that he forgot. Assuming such circumstances, the game information prior to the start of the information recording start preparation process is not included in the recording target of the personal game history information, and the information recording start preparation process is started from the start. It is desirable to record personal game history information.

  Therefore, in updating the personal game history information of N5, it is preferable to update the personal game history information using the game information of the corresponding gaming machine 1 at the time when the execution of the information recording start preparation process is started as reference information. Further, as described above, when the update condition is established during the execution of the information recording start preparation process and the update of the personal game history information is restricted, the corresponding gaming machine 1 at the time when the information recording start preparation process is started. The game information may be used as reference information, and the personal game history information may be updated after the update restriction is removed.

  Even if the update of the personal game history information is restricted, it is considered appropriate for the operation of the store to notify the player and other players of correct information on the display on the data display device 400. It is done. Therefore, even if the update of the personal game history information is restricted, the processing unit 410 updates the personal game history information for display in the RAM or the like separately from the personal game history information to be recorded. The stored / updated personal game history information for display may be displayed on the liquid crystal display unit 430 or the segment display unit 440.

FIG. 65 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the flow of a second updating process, which is another example of the updating process executed by the processing unit 410.
First, the processing unit 410 determines whether or not the personal game history information update condition is satisfied (O1). If it is determined that the condition is satisfied (O1; Yes), “3” is set in the recording flag. It is determined whether or not (O3). If it is determined that it is set (O3; Yes), the personal game history information data 497 in the storage unit 490 is updated with the game information acquired based on the gaming machine signal output from the corresponding gaming machine 1 ( O5). Then, the processing unit 410 ends the second updating process.

  When it is determined that “3” is not set in the recording flag (O3; No), the processing unit 410 determines the recording flag that is set (O7), and determines that the recording flag is “2”. If so (O7; 2), the recording flag is set to “0” (O9). In this case, since the recording flag is changed from “2” to “0”, the processing unit 410 ends the information recording start preparation process. Then, the processing unit 410 controls the liquid crystal display unit 430 to display a re-operation screen (start operation) that prompts re-operation for starting information recording (O11), and then ends the second updating process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the set recording flag is “5” (O7; 5), the processing unit 410 sets “3” in the recording flag (O13). In this case, since the recording flag is changed from “5” to “3”, the processing unit 410 ends the information recording end preparation process. Then, the processing unit 410 controls the liquid crystal display unit 430 to display a re-operation screen (end operation) that prompts re-operation to end information recording (O15), and then ends the second updating process. If it is determined that the personal game history information update condition is not satisfied (O1; No), the processing unit 410 ends the second updating process.

  Here, in the case where “3” is not set in the recording flag even though the second update process is executed, the information recording start preparation process is being executed as in the first update process. There are cases where there is a case where an information recording end preparation process is being executed. In this case, the fact that the personal game history information update condition is satisfied (N1; Yes) corresponds to the execution of either one of the information recording start preparation process and the information recording end preparation process. This means that a game is played on the gaming machine 1.

  As described above, if a game is played in the gaming machine 1 during the execution of the preparation process, the personal game history information cannot be appropriately updated. There is a possibility that it will be provided to the user as game history information. Therefore, in the second updating process, if the personal game history information update condition is satisfied during the execution of one of the information recording start preparation process and the information recording end preparation process, the execution is prohibited. Limit processing inside.

Here, restricting the process being executed is being executed when the personal game history information update condition is satisfied during the execution of one of the information recording start preparation process and the information recording end preparation process. This means that when the process is forcibly terminated and the operation corresponding to the process is accepted again, the corresponding process is executed again. That is, when the update is restricted during the execution of the information recording start preparation process, the information recording start preparation process is forcibly terminated (O9), and the recording start is started according to the display of the re-operation screen (start operation) (O11). When the operation is accepted again, the information recording start preparation process is executed again.
The same applies to the case where the execution of the information recording end preparation process is restricted.

  Note that as a limitation of the process, the process being executed may be stopped instead of forcibly terminating the process being executed as described above. In this case, the stopped process may be resumed when the re-operation is performed.

  Further, here, the liquid crystal display unit 430 displays a re-operation screen for prompting the user to accept an operation corresponding to the restricted process (information recording start operation or information recording end operation) again. Instead of this, the sound output unit 450 may output a sound for prompting the user to accept again.

  In addition, when a certain time (for example, 10 minutes) has passed since the gaming machine signal is no longer output from the corresponding gaming machine 1 and the information recording end operation has not been accepted, the player forgets the operation. May have left. Therefore, in order to be able to cope with such forgotten end operation, the processing unit 410 outputs the stored latest personal game history information to the hall computer 600 in association with the member ID and mobile ID. May be executed. In this case, the hall computer 600 transmits the information acquired from the data display device 400 to the server 980, and manages the latest personal game history information in association with the member ID and mobile ID on the server 980 side. The user can acquire personal game history information from the server 980 later.

  In the present embodiment, the information recording start operation and the information recording end operation are realized by non-contact communication between the mobile terminal 250 and the data display device 400. However, the mobile terminal 250 is suitable for an IC reader / writer. There may be a case where the operation cannot be properly accepted due to reasons such as being not deceived or having a communication error. Therefore, when it is determined that communication with the portable terminal 250 has failed and the operation cannot be properly received, a notification process for notifying the hall computer 600 that the operation has not been received is executed. You may do it.

  When the notification that the acceptance of the information recording start operation has failed is received, the hall computer 600, based on the gaming machine signal output from the gaming machine 1 corresponding to the data display device 400 that has received the notification, The game information of the gaming machine 1 is stored / updated. Then, when the notification that the information recording end operation has been received is received from the data display device 400, the latest stored game information is output to the data display device 400 as personal game history information. Good.

  When the hall computer 600 receives a notification that the acceptance of the information recording end operation has failed, the hall computer 600 requests the data display device 400 to transmit the latest personal game history information, and the latest personal game history information. Is acquired from the data display device 400 in association with the member ID and mobile ID. The hall computer 600 transmits information acquired from the data display device 400 to the server 980, and manages the latest personal game history information in association with the member ID and mobile ID on the server 980 side. The user can acquire personal game history information from the server 980 later.

[3-6. Display screen]
FIG. 66 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed on the liquid crystal display unit 430 of the data display device 400, and shows an example of a personal game history screen on which personal game history information is displayed.
In this personal game history screen, as the personal game history information in the corresponding gaming machine 1, there are general jackpot count, probability variable jackpot count, normal jackpot count, start count, jackpot history graph, and ball graph. It is displayed.

FIG. 66 (1) is a diagram illustrating an example of a preparation screen.
This display screen shows a display example of the preparation screen displayed when the recording flag is set to “2” or “5” in the personal game history recording process (N7 in FIG. 64). . In this example, a pop-up including a message “Preparing ... Please wait for a while ...” and an hourglass image is displayed as a display screen in the center of the personal game history screen.

FIG. 66 (2) is a diagram illustrating an example of a preparation completion screen.
This display screen shows a display example of a preparation completion screen displayed when the information recording start preparation process or the information recording end preparation process is completed in the personal game history recording process (M13 in FIG. 63 or M27). In this example, a pop-up including a message “preparation is complete” is displayed at the center of the personal game history screen.

FIG. 66 (3) shows an example of the re-operation screen.
This display screen shows a display example of a re-operation screen displayed in the personal game history recording process (O11 or O15 in FIG. 65). In this example, a pop-up including a message “I'm sorry, please try again” is displayed in the center of the personal game history screen.

  In the data display device 400 described above, similarly to the data display device 1200, LEDs (left frame LED and right frame LED) are provided as light emitting means on the left and right frames of the liquid crystal display unit 430, and the data display device 1200 Similarly, these LEDs may emit light to execute an irradiation effect.

[3-7. Effect]
In the second gaming system 1000B, a data display device 400 is provided corresponding to the gaming machine 1 (pachinko gaming machine 1).

The data display device 400 can display information regarding the game of the corresponding gaming machine. The data display device 400 includes a liquid crystal display unit 430 using a liquid crystal display method, a segment display unit 440 using a segment display method different from the liquid crystal display method, and a processing unit that controls the display of each of the liquid crystal display unit 430 and the segment display unit 440. With. Then, the processing unit includes a liquid crystal seg-linked display pattern for performing display linked with the liquid crystal display unit 430 and the seg display unit 440, and a liquid crystal seg independent display pattern for performing independent display with the liquid crystal display unit 430 and the seg display unit 440. Thus, it is possible to execute control for displaying information related to the game of the corresponding gaming machine.
According to this, regarding the two display units of the liquid crystal display unit 430 and the segment display unit 440 using different display methods, information on the game of the corresponding gaming machine 1 is displayed by the liquid crystal segment linked display pattern and the liquid crystal segment independent display pattern. By making it, the production effect at the time of alerting | reporting the information regarding a game can be heightened.

Further, the data display device 400 can display information related to the game of the corresponding gaming machine 1, can receive information recording start operation and information recording end operation, and information related to the game after receiving the information recording start operation. Can be stored as personal game history information in an identifiable manner, the personal game history information can be updated in accordance with the establishment of the update condition according to the game, and the personal game history is received based on the reception of the information recording end operation. Information that can identify information can be output. The processing unit 410 can execute an information recording start preparation process based on the information recording start operation and an information recording end preparation process based on the information recording end operation. When the update condition is satisfied during the execution of any one of the processes, it is possible to limit the update of the personal game history information, and either one of the information recording start preparation process and the information recording end preparation process If the update condition is satisfied during the execution of the process, the process being executed can be limited.
According to these, it is possible to appropriately update the personal game history information.

Further, the processing unit 410 can execute an operation effect by operating the segment display unit 440 configured as a movable unit based on the timing information acquired from the clock unit 470.
According to this, the production effect can be further improved.

[3-8. Modified example]
[3-8-1. Display of numerical information]
In the data display device 400 described in the above embodiment, the processing unit 410 may execute control to display numerical information related to the game of the corresponding gaming machine 1 on the liquid crystal display unit 430 or the segment display unit 440. .

FIG. 67 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the flow of numerical information display processing, which is an example of processing executed by the processing unit 410 of the data display device 400 in this case.
First, the processing unit 410 determines the latest numerical value of the target numerical information (T1). Here, for example, if the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine, the target numerical information includes, for example, the difference in the number of balls and the number of balls held by the player. The number of medals and the number of medals can be used.

  Next, the processing unit 410 determines whether or not an update display condition for updating the numerical display is satisfied (T3). Specifically, when the latest value of the target numerical information determined at T <b> 1 has changed from the current numerical value stored in the storage unit 490, it is determined to update the numerical value display. If it is determined that the update display condition is not satisfied (T3; No), the processing unit 410 moves the process to T37. On the other hand, if it is determined that the update display condition is satisfied (T3; Yes), the processing unit 410 temporarily stores the latest numerical value determined in T1 in the storage unit 490 as the update destination numerical value (T5).

  Next, based on the current numerical value and the update destination numerical value stored in the storage unit 490, the processing unit 410 determines in which direction of addition or subtraction the numerical value display is to be changed (T7) and adds it. If it is determined that the numerical value is changed in the direction (T7; addition), it is determined whether or not the update display flag is set to “ON” (T9). The update display flag is a flag indicating that the numerical display is being updated, and an addition update display flag indicating that the display is being updated in the adding direction and a display being updated in the subtracting direction. This includes a subtraction update display flag indicating the presence.

  If it is determined that none of the update display flags is “ON” (T9; No), the processing unit 410 starts execution of addition update display control (T11). Specifically, control is performed so that the numerical value currently displayed is sequentially changed to the update destination numerical value by, for example, vertical scrolling. Then, the processing unit 410 sets the addition update display flag to “ON” (T13). If it is determined that any one of the update display flags is “ON” (T9; Yes), the processing unit 410 sets the waiting flag to “ON” (T15). The waiting flag is a flag indicating that it is in a standby state for update display control.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the numerical value is changed in the subtraction direction (T7; subtraction), the processing unit 410 determines whether or not the update display flag is set to “ON” (T17). If it is determined that none of the above update display flags is “ON” (T17; No), the processing unit 410 starts execution of the subtraction update display control (T19). Specifically, control is performed so that the numerical value currently displayed is sequentially changed to the update destination numerical value, for example, by horizontal scrolling. Then, the processing unit 410 sets the subtraction update display flag to “ON” (T21). If it is determined that any one of the update display flags is “ON” (T17; Yes), the processing unit 410 sets the waiting flag to “ON” (T23).

  After T13, T15, T21, or T23, the processing unit 410 determines whether or not the update display flag is “ON” (T25), and if it is determined that it is “ON” (T25; Yes). Then, it is determined whether or not the update display control being executed is completed (T27). If it is determined that the update is complete (T27; Yes), the update display flag corresponding to the completed update display control is set to “OFF” (T29).

  Next, the processing unit 410 determines whether or not the waiting flag is set to “ON” (T31). If it is determined that the waiting flag is set to “ON” (T31; Yes), the waiting flag is set. The execution of the update display control corresponding to the flag is started (T33). Then, the processing unit 410 sets the waiting flag to “OFF” (T35).

  Thereafter, the processing unit 410 determines whether or not to end the process (T37). If it is determined to continue the process (T37; No), the process returns to T1. If it is determined that the process is to be ended (T37; Yes), the processing unit 410 ends the numerical information display process.

  FIG. 68 is an explanatory diagram of the principle of numerical information update display control in the numerical information display processing described above. Here, the numerical information is calculated as the difference between the out (the number of driving) used as the game value used by the player for the game and the safe (the number of payouts) that is the assigned game value given to the player by the prize ball. A case where data is displayed on the liquid crystal display unit 430 of the data display device 400 will be described as an example. However, from the viewpoint of the player, the difference number calculated as safe-out is displayed as the difference ball number.

  As an example, while the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the above-described high base state, while receiving support (so-called electric support) by an electric tulip-type accessory (electric chew) constituting the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the player Let's consider a case where a player hits a game ball and wins the game ball in the second start winning opening. In this case, the data display device 400 executes the above-described addition update display control and subtraction update display control based on the calculated difference ball number when receiving the time reduction signal from the corresponding gaming machine 1.

  Specifically, the data display device 400 calculates safe and out based on the prize ball signal output from the corresponding gaming machine 1 and the out signal output from the out ball detector 200, respectively. The prize ball signal is output every time the first specified number of balls is paid out in the gaming machine 1, and the out signal is output every time the second specified number of balls is counted by the out ball detector 200. For example, if the first specified number of balls and the second specified number of balls are each “10 balls”, the data display device 400 can calculate the number of difference balls using the safe and the out calculated in units of 10 balls. .

  In the high base state, the player hits the game ball and aims to win the second start winning opening. At this time, a game ball with a specified number of balls (for example, 3 balls) is won by winning a game ball at the second start winning opening, so an increase in out by driving the game ball and an increase in safe by winning the ball Will be repeated. However, due to the presence of game balls that spill out without winning in the second start winning opening, the number of balls is usually gradually reduced.

  In this case, the decrease in the number of difference balls is an update of numerical information that is disadvantageous to the player, and the subtraction display update control is executed. In this subtraction display update control, update display is performed in a direction in which the number of difference balls displayed on the liquid crystal display unit 430 is subtracted. At this time, control is performed so that the progress of updating the difference ball number is not displayed on the liquid crystal display unit 430.

  Consider the case where the number of difference balls gradually decreases from “1000”. Specifically, when the difference ball number is decreased from the state of “1000” to the state of “990”, the subtraction update control changes the display of the difference ball number of “1000” to “990” by horizontal scrolling, for example. Update all at once.

  Specifically, the numerical value “1000” is collectively scrolled to the left to “0990”. In other words, the value of “1” in the thousands place is shifted to the left to hide it, and the value of “000” in the hundreds place to the first place is shifted to the left to make it a thousand place to a hundred place. The value “9” on the display is shifted to the left to make it the first place, and “0009” is obtained. Next, shift the numerical value of “0” in the thousands place to the left to hide it, shift the numerical value of “009” in the hundredth place to the first place to the left, and change it to the thousandth place to the hundredth place, By shifting the non-displayed “9” value to the left and making it the first place, “999” is obtained. Next, shift the numerical value of “0” in the thousands place to the left to hide it, shift the numerical value of “099” in the hundreds place to the first place to the left, and change it to the thousands place to the hundred place, By shifting the non-displayed value of “0” to the left and making it the first place, “0990” is obtained.

  Next, it is assumed that a big hit is won in the high base state, and the corresponding gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state. When the big hit gaming state is controlled, the big winning opening is opened, and a winning ball is performed by winning the gaming ball in the big winning opening. The number of winning balls (for example, 15 balls) for one winning prize opening is larger than the number of winning balls for one winning (for example, three balls) for the second starting winning opening, and the winning prize is obtained over a plurality of rounds. Since the control to open the mouth is performed, the safety against the out is greatly increased, and the number of difference balls is rapidly increased accordingly.

  In this case, the increase in the number of difference balls is an update of numerical information that is beneficial to the player, and the addition display update control is executed. In this addition display update control, the number of difference balls displayed on the liquid crystal display unit 430 is updated and displayed in an increasing direction. At this time, the liquid crystal display unit 430 is controlled to display the progress of the update of the difference ball number.

  For example, let us consider a case where the number of difference balls of the above-mentioned player increases from “990” in the big hit gaming state. For example, if the difference ball number increases from the “990” state to the “1000” state, the display of the difference ball number “0990” is sequentially updated to “1000” by, for example, vertical scrolling.

  Specifically, first, the numerical value “0” in the first place of the displayed numerical value “0900” is scrolled downward to hide it, and the numerical value “1” is downwardly moved like a reel. Scroll to display the first place. Next, the numerical value “1” at the first place of the numerical value “0901” is scrolled downward to be hidden, and the numerical value “2” is scrolled downward like a reel to be displayed at the first place. . Thereafter, the same processing is repeated, and the numerical value “0999” of the numerical value “0999” is scrolled downward to hide it, and the numerical value “1000” is displayed downward like a reel. Scroll to the thousands and the first place.

  In the update display control in the present embodiment, even if the update destination numerical information is numerical information corresponding to the same numerical value, the update update control is performed when the addition update display control is executed and when the subtraction update display control is executed. It is characterized in that the mode (mode of operation in updating) is different. That is, even if the update destination numerical value is the same (for example, 1000), the update mode is different because the scroll mode is different between the case where the addition update display control is executed and the case where the subtraction update display control is executed. It will be.

  In the above example, the game machine 1 and the out ball detector 200 are configured to output a prize ball signal and an out signal in units of one ball, respectively, and the data display device 400 is safe and unit of one ball. The number of difference balls may be calculated by calculating out.

  Further, in the above example, instead of the time-shortage signal, for example, the game device 1 is configured to output a signal during the consecutive game (during the consecutive game), and the data display device 400 The above processing may be executed when a continuous signal is received from the corresponding gaming machine 1. In the above example, the high base state is described as an example, but the same processing can be performed in the case of the low base state.

  In the above, the gaming machine is a slot machine, and the IN (the number of used medals) used by the player in the game and the OUT (the number of medals granted) given to the player are given. The difference number (difference medal number) may be numerical information. Further, the number of balls possessed by the player (in the case of a pachinko gaming machine) and the number of medals (slot machine) may be used as numerical information.

  For example, if the number of balls is displayed as numerical information, the data display device 400 may calculate the number of balls based on the ball payout signal and the ball count signal output from the inter-counter counting unit 500. In this case, the above-described update display control can be executed in an arbitrary number of balls, regardless of whether the number of holding balls increases by counting or decreases by payout. For example, if a game ball is counted in units of one ball by the inter-counter counting unit 500, an addition update display control of the number of balls is performed in units of one ball based on the ball count signal at the time of counting by the inter-unit counting unit 500 do it. Further, if the game balls are paid out in units of 25 balls by the payout of the inter-unit counting unit 500, the subtracting update display control of the number of balls in units of 25 balls is performed based on the ball payout signal when the inter-unit counting unit 500 is paid out. Just do it.

  As a method of making the update mode different between when the addition update display control is executed and when the subtraction update display control is executed, the scroll mode described above is changed (vertical scroll and horizontal scroll). In addition to changing the display of intermediate progress (whether or not display of intermediate progress), it is also possible to apply a method such as changing the update period of numerical information and the time to complete the update.

  In the above example, the numerical information is displayed on the liquid crystal display unit 430 of the data display device 400. However, the numerical information may be displayed on the segment display unit 440. Since the segment display unit 440 is composed of a three-digit seven-segment display, the segment display unit 440 alone can display numerical values up to three digits. Further, as described in the above embodiment, numerical information can be displayed in a display pattern (liquid crystal seg display pattern) linked with the liquid crystal display unit 430 and the segment display unit 440. In this case, A numerical value of 4 digits or more can be displayed by linkage. In addition, when displaying numerical information on the segment display unit 440, the addition update is performed by changing the order in which the 7 segments are turned on, for example, when the addition update display control is executed and when the subtraction update display control is executed. You may make it distinguish display control and subtraction update display control.

  In the numerical information display process described above, the update display control may be executed in real time without using the update display flag and the standby flag. That is, when a new update display condition is established during the execution of the update display control, the update display control corresponding to the newly established update display condition is started without waiting for the completion of the update display control being executed. It may be.

[3-8-2. Record of personal game history information]
When the update of the personal game history information is restricted in the recording of the personal game history information in the above embodiment, the game of the corresponding gaming machine 1 in the period from the restriction of the update of the personal game history information to the release The personal game history information may be corrected based on the information related to the game.

  Specifically, in the personal game history information recording process of FIG. 63, when the information recording start preparation process is started and “2” is set in the recording flag (M9; Yes → M11; No), or When the execution of the information recording end preparation process is started and “5” is set in the recording flag (M23; Yes → M25; No), in the first updating process of FIG. It is determined that “3” is not set in the flag (N3; No).

  At this time, control for displaying the screen in preparation is executed, and information for correcting personal game history information (hereinafter, “correction information”) based on the gaming machine signal output from the corresponding gaming machine 1. The correction information acquisition process for acquiring and storing / updating is started. Then, during the period until “3” is set in the recording flag (hereinafter referred to as “update restriction period”), the execution of the correction information acquisition process is continued, and it is determined that “3” is set in the recording flag. At the time (N3; Yes), the execution of the correction information acquisition process is terminated. And it correct | amends by complementing the personal game log | history information in an update restriction period using the information for correction | amendment obtained by the information acquisition process for correction | amendment. That is, the personal game history information may be corrected using the difference of the personal game history information for the update restriction period.

  Further, the hall computer 600 obtains / aggregates game information related to each gaming machine 1. Therefore, the game information in the corresponding gaming machine 1 in the update restriction period is requested to the hall computer 600, and the game information in the update restriction period provided from the hall computer 600 is used as correction information, and the personal game history information is obtained. You may make it correct | amend.

  In addition, as described above, the data display device 400 is correct when communication with the portable terminal 250 is not properly performed when the operation is accepted, or when the recorded personal game history information is garbled. When there is a possibility that the personal game history information cannot be provided to the player, the correction information may be acquired in the same manner as described above to correct the personal game history information.

  Further, the correction of the personal game history information may be performed by the hall computer 600 instead of the data display device 400.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the hall computer 600 side determines whether or not a condition for changing the personal game history information is established during execution of the preparation process in the data display device 400, and based on the determination result, The personal game history information compiled by the own device may be provided to the data display device 400.

FIG. 69 is an explanatory diagram of processing relating to storage of personal game history information in this case, a request transmitted from the gaming device to the management device, conditions for transmitting the request, and processing on the management device side Is shown in a table.
The request includes requests A to D, request M, and request R.

  In the request A, the condition “information recording start operation is present (record flag 1)” is set, and “individual game history information A (during information recording start operation) is stored” is set as processing on the management apparatus side. That is, when an information recording start operation is performed, the data display device 400 makes a request (request A) for recording the personal game history information at the time of the information recording start operation to the hall computer 600. means.

  In the request B, the condition “information recording start preparation process completion (record flag 2 and information recording start preparation process not in progress)” is set as “personal game history information B (when information recording start preparation process is completed) as processing on the management apparatus side. ) “Remember”. This is because when the information recording start preparation process is completed, the data display device 400 requests the hall computer 600 to record the personal game history information when the information recording start preparation process is completed (request B). Means to do.

  In the request C, a condition “information recording end operation is present (record flag 4)” is set, and “personal game history information C (during information recording end operation) is stored” is set as processing on the management apparatus side. This means that when the information recording end operation is performed, the data display device 400 makes a request (request C) for recording the personal game history information at the time of the information recording end operation to the hall computer 600. means.

  In the request D, the condition “information recording end preparation process complete (record flag 5 and information recording end preparation process not in progress)” is set as “personal game history information D (when information recording end preparation process is completed) ) “Remember”. This is a request (request D) for requesting the data display device 400 to record the personal game history information when the information recording end preparation process is completed, from the data display device 400 when the information recording end preparation process is completed. Means to do.

  The request M includes conditions “(1) personal game history information recording on the data display device side (record flag 3), (2) information recording start preparation process (record flag 2 and information recording start preparation process), ( “3) Information recording end preparation process (record flag 5 and information recording end preparation process in progress)” and “update personal game history information M” are defined as processes on the management apparatus side. This is because the data display device 400 is updated when the personal display history information is updated on the data display device 400 side, when the information recording start preparation processing is executed, or when the information recording end preparation processing is executed. Means a request (request M) to update the personal game history information to the hall computer 600.

  In the request R, the condition “when information recording ends (record flag 6)” is “personal game history information A ≠ B or individual game history information C ≠ D as processing on the management device side, and the personal game history information M is “Output to data display device” is defined. This is to request the hall computer 600 from the data display device 400 to provide the personal game history information aggregated on the hall computer 600 side when completing the information recording process on the data display device 400 side. Means.

  The personal game history information A ≠ B is the case where the personal game history information at the time when the information recording start operation is accepted is different from the personal game history information at the time when the information recording start preparation process is completed. This means that a game is played on the gaming machine 1 during the preparation process. The personal game history information C ≠ D is a case where the personal game history information at the time when the information recording end operation is accepted is different from the personal game history information at the time when the information recording end preparation process is completed. This means that a game is played on the gaming machine 1 during the recording end preparation process. Therefore, if any of the conditions of personal game history information A ≠ B and personal game history information C ≠ D is satisfied, the personal game history information M aggregated on the hall computer 600 side is output to the data display device 400. By doing so, it is possible for the data display device 400 to acquire correct personal game history information.

  The data display device 400 and the hall computer 600 execute processing to which the above table is applied. Specifically, the processing unit 410 of the data display device 400 makes a request associated with the condition to the hall computer 600 when the condition defined in the table is satisfied. Upon receiving a request from the data display device 400, the processing unit 610 of the hall computer 600 executes processing on the management device side associated with the request. When the request R is made, the processing unit 610 determines whether the personal game history information A ≠ B or the personal game history information C ≠ D is satisfied. If it is determined that the condition is satisfied, the personal game history information M is output to the data display device 400. When the processing unit 410 of the data display device 400 acquires the personal game history information M from the hall computer 600, the liquid crystal display unit 430 displays information (such as access information to the server 980) that can identify the personal game history information M. Let

  In the above embodiment, the data display device 400 may cause the liquid crystal display unit 430 to display at least part of the recorded personal game history information. For example, among personal game history information, information that is highly necessary for a player (such as the number of jackpots, appearance balls, and difference balls) is displayed on the liquid crystal display unit 430, but information that is less necessary for the player (other than the above) Information) may not be displayed on the liquid crystal display unit 430. The personal game history information provided to the player may be all personal game history information, or may be only information displayed on the liquid crystal display unit 430. In this case, the information that is not displayed on the liquid crystal display unit 430 is excluded from the personal game history information provided to the player, and the personal game history information including only the information displayed on the liquid crystal display unit 430 is recorded. You may make it perform the process similar to said embodiment.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the two-dimensional code obtained by encoding the access information to the server 980 is displayed on the liquid crystal display unit 430 as information that can specify the personal game history information. However, the personal game history information is specified. The method of outputting possible information is not limited to this. For example, the personal game history information itself (including compressed information) is written in the IC chip of the mobile terminal 250 from the IC writer of the data display device 400 using non-contact communication, so Personal game history information may be provided.

[4. Fourth Embodiment]
[4-1. System configuration]
FIG. 70 is a diagram showing an example of a system configuration of a third gaming system 1000C in the present embodiment. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the component same as the game system of embodiment mentioned above, and description for the second time is abbreviate | omitted.

  The third gaming system 1000C is a kind of a plurality of gaming machines 1 installed on the gaming island and gaming devices, information display devices, recording medium processing devices, and lending devices provided corresponding to each gaming machine 1. A card unit 300; a data display device 400 which is a kind of gaming device and information display device provided corresponding to each gaming machine 1; a hall computer 600; a ball management computer 800; Configured.

  The card unit 300 is installed in a one-to-one correspondence with the gaming machine 1 at a side position on a predetermined side of the gaming machine 1 and is a visitor card issued to a visitor player who is not registered as a member in the store. And a gaming card that is a recording medium including a membership card issued to a member player who has registered as a member in the store, and the possessed gaming value specified from the accepted gaming card is A process for making the game machine 1 usable is executed.

  Specifically, the card unit 300 consumes the remaining amount, which is the valuable value specified from the gaming card, and lends a game ball, which is a gaming medium used for gaming on the gaming machine 1, or for gaming Based on the number of possessed balls and the number of possessed balls, which are the number of possessed game media specified from the card, a process of paying out game balls, which are game media used for games on the gaming machine 1, and a game ball acquired by the player Various processes such as a counting process are executed.

  In the present embodiment, the card unit 300 is related to the calculation and display of the payout rate index value based on the unit setting data 693 that is the setting data output from the hall computer 600, as in the gaming system described above. Make various settings. The card unit 300 then calculates the payout rate and determines whether or not it is appropriate using the same method as the data display device 1200, and displays specific information based on these results on the liquid crystal display 313. Further, the card unit 300 counts the number of acquired balls, which is the number of game balls acquired by the player, as information related to the game value possessed by the player who plays with the corresponding gaming machine 1, and displays it on the liquid crystal display 313. indicate. Note that various settings in the card unit 300, the calculation and display of the payout rate, and the like can be realized by substantially the same method as in the second embodiment, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

[4-2. Signal and information flow]
FIG. 71 is a diagram illustrating an example of the flow of signals and information between the devices of the third gaming system 1000C. In this figure, the terminal 900 is not shown for the sake of simplicity.

  From the gaming machine 1, a gaming machine signal is output to the card unit 300, the data display device 400, and the hall computer 600.

  Further, an out signal is output from the out ball detector 200 attached to the gaming machine 1 to the card unit 300, the data display device 400, and the hall computer 600.

  From the card unit 300, unit signals including a card insertion signal, a card ejection signal, a deposit signal, a consumption signal, a ball dispensing signal, a ball counting signal and a unit error signal are sent to the data display device 400, the hall computer 600 and the ball management computer 800. Is output.

  Further, the card unit 300 outputs an authentication request signal for requesting authentication of the gaming card inserted in the own device to the ball management computer 800. The authentication request signal includes a unit ID that is an ID of the own device and a card ID (member card: member card ID, visitor card: visitor card ID) recorded on the game card.

  Also, the card unit 300 outputs captured image data that is data of a captured image captured by the imaging unit 390 to the ball management computer 800. The ball management computer 800 and the hall computer 600 are communicatively connected, and the ball management computer 800 is configured to be able to share and manage the captured image data acquired from the card unit 300 with the hall computer 600. .

  From the hall computer 600, display device setting data 691 is output to the data display device 400 as in the above embodiment. In addition, the hall computer 600 outputs a management device signal including a big hit running effect signal and a periodic notification signal to the data display device 400 as in the above embodiment.

  In addition to the above, from the hall computer 600, a mode instruction signal for instructing a mode in an irradiation effect executed by the data display device 400 is included in the management device and output to the data display device 400. The data display device 400 executes the irradiation effect in a mode corresponding to the mode instruction signal output from the hall computer 600.

  From the hall computer 600, unit setting data 693, which is setting data for the card unit 300 to perform various settings, is output to the card unit 300.

  The ball management computer 800 executes an authentication process according to an authentication request signal output from the card unit 300 and transmits an authentication signal to the card unit 300. The authentication signal includes an authentication result (OK / NG). If the authentication result is OK, card information associated with the card ID included in the authentication request signal is output to the card unit 300.

[4-3. Card unit configuration]
FIG. 72 is a diagram illustrating an example of an external configuration of the card unit 300.
On the front surface of the card unit 300, a multi-function lamp 301 that is configured by a full-color LED and lights up in a plurality of colors so that the state of the card unit 300 can be notified, and a bill insertion slot 302 for inserting bills. And a payout button 311 for accepting a counting payout operation for paying out the counted number of balls, a card insertion slot 309 for inserting a membership card or a visitor card, and a front side of the device so as to protrude from the device front side. A formed display unit 355 and an imaging unit 390 having a camera are provided.

  The display unit 355 includes a liquid crystal display 313 in which a touch panel 314 is integrally formed, and each display item displayed on the liquid crystal display 313 can be input by touching the touch panel 314 with a finger. In addition, the display unit 355 is provided with an IR light receiving unit 315 that receives an infrared signal from a setting remote controller owned by a store clerk, converts it into an electrical signal, and outputs the electrical signal.

  A card insertion slot 309 provided on the front surface of the card unit 300 is connected to a card slot 392 of a card reader / writer 327 built in a position corresponding to the card insertion slot 309. A gaming card (visitor card, member card) can be inserted into the card slot 392.

  The gaming card has an IC having a non-volatile memory for storing various data and a control unit for rewriting and reading out the recorded information and performing non-contact communication with an external reader / writer device An IC card on which a chip is mounted is used, and in these gaming cards, a membership card ID / visitor card ID capable of identifying each card is stored in advance so as not to be rewritten. The type is identified from the card ID, and prepaid balance data that can specify the prepaid balance is stored.

  The member card is issued to a member player who has registered as a member in the store, and a member ID assigned to the member is stored in an irreplaceable manner. In addition, as will be described later, the member player using the membership card can use the game balls once acquired and counted for the game after the next day, or to store the balls that can be used for prize exchange. However, the number of stored balls, which is the number of game balls in which the stored balls have been stored, is not directly recorded on the membership card, and the number of stored balls is stored in the ball management computer 8 as will be described later. Are stored in association with the member card ID, so that the member card ID is specified.

  Further, the membership card does not directly record the number of balls based on the number of locally counted balls counted by the counting payout unit 380, and the number of balls is also associated with the membership card ID as will be described later. By being stored, it is specified from the member card ID and the member ID, and the number of possessed balls can be used for a game in each card unit 300 in the store only on that day, and is not shown. The gift exchange POS terminal can be used for gift exchange.

  Further, in this embodiment, the visitor card does not directly record the number of balls based on the number of locally counted balls counted by the counting payout unit 380. As will be described later, the visitor card ID is used in the ball management computer 8. Are stored and managed in association with each other, so that they can be specified from the visitor card ID and can be used for prize exchange at a prize exchange POS terminal (not shown).

  In the present embodiment, the player is described as performing various operations on the card unit 300 by operating the touch panel 314. For example, the display unit 355 displays menu buttons and table data for menu selection. Operation of a replay button or the like for executing a replay game using the membership card ID recorded on the membership card and the number of stored balls specified by the membership ID when the membership data button or membership card is received A button may be provided.

  Further, inside the display unit 355, switches corresponding to a liquid crystal display 313 and operation buttons to be described later are provided, and these are connected to a display control board 329 provided at a position in the apparatus corresponding to the display unit 355. Thus, display control of the liquid crystal display 313, input position detection by the touch panel 314, and the like are performed by the display control board 329.

  At the upper position in the card unit 300, a bill inserted into the bill insertion slot 302 is taken in, and the bill inserted into the bill insertion slot 302 is taken to identify its authenticity and bill type. A banknote identification unit 302a that is output to a control unit 305, which will be described later, is provided in the section. In the banknote identification unit 302a, various banknotes (10,000, 5,000, 2,000, and 1,000 yen banknotes) are provided. ) Can be accepted.

  Further, a control unit 305 for controlling the operation of the card unit 300 is provided at a substantially central position of the card unit 300 so as to be easily connected to each part constituting the card unit 300. As will be described later, Various operations of the card unit 300 are controlled by the control unit 305.

  In addition, the card unit 300 and the gaming machine 1 are configured to be able to send and receive a lending-related signal associated with lending a plurality of game balls and a paying-related signal associated with paying out game balls, which are predetermined as a payout unit. For example, the lending-related signals include a lending request signal for lending gaming balls from the card unit 300 to the gaming machine 1, a terminal terminal lending completion signal, a table READY signal, and a unit READY signal output from the gaming machine 1. The terminal terminal lending request completion confirmation signal is included.

  A card fraud signal is output from the card unit 300. The card unit 300 has, for example, an unauthorized radio wave detection function, a vibration detection function, a forgery card or counterfeit bill discrimination function as functions for detecting a player's fraud, and when these functions detect fraud radio waves and vibrations. Alternatively, when it is determined that a counterfeit card or counterfeit bill has been used, the unit fraud signal is output to the outside via the external output board.

  Further, a unit abnormality signal is output from the card unit 300. The card unit 300 has, as functions for detecting an abnormality, a game card insertion / discharge failure detection function and a count payout failure detection function by the count payout unit 380. With these functions, the card insertion / discharge failure is prevented. When detected, or when a count payout failure by the count payout unit 380 is detected, a unit abnormality signal is output to the outside via the external output board.

  The prepaid balance is an integer part of the quotient calculated by the formula “card balance / unit amount”, and the card balance is a balance in yen recorded on the game card. For example, the unit amount can be 100 yen, and if the remaining card amount is 10,000 yen, the prepaid balance is 100.

  The remaining amount may be recorded directly on the game card, or may be managed by a management device such as the ball management computer 800 without being recorded on the game card. When the remaining amount is recorded on the gaming card, the card unit 300 may identify the remaining amount owned by the player by reading the remaining amount from the received gaming card. When the remaining amount is not recorded on the gaming card, the card unit 300 outputs the received card ID of the gaming card to the management device, and acquires the remaining amount data associated with the card ID from the management device. Thus, the remaining amount owned by the player may be specified.

  The card unit 300 stores the remaining amount specified as described above in the storage unit 320 as prepaid remaining amount data or card remaining amount data. Further, the card unit 300 updates the remaining amount data by consuming the remaining amount for the game and adding the remaining amount due to the deposit while the game card is being received. In the operation of recording the remaining amount on the gaming card, the card unit 300 causes the remaining amount to be recorded on the gaming card when the gaming card is returned. Further, in the operation of managing the remaining amount by the management device, the remaining amount data is output to the management device when the game card is returned or after it is returned.

  In the present embodiment, the term “remaining amount” will be described as meaning the remaining amount associated with the game card. That is, it means the remaining amount that is directly recorded on the gaming card by depositing, or the remaining amount that is managed by the higher management device in association with the card ID or member ID of the gaming card by depositing.

  Further, in the present specification, balls acquired by a player in a game with a pachinko machine and deposited in the hall are referred to as “storing balls”. In addition, the number of stored balls deposited in the hall is referred to as “the number of stored balls”. The number of stored balls is managed by a management device. In principle, the number of stored balls cannot be recorded on the membership card, and the number of stored balls managed by the management device is transmitted to the recording medium processing device in response to the recording medium processing device accepting the membership card. . Further, the balls acquired by the player on the current business day are referred to as “current day storage balls”, and the balls acquired and saved by the member players before the current business day are referred to as “past storage balls”. Although not in principle, the number of stored balls may be recorded on the member card.

  The number of stored balls acquired by the player on the day is determined as the number of stored balls by the player on that day according to the establishment of a predetermined condition, and managed as the past number of stored balls on the next business day or later. The predetermined condition can be determined, for example, as a tightening process being performed after the store operation ends on the day. The closing process is based on the fact that the time has reached a predetermined closing time (for example, midnight, midnight, midnight), that the store manager has performed an operation to execute the closing process, or that the store is closed. The process is executed in response to the establishment of a condition such as the power supply of the management apparatus being once cut off and the power supply of the management apparatus being turned on for the next business day. By executing this tightening process, the number of balls stored on that day is added to the number of balls stored in the past and reset, and managed as past balls stored on the next business day.

  Further, in the present specification, the number of game balls owned by a player as a result of the player playing a game with a pachinko machine is referred to as “mochitama”. In addition, the number of balls recorded on the visitor card is referred to as “the number of holding balls” in order to distinguish it from the same day storage balls associated with the membership card.

  Further, in this specification, pachinko balls that can be launched by the gaming machine 1 and pachinko balls generated in exchange for withdrawing the remaining amount, holding balls, and storage balls are referred to as “game balls”.

  The imaging unit 390 is capable of imaging a player's face in a state where a player who plays with the corresponding gaming machine 1 is seated on a gaming chair installed on the front side of the gaming machine 1, specifically, The card unit 300 is provided at the center of the front plate. The imaging unit 390 is configured to be able to image a player under the control of the processing unit 310.

FIG. 73 is a block diagram illustrating an example of a functional configuration of the card unit 300. As illustrated in FIG.
The card unit 300 is a control unit that provides various functions of the card unit 300 by controlling each part of the bill recognition unit 302a, the card reader / writer 327, the display control board 329, and the card unit 300 by a control program. The bill recognition unit 302a, the card reader / writer 327, and the display control board 329 are connected to the control unit 305 so that various data can be transmitted and received.

  The card reader / writer 327 reads and writes recorded information such as (member) card ID, member ID (member card only), prepaid balance data, and the like recorded in the member card and visitor card inserted from the card insertion slot 309. I do.

  The control unit 305 includes a processing unit 310, a storage unit 320, and a clock unit 335.

  The processing unit 310 is a control device and an arithmetic device configured to include a processor such as a CPU and a DSP that collectively control the card unit 300 and an integrated circuit such as an ASIC.

  The storage unit 320 is a storage device that includes a memory such as a ROM, a flash ROM, an EEPROM, or a RAM. In the present embodiment, the storage unit 320 reads out the card unit processing program 321 read out by the processing unit 310 and executed as card unit processing, the local counting ball number data 323 that is data of the local counting ball number, and the payout Rate summary data 325, received card data 327 that is received game card data, captured image data 329 that is captured image data captured by the imaging unit 390, and unit setting output from the hall computer 600 Data 693 is stored.

  The payout rate total data 325 is data that stores the total value related to the payout rate in the corresponding gaming machine 1, and is the same data as the payout rate total data 1295 described in the second embodiment.

  The card unit processing program 321 includes a payout rate index value calculation program 321a executed as a payout rate index value calculation process and a display processing program 321b executed as a display process as subroutines.

  The control unit 305 is connected to a prize ball control board (not shown) provided in the corresponding gaming machine 1 so as to be able to exchange various signals associated with gaming ball lending, as described above. In addition, a gaming machine signal can be input by being connected to the information output board of the gaming machine 1 via a signal cable.

  The control unit 305 is connected to an out ball detector 200 provided at a lower position of the corresponding gaming machine 1 so that an out signal from the out ball detector 200 can be input. In response to the input of the out signal from 200, the payout rate total data 325 is updated.

  Further, the control unit 305 can grasp the presence / absence of an operation on the touch panel 314. When an operation on the touch panel 314 is detected, the control unit 305 executes processing corresponding to the operation.

  Further, as described above, the control unit 305 includes a remaining amount indicator provided in the operation unit of the corresponding gaming machine 1, a lending button switch for detecting the operation of the lending button, a member card or a visitor card being accepted. A return button switch that detects the operation of the return button that is operated when returning is connected, and the operation of the lending button and the operation of the return button can be detected, and display control of these remaining amount indicators is performed.

  The control unit 305 receives various information input from the display control board 329 according to the output from the IR light receiving unit 315 according to transmission from the remote controller, the operation of various buttons provided on the display unit 355, or the operation of the touch panel. The full color provided in the multifunction lamp connected to the control unit 305 in response to the currency identification information by the banknote identification unit 302a, the card insertion information from the card reader / writer 327, the visitor card storage state information, etc. Overall operation control is performed such as lighting control of each LED such as the LED 301a, control of the card reader / writer 327 and the display control board 329, display control of the balance indicator, and the like.

  In addition, the control unit 305 performs a card acceptance process for determining whether or not a member card or a visitor card inserted into the card insertion slot 309 can be used, and a ball rental using the remaining amount specified from the game card being accepted. Lending processing to be performed, payment to the remaining amount remaining on the game card being accepted according to the receipt of money, or issue / payment processing to write and issue the prepaid balance to a new gaming card, return operation with the return button Of the number of game media owned (the number of balls obtained by adding the number of stored balls and the number of possessed balls to the number of local counting balls) by the return processing of returning the member card or visitor card being accepted by the receipt, the operation of the payout button 311 A process such as a payout process for paying out game balls of a predetermined unit number of balls is executed.

  The control unit 305 is connected to an external device such as a hall computer 600 and a ball management computer 800 connected to a local area network (LAN) via a HUB so as to be able to perform data communication. Various data can be sent and received.

  The display control board 329 connected to the control unit 305 includes a liquid crystal display 313 and a touch panel 314 that constitute the display unit 355, switches corresponding to various operation buttons 316, an IR light receiving unit 315, and the replay display unit described above. An electronic component such as an LED 320a provided on the touch panel 314 is connected to the display control board 329. Information on the operation information of the touch panel 314, operation information of various switches, and information based on an output signal output from the IR light receiving unit 315 is displayed on the display control board 329. To the control unit 305.

  In the display control board 329 of the present embodiment, a display driving circuit (not shown) that performs display driving of the liquid crystal display 313 and a position that is pressed based on an output signal from the touch panel 314 are specified and specified. An input position detection circuit (not shown) that outputs input position information, a VDP (not shown) that performs processing related to a display image displayed on the display unit 355, and a VROM (not shown) that stores image data used for menu display and the like. Abbreviation), VRAM (not shown) for temporarily storing display data to be displayed on the display unit 355, and independent of the control unit 305, judgments and processes associated with inputs from various switches and touch panels are based on the processing program. A display control microcomputer to be implemented is mounted, and various displays are performed based on display data (page data) output from the control unit 305. Surfaces, and it is capable of displaying on the liquid crystal display device 313 constituting the display unit 355.

  The card unit 300 is configured to be able to accept a gaming card, and the card unit 300 that has received the gaming card executes the above-described ball lending process according to the prepaid balance specified from the gaming card. Further, the above-described payout process is executed according to the number of stored balls and the number of possessed balls specified from the game card.

  On the front surface of the card unit 300, a bill insertion slot for inserting a bill and a card insertion slot 309 for inserting a membership card or a visitor card are provided. The member card or visitor card inserted into the card insertion slot 309 is received by the card reader / writer, and the information recorded on the card is read. The banknote inserted into the banknote insertion slot is taken in by a currency discriminator (not shown), and its authenticity and banknote type are identified.

  When the player finishes the game and receives a return of the card from the card unit 300, the possessed ball stored in the card unit 300 is temporarily stored in the ball management computer 8 as a stored ball, and the player receives the card. When a card is inserted into the same or another card unit 300 again on the same day as when the return is received, only the possession balls for the day once stored as a stored ball are stored again in the card unit 300, and the A game ball may be added within a range so that the game can be played.

  In addition, a sound output control board 319 is connected to the control unit 305. The sound output control board 319 is connected to the sound output unit 350 and controls the sound output unit 350 to output various sounds according to the control of the control unit 305.

  Also, at the lowest position of the card unit 300, game balls are counted and taken in, and the counted game balls are the maximum fraction, that is, the maximum value of the fraction less than the unit less than the payout unit number in the corresponding gaming machine 1. A counting payout unit 380 is provided for storing and counting game balls with a fractional part. Hereinafter, “fraction less than unit” is referred to as “fraction”.

  The game ball is not stored and paid out by the counting and payout unit 380 of the card unit 300, but a conventionally known game ball storage and circulation device is configured on the game island, and the game ball is stored from the game ball storage and circulation device. You may make it pay out.

  The counting payout unit 380 is connected to a connection box 340 that is a horizontally long box-like shape and is disposed between the lower plate 24 of the gaming machine 1 and the repair plate of the game island.

  The connection box 340 is formed on the terminal side of the connection box 340 and has a relatively large height box (not shown) in the height direction, and a relatively small thickness in the height direction. It is comprised from the path | route box (not shown) formed so that a connection part may be connected.

  The connection box 340 is connected to the counting / dispensing unit 380 so that the terminal box is positioned below the lower plate 24. A game ball discharged from the lower plate 24 is placed on the upper surface of the terminal box. A feeding portion 345 having a hopper shape is formed. Also, at the lower front position of the terminal box, there is an open / close shutter that can be opened and closed by the player and is normally energized so as to be closed, and the fraction paid back (returned) from the counting payout unit 380 A return port 342 through which the game balls are discharged is provided.

  Further, two channels are provided at an upper position in the path box so as to incline toward the counting payout unit 380, and guide the game balls thrown into the throwing portion 345 to the counting payout unit 380 under natural flow. A counting passage 343 is provided. Further, a return passage 344 is provided below the counting passage 343 so as to be inclined toward the return opening 342 and guides the game balls paid out from the counting payout unit 380 to the return opening 342 in a natural flow. .

  A counting lever 341 is provided at the upper front position of the terminal box 340a. The counting lever 341 is slidable by the player. By sliding the counting lever 341 against the biasing force, the insertion portion 345 is provided. The opening / closing shutter 346 provided at the entrance to the counting passage 343 is opened.

  The counting payout unit 380 to which the connection box 340 is connected has an inflow passage connected to the counting passage 343 and inclined from the front side of the card unit 300 toward the inner side of the card unit 300. A counting sensor (not shown) that detects and counts the game balls flowing down the inflow path is provided for each flow path at the end position of the inflow path. The game ball that has flowed into the payout unit 380 is detected and counted by the counting sensor. When counted by the counting sensor, a detection signal of a predetermined pulse is output from the counting payout unit 380 to the control unit 305 in response to detection of one game ball. Each time the detection signal is input, the control unit 305 adds 1 to the stored number of possessed balls.

  The card unit 300 stores the number of balls counted by the counting / dispensing unit 380 in the storage unit 320 as local counting ball number data 323. The card unit 300 transmits the unit ID, the card ID, and the local counting ball number data 323 to the ball management computer 8 when the game card is returned. If the game card being accepted is a visitor card, the local counting ball number stored in the local counting ball number data 323 is recorded on the visitor card as the number of balls.

  Based on the unit ID, card ID, and local counting ball number data 323 transmitted from the card unit 300, the ball management computer 800 adds the local counting ball number to the current day's stored ball number / the number of balls and updates it.

  Specifically, when the card ID type is a member card ID, the ball management computer 800 uses the number of locally counted balls as the number of balls stored on the day of the storage management data of the member card management data corresponding to the member card ID. The local count ball number specified from the data 323 is added and updated.

  Also, in the case where the card ID type is a visitor card ID, the ball management computer 800 includes the local counting ball data 323 in the number of balls in the ball management data of the visitor card management data corresponding to the visitor card ID. Update by adding the number of local counting balls specified from.

[4-4. processing]
FIG. 74 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the flow of card unit processing executed by the processing unit 310 of the card unit 300 according to the card unit processing program 321 stored in the storage unit 320.

  First, the processing unit 310 determines whether it is the setting timing of the own device (R1). The setting timing can be, for example, the timing when the power of the own device is turned on. The setting timing in this case may be determined by confirming whether or not the set flag indicating that the display contents and operation contents of the own apparatus are set is set to “ON”. The set flag may be set to “ON” after the setting process is executed, and may be cleared to “OFF” when the power of the card unit 300 is turned off at the end of the store operation.

  When it is determined that it is the setting timing (when it is determined that the set flag is “OFF”) (R1; Yes), the processing unit 310 requests the hall computer 600 for unit setting data 693, and from the hall computer 600, Unit setting data 693 is acquired (R3).

  Next, the processing unit 310 executes a setting process (R5). Note that the setting method in this setting process is substantially the same as the setting method in the data display device 1200 described in the second embodiment, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  Next, the processing unit 310 starts executing the local count ball number data update process (R7). Specifically, based on the counting result of the counting payout unit 380, the process of updating the local counting ball number data 327 in the storage unit 320 is started by adding the number of balls counted to the local counting ball number.

  Further, the processing unit 31 starts executing the payout rate aggregation data update process (R9). Specifically, a process of calculating an index value necessary for calculating the actual payout rate based on the gaming machine signal transmitted from the corresponding gaming machine 1 and updating the payout rate total data 325 in the storage unit 320 is performed. Start.

  Next, the processing unit 310 executes a game enabling process (R10). Specifically, based on the player's operation on the player's own device, processing for enabling the player to play a game on the corresponding gaming machine 1 such as ball lending processing and ball payout processing is executed.

  Thereafter, the processing unit 310 executes a payout rate index value calculation process according to the payout rate index value calculation program 321a stored in the storage unit 320 (R11). Note that the payout rate index value calculation process can be realized by the same process as the process described in the second embodiment, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, the processing unit 310 executes a payout rate suitability determination process (R13). Note that this payout rate suitability determination process can also be realized by the same process as the process described in the second embodiment, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, the processing unit 310 determines whether or not the result of determining whether or not the payout rate is appropriate (R15). If the processing unit 310 determines that the payout rate is not appropriate (R15; No), the processing unit 310 sets the gaming machine ID of the corresponding gaming machine 1. The data is output to the hall computer 600 (R17). By doing in this way, the manager of the store can grasp the gaming machine 1 in which the payout rate may be inappropriate, and opens the glass door frame 3a of the gaming machine 1 to the store clerk. An instruction can be given to confirm the display monitor 26.

  After R17 or when the payout rate suitability determination result is appropriate (R15; Yes), the processing unit 310 executes display processing according to the display processing program 321b stored in the storage unit 320 (R19). ). Note that this display process can also be realized by the same process as the process described in the second embodiment, and a description thereof will not be repeated.

  Next, the processing unit 310 causes the imaging unit 390 to perform imaging, and executes imaging processing for storing the captured image data in the storage unit 320 as captured image data 329 (R21). Then, the processing unit 310 performs control to transmit the captured image data 329 to the ball management computer 800 (R23).

  Next, the processing unit 310 determines whether or not to end the process (R25). If it is determined to continue the process (R25; No), the process returns to R1. If it is determined that the process is to be terminated (R25; Yes), the card unit process is terminated.

[4-5. Display screen]
FIG. 75 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed on the liquid crystal display 313 constituting the display unit 355 of the card unit 300.

  FIG. 75 (1) is an example of a card forgetting notification screen for alerting the player to forgetting to take a gaming card, and a message “Please be careful about forgetting to remove a card” in the center of the screen. Is displayed.

  Also, a payout rate suitability information display 313A is displayed at the lower right portion of the screen. This payout rate suitability information display 313A is the same as the payout rate suitability information display 1230A displayed on the display unit 1230 of the data display device 1200 of FIG. 39 (1), and displays the suitability of the payout rate by the color change mode. It is.

  In addition, the number of acquired game balls, which is the number of game balls acquired by the player in the game on the corresponding gaming machine 1, is displayed below the forgetting card removal screen. With this display, the player can know the number of balls he has acquired through the game.

FIG. 75 (2) is a diagram showing another example of a card forgetting notification screen.
In this card forgetting notification screen, a payout rate suitability information display 313B is displayed in the lower right part of the screen. This payout rate suitability information display 313B is the same as the payout rate suitability information display 1230B displayed on the display unit 1230 of the data display device 1200 of FIG. 39 (2), and displays the suitability of the payout rate in the meter mode. is there.

FIG. 75 (3) is a diagram showing another example of a card forgetting notification screen.
In this card forgetting notification screen, a payout rate suitability information display 313C is displayed in the lower right part of the screen. This payout rate suitability information display 313B is the same as the payout rate suitability information display 1230C displayed on the display unit 1230 of the data display device 1200 of FIG. 39 (3), and displays the suitability of the payout rate by the error mode. is there.

  Here, the case where the payout rate suitability information is displayed on the liquid crystal display 313 in the same display manner as the payout rate suitability information displays 1230A to 1230C described in FIG. 39 is exemplified, but the payout rate suitability described in FIG. Of course, the payout rate suitability information may be displayed on the liquid crystal display 313 in the same display manner as the information displays 1230D to 1230F.

[4-6. Data display device processing]
The processing executed by the data display device 400 in the third gaming system 1000C is the same as the processing of the data display device 400 in the second gaming system 1000B. In particular, as described above, the data display device 400 is configured to be able to execute an operation effect and an irradiation effect.

  In the crime prevention mode, as described above, the orientation of the first spot LED 480a and the second spot LED 480b is changed to an orientation in which the face of the player who is playing a game on the gaming machine can be easily grasped. In the present embodiment, the captured image data 329 that is data of a captured image captured by the imaging unit 390 of the card unit 300 is configured to be transmitted to the ball management computer 800.

  Thereby, in the crime prevention mode, even if the player's face is unclear due to the low illuminance of the light emitting unit 480, the player's face can be clearly displayed by the imaging unit 390. It becomes easy for the store side to identify a player who has played the role of lighting and has performed illegal acts such as goto acts and theft. Further, in the crime prevention mode, since the player's face is illuminated, it is assumed that the player has a different sense of discomfort than usual, and an effect of suppressing illegal acts can be expected.

[4-7. Effect]
In the third gaming system 1000C, a card unit 300 and a data display device 400 are provided corresponding to the gaming machine 1 (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a big hit gaming state that is advantageous for the player.

The card unit 300 includes a liquid crystal display 313 as display means. The liquid crystal display 313 is used when the player is in a non-big hit (in a non-favored state) with respect to the out number (used game value) which is a game value used by the player during the non-big hit (in a non-favorable state) in the gaming machine 1. Payout rate reference information (reference relative information) that is information related to a payout rate (relative value) reference that is a ratio of the number of payouts (acquired game value) that is the acquired game value, and the payout rate of the corresponding gaming machine 1 Payout rate measured value (actually measured relative value), which is an actual value, payout rate suitability information (specific information) based on this, and an acquired game ball that is the number of game balls acquired by the player playing on the corresponding gaming machine 1 Numbers can be displayed.
According to this, it becomes possible to confirm the payout rate suitability information based on the payout rate reference information and the payout rate actual measurement value regarding the payout rate reference during the non-big hit of the corresponding gaming machine 1 by display. As a result, it is possible to determine whether or not the gaming machine 1 has a payout rate as designed.

Further, the data display device 400 includes a processing unit 410 capable of executing an irradiation effect of irradiating light toward the front area of the gaming machine 1 and the light emission when the corresponding gaming machine 1 starts controlling the big hit gaming state. Part 480.
According to this, it becomes possible to give a player a sufficient special feeling by the irradiation effect.

  Note that, similarly to the data display device 400, it is also possible to cause the card unit 300 to execute an irradiation effect. In this case, the store side may be able to set which gaming device of the card unit 300 and the data display device 400 is to execute the irradiation effect via the hall computer 600, the setting remote controller 700, and the like.

[5. Other Embodiments]
Embodiments to which the present invention can be applied are not limited to the above-described embodiments, and can be appropriately changed without departing from the spirit of the present invention. Hereinafter, other embodiments will be described. In addition, about the same structure as said each embodiment, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and description for the second time is abbreviate | omitted.

[5-1. Game machine]
In the above embodiment, the gaming machine according to the present invention has been described as the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the gaming machine is not limited to this.

  For example, a pachinko gaming machine called a right-handed machine may be applied as the gaming machine according to the present invention. In the right-handed machine, in the normal state, left-handed, aiming mainly at the first start winning hole (heso), and when controlled to the big hit game state by winning big hit, the right winner (attacker) by right hit In the high probability / high base state or the low probability / high base state controlled thereafter, the main goal is to win the second start winning opening (electric Chu).

  In this case, the calculation target of the payout rate in the low base state is the number of payouts paid out by the winning ball in the first start winning opening and the general winning opening provided in the left-handed area, and the high base state The payout rate calculation target in the above may be the number of payouts paid out by a winning ball by winning in the second start winning opening and the general winning opening provided in the right-handed area. If the gaming machine does not have a general winning opening, the payout rate calculation target in the low base state may be only the first start winning opening, and the payout rate calculation target in the high base state may be only the second start winning opening. .

  A slot machine that can be played using game medals may be used as a gaming machine according to the present invention. In this case, advantageous states advantageous to the player include various challenge time (assist time (AT), assist replay time (ART), etc.) states and bonuses (regular bonus (RB), big bonus (BB), etc.) As a state, the same processing as in the above embodiment may be performed.

  In addition, the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to a conventional pachinko gaming machine or slot machine, but a game is played by an encapsulated pachinko gaming machine in which a game ball is enclosed and circulated, or a game point (holding point). A game point type slot machine may be used.

  FIG. 76 shows an example of a gaming machine signal output from an external output board when the gaming machine according to the present invention is a slot machine. Here, a slot machine 1 ′ having an ART lamp (light emitting means) that can be controlled to a bonus state and an assist replay time (ART) state and that can be notified by light emission that it is determined to be controlled to the ART state. An example will be described.

From the external output board of the slot machine, for example, a BB signal, an RB signal, a start signal, an IN signal, an OUT signal, a lamp emission signal, and a security signal are output as a gaming machine signal Has been.
The BB signal is a signal that is output when the slot machine is controlled to the big bonus (BB) state.
The RB signal is a signal that is output when the slot machine is controlled to a regular bonus (RB) state.
The start signal is a signal that is output when one game is finished in the slot machine.
The IN signal is a signal for enabling the external device to specify the number of medals inserted into the slot machine, and is output every time a first specified number (for example, three) of medals are inserted. In other words, a medal insertion signal.
The OUT signal is a signal for enabling the external device to specify the number of medals to be paid out from the slot machine, and is output every time a second specified number (for example, 10) of medals is paid out. In other words, a medal payout signal.
The lamp emission signal is a signal that is output when the ART lamp emits light.

  In the data display device 400 provided corresponding to such a slot machine 1 ′, an operation effect and an irradiation effect are executed based on the gaming machine signal output from the slot machine 1 ′, as in the above embodiment. To be able to. For example, in the above embodiment, the jackpot operation effect that notifies that the jackpot is won based on the jackpot signal output from the corresponding gaming machine 1 is executed. In this example, the jackpot action effect is output from the corresponding slot machine 1 ′. Based on the BB signal and the RB signal, a bonus operation effect for notifying that a bonus has been won can be executed.

  Further, when the lamp emission signal is received from the corresponding slot machine 1 ′, the data display device 400 can specify that the ART has been confirmed in the corresponding slot machine 1 ′. Therefore, an ART operation effect for notifying that the ART has been determined may be executed based on the lamp light emission signal output from the corresponding slot machine 1 ′.

  In this example, the lamp light emission signal is externally output from the slot machine 1 ′. However, the lamp light emission signal may not be externally output from the slot machine 1 ′. In this case, for example, a light detection unit (light sensor) that detects light emission of the ART lamp of the corresponding slot machine 1 ′ is provided in the data display device 400, and light emission of the ART lamp is detected by the light detection unit. In addition, it is possible to specify that the ART has been confirmed in the corresponding slot machine 1 ′ and execute the above ART operation effect.

[5-2. Game equipment]
In the above embodiment, the gaming apparatus (information display apparatus) according to the present invention includes a data display device 400 including a liquid crystal display unit 430 formed on the base unit 401 and a segment display unit 440 formed on the door unit 403. However, the gaming device is not limited to this.

  Specifically, in the above embodiment, in the data display device 400, the segment display unit 440 is configured to be rotatable, and an operation effect by rotating the segment display unit 440 is described as being executable. However, the display unit does not necessarily have to be configured to be rotatable, and may be configured to be a movable display unit that does not rotate. For example, a data display device including a liquid crystal display unit formed on the front surface of the housing and a seg display unit configured to be slidable in the vertical and horizontal directions on the front side of the liquid crystal display unit is configured. The display device may be a gaming device according to the present invention.

  Further, although the position does not change (but does not change), a data display device including a display unit configured to be rotatable at the same position is configured, and in such a data display device, an operation effect by rotating the display unit May be executable.

  Moreover, you may comprise the game apparatus by which some exteriors other than a display part were comprised so that a movement or rotation was possible. For example, a gaming device including a hat-shaped movable accessory may be configured, and an operation effect may be executed by operating the movable accessory. In addition to this, a gaming apparatus including a three-dimensional movable accessory that can operate as a gimmick (device) may be configured, and an operation effect may be executed by operating the movable accessory.

  Furthermore, you may comprise the movable accessory which can operate | move as said gimmick so that attachment or detachment to a game device is possible. In this case, for example, a unique movable accessory is designed for each model of the gaming machine, and the movable accessory corresponding to the model of the gaming machine in the store is mounted on the corresponding gaming device to be operated. May be. In addition, the same type of movable accessory may be mounted on the game device and operated on the same game island. By doing so, it is possible to realize an operational performance with a sense of unity, and to improve the appearance of the entire island.

  Further, in the data display device 400 of the above-described embodiment, a data display device in which the left and right door portions 403 are fixed in a state of being opened 90 degrees and the door portion 403 is configured to be non-movable may be configured. In this case, since the left and right seg display portions 440 are fixed in a state of being directed to the side (left and right direction) of the corresponding gaming machine, the seg display portion 440 is also received from a player at a distant position in the store. It is possible to easily view the information displayed on the screen, it is possible to easily select the player's base, and the effect of increasing the operating rate of the gaming machine can be expected.

  Moreover, you may comprise the data display apparatus provided with the non-movable display part by two different display systems. For example, a data display device in which a segment display unit (three digits) and a liquid crystal display unit are arranged side by side on the front surface of the housing may be configured.

[5-3. Management device]
In the above embodiment, the management apparatus according to the present invention has been described as the hall computer 600, but the ball management computer 800 and the medal management computer 16 may be replaced with the hall computer 600 as the management apparatus according to the present invention.

  In addition, a member management computer that manages member information and a card management computer that manages card information may be used as the management apparatus according to the present invention. Further, a computer having two or more functions among these management computers may be used as the management apparatus according to the present invention.

  Specifically, in the above embodiment, the processing for generating and distributing the display device setting data 691 and the unit setting data 693 in the management processing executed by the hall computer 600 is not the hole computer 600 but the ball management computer. It may be executed by a management device such as 800, a member management computer, or a card management computer.

[5-4. Game system]
The gaming system described in the above embodiment is merely an example of a gaming system for realizing the present invention, and it is needless to say that the design can be changed as appropriate.

  For example, in the above embodiment, a gaming system is configured in which a signal output from a gaming machine is directly input to the gaming device. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a signal output from the gaming machine is sent to the management device. A gaming system may be configured in which these signals are input to the gaming device indirectly through the management device.

  In the above-described embodiment, the card unit 300 is described as including the counting payout unit 380 that is a counting unit. However, the gaming apparatus may not include the counting unit. For example, the hall computer 600 may calculate the number of balls and the number of difference balls based on the gaming machine signal output from each gaming machine 1.

  Specifically, for example, the hall computer 600 calculates the number of difference balls for each gaming machine 1 based on the prize ball signal output from the gaming machine 1 and the out signal output from the out ball detector 200. Thus, information such as the number of counting balls and the number of difference balls may be output to the gaming device.

  Further, although different from the above-described embodiment, when the role ratio or the linkage ratio calculated in the gaming machine 1 is an inappropriate value, a signal indicating that fact (for example, a payout rate abnormality signal) is sent to the gaming device. The game device may be configured to output a predetermined notification based on a payout rate abnormality signal output from the gaming machine 1.

  For example, when the gaming device is the data display device 400, 1200, when the data display device 400, 1200 receives a payout rate abnormality signal from the corresponding gaming machine 1, it indicates that the payout rate is inappropriate. Players and stores indicate that the payout rate is inappropriate by displaying a message on the display unit, outputting a similar voice message or warning sound from the sound output unit, or emitting the light emitting unit in red. You may make it notify to the store clerk. The same applies to the case where the gaming device is the card unit 300.

  In the above embodiment, the gaming device does not calculate the payout rate actual measurement value, but the management device such as the hall computer 600 outputs the gaming machine signal and out-ball detector output from the gaming machine 1. A payout rate actual value may be calculated based on the out signal output from 200, and the calculated payout rate may be output to the gaming device. In this case, the gaming device determines the suitability of the actual payout rate based on the actual payout rate input from the management device and the pre-set payout rate reference range or payout rate reference value. The payout rate suitability information display similar to that in the embodiment may be performed.

  Further, in this case, after the management device such as the hall computer 600 calculates the actual payout rate, the actual payout rate calculated and the payout rate reference range of the corresponding gaming machine 1 stored in advance or the payout Whether the payout rate actual measurement value is appropriate or not may be determined based on the rate reference value, and the determination result may be output to the gaming device. In this case, when the game device inputs a determination result that the payout rate actual value is inappropriate from the management device, the game device displays a message indicating that the payout rate is inappropriate on the display unit, If a similar voice message or warning sound is output from the sound output unit or the light emitting unit emits red light to notify the player or store clerk that the payout rate is inappropriate. Good.

  In the above embodiment, the payout rate suitability information is displayed on the display unit of the gaming apparatus. However, this may be displayed on the display unit 625 of the hall computer 600. By doing in this way, the manager of the store can grasp the gaming machine whose payout rate may be inappropriate, and opens the glass door frame 3a of the gaming machine 1 to the store clerk. An instruction can be given to confirm the display monitor 26.

  Further, the hall computer 600 may total the game history in each gaming machine 1 and display the total data on the display unit 625, or obtain the total data of the game history from the data display devices 400 and 1200. The aggregated data may be displayed on the display unit 625. By doing in this way, the manager of the store can grasp the game history in each gaming machine.

  Further, the ball management computer 800 may count the number of balls acquired by the player by the game in each gaming machine 1 and display the total data on the display unit 830, or the ball acquired from the card unit 300. The total data of the number may be acquired and the total data may be displayed on the display unit 830. By doing in this way, the manager of the store can grasp the number of balls acquired by the player in the game with each gaming machine.

  The gaming system according to the present invention also relates to a gaming system comprising the gaming machine such as the encapsulated pachinko gaming machine or the gaming point type slot machine described above, and a management device for managing gaming information of these gaming machines. The same applies.

[5-5. Display method]
In the above embodiment, the display unit included in the data display device 400 is exemplified by the liquid crystal display unit 430 using the liquid crystal display method (first display method) and the seg display unit 440 using the segment display method (second display method). However, the display method of the display unit is not limited to these. For example, an EL display method using EL (electroluminescence) or a dot display method using dots may be applied. It is free to use any combination of these display methods.

  Further, in the data display device 400, the segment display unit 440 is configured by a three-digit large 7-segment display, so that the segment display unit 440 can be easily obtained from a player who is away from the device in the store. It was configured to be visible. However, this is merely an example, and the display unit according to the second display method may be capable of displaying information by a method with higher visibility from a distance compared to the first display method. For example, the luminance for displaying information on the second display unit may be higher than the luminance for displaying information on the first display unit. Further, the second display unit is configured such that the viewing angle of the second display unit (the angle at which information can be normally viewed when the display unit is viewed obliquely) is wider than the viewing angle of the first display unit. May be.

[5-6. Display mode]
The display mode in the gaming apparatus described in the above embodiment is merely an example, and the setting can be changed as appropriate. For example, the segment display unit 440 of the data display device 400 described in the above embodiment can display various information related to the game of the corresponding gaming machine 1 such as the number of jackpots, the number of balls, the count, and the jackpot symbol. Although it is possible, you may change the display mode at the time of displaying these information on the segment display part 440. FIG. As an example, a case where the number of big hits is displayed will be described.

  As described above, the segment display unit 440 includes a three-digit seven-segment display (segment). For example, when the number of big hits is 0, all the segments are lit in rainbow colors (rainbow). That is, the seg representing the numerical value of 0 corresponding to each digit of the three-digit seg “000” is lit while being sequentially changed with the colors constituting the rainbow. The order and color arrangement of the colors for lighting the segments may be the same or different for each digit.

  Next, if the number of big hits has changed, the segments of digits unnecessary for displaying the number of big hits are turned off, and the segments of digits required for displaying the number of big hits are turned on in a single color. For example, when a big hit occurs in the corresponding gaming machine with the number of big hits being zero, the upper two digits (thousands and hundreds) of the three digits that are lit in rainbow colors Turn off the first segment and turn on only the first segment in a single color. That is, the display of the segment is “1” of only one digit, and the segment representing the numerical value of 1 is lit in a single color (for example, yellow). The color for lighting the segment may be any number as long as it is a single color. If the number of big hits is two digits, the tenth and first digit segments are lit in a single color. If the number of big hits is three digits, all digit segments are lit in a single color. You can do it.

  By doing the above, when the number of big hits is 0, the lighting of the three-digit seg in rainbow can bring out the glory as if it were an illumination, and the decorativeness of the gaming device Can be increased. In addition, when the number of big hits changes, the number of big hits can be clarified by lighting a segment with a single color of only the necessary digits, and the player can easily check the number of big hits.

  In the above example, the color for lighting the seg in a single color may be changed according to the number of big hits. For example, when the number of big hits is 1 to 9, the segment is lit in yellow, when it is 10 to 19 times, it is green, and when it is more than 20 times, it is red. Also good. Further, in this case, the color for lighting the seg in a single color may be changed according to the number of consecutive days in the probability variation state. By doing in this way, the appeal effect with respect to a player can be heightened.

  In the above example, when the number of big hits is 0, all three digits of the 0 seg are turned on. However, only the one-digit 0 seg may be turned on. Further, when the number of big hits is changed, the unnecessary digit segment is turned off. However, the unnecessary digit segment may be turned on.

  In this example, the case where the number of jackpots is displayed as a segment is described as an example, but the same applies to the case where information related to a game other than the number of jackpots (number of balls, count, jackpot symbol, etc.) is displayed in a segment. The description is omitted.

  In addition, the above example can be similarly applied to any game device as long as it is a game device including a display unit capable of segment display. For example, as described above, the above display mode can be similarly applied to a data display device in which a segment display unit (three digits) and a liquid crystal display unit are arranged side by side on the front surface of the housing. Is possible.

[5-7. Standby state]
If the gaming machine has not been played for a certain period of time, it is highly likely that the player has left the seat due to a break or the like. Therefore, in the above embodiment, when the data display device 400 executes a game determination process for determining whether or not a game is being performed in the corresponding gaming machine 1, and determines that a game is not being performed, You may make it set to a standby state (standby state). In the game determination process, for example, it is determined whether or not a gaming machine signal has been received from a corresponding gaming machine for a certain period of time (for example, 5 minutes), and if it is determined that the gaming machine signal has not been received, a game is being performed. It can be determined that there is no.

  In this case, the data display device 400 reduces the brightness when displaying information on the liquid crystal display unit 430 or the segment display unit 440, or hides some of the displayed information. Then, the own device is controlled to a standby state. If it is determined that the game has started on the corresponding gaming machine 1, the standby state is canceled and the normal state is controlled. As a result, while a game is not being played on the corresponding gaming machine, it is possible to reduce the appeal effect to surrounding players and the like and to reduce power consumption.

  The above setting may be manually performed by a store clerk by a setting operation using a setting remote controller, a setting operation on the operation unit of the data display device, or the like.

[5-8. Timing information]
In the above embodiment, the data display device 400 includes the clock unit 470, and the processing unit 410 executes the operation effect based on the time information output from the clock unit 470. However, instead of doing this, the data display device 400 may execute an operation effect based on a command (a kind of time information) from a host device such as the hall computer 600.

[5-9. Game device settings]
In the above embodiment, it has been described that the gaming device such as the data display device 400 performs various settings based on the setting data provided from the management device such as the hall computer 600. In this case, all the gaming devices installed in the store may be set collectively, group setting may be performed for each corresponding gaming machine model, or group setting may be performed for each gaming island. Alternatively, individual setting may be performed for each unit. By performing group setting in units of the same model or game island, it is possible to share the operation of gaming devices installed on the same model or the same game island, and improve the appearance.

  In addition to the above, the game device may perform setting based on a setting signal received from the setting remote controller 700 by operation of a store manager or employee, or setting operation on the operation unit The gaming device may perform the setting based on the reception of the game. Further, the setting data may be stored in advance in the storage unit of the gaming device, and the gaming device may be able to perform the setting by performing a setting operation from the operation unit by a store employee.

  Furthermore, it is possible to download setting information from an external device (for example, a server installed in a card company) installed outside the store using the communication network N such as the Internet, and using the downloaded setting information. The gaming device may be able to make settings.

  Basically, it is desirable that the setting of the above gaming device is performed by a store employee during non-business such as after the store is closed or before the store is started. That is, as a mode related to the setting of the gaming device, the non-business mode may be defined in the device program, and the gaming device may be set to the non-business mode.

[5-10. Opening and closing timing]
In the above-described embodiment, the hall computer 600 can set the execution timing of the motion effect, whether or not the motion effect is performed in the data display device 400, the mode of the motion effect, and the like. As another example of setting on the hall computer 600 side, the opening / closing timing for opening / closing the door 403 of the data display device 400 may be settable.

FIG. 77 is a diagram showing an example of the opening / closing timing setting table in this case.
The opening / closing timing setting table stores opening / closing timings and opening / closing modes in association with each other.
In this example, the opening / closing mode “A” is set at the opening / closing timing “opening”, the opening / closing mode “C” is set at the opening / closing timing “13:00”, and the opening / closing mode “D” is set at the opening / closing timing “17:00”. The opening / closing timing “B” is defined at the opening / closing timing “at the time of closing”. By performing such setting in units of game machines 1 and game islands provided corresponding to the data display device 400, the door 403 of the data display device 400 corresponding to the same model and the same game island is opened and closed. It is possible to arrange the timings and improve the appearance.

[5-11. Irradiation effect]
In the above embodiment, when the gaming device determines that the payout rate is inappropriate, the gaming device may execute an irradiation effect in order to notify the player or the store clerk. On the other hand, the normal irradiation effect is executed while the payout rate is determined to be appropriate, but when the payout rate is determined to be inappropriate, the irradiation effect being executed is stopped. Also good.

  In this case, the irradiation mode in the irradiation effect may be changed based on the payout rate error. Specifically, for example, the illuminance and the emission color are changed according to the payout rate error, and as the payout rate error increases, the illuminance in the irradiation effect is increased or the emission color in the irradiation effect is changed from “green → yellow → It may be changed to “red”. You may change the irradiation direction and irradiation area | region of light.

[5-12. mode]
The irradiation effect mode described in the above embodiment is merely an example, and it is needless to say that the setting can be changed as appropriate. In addition to the production mode, crime prevention mode, and maintenance mode described in the above embodiment, a special production mode when a special production such as a big hit running production is executed, or the corresponding gaming machine or gaming device has failed. Other types of modes such as an “abnormal mode” when an abnormality such as the above occurs, and a “payout rate mode” corresponding to the payout rate as described above may be provided.

  In addition, as the production mode, a plurality of production modes with different irradiation modes may be provided, and as the crime prevention mode, a plurality of crime prevention with different body parts (face, hand, etc.) of the player to be irradiated A mode may be provided.

  In the above embodiment, the gaming device such as the data display device 400 or 1200 receives the mode instruction signal output from the management device such as the hall computer 600 or the gaming machine signal output from the corresponding gaming machine 1. Based on this, it has been described that the irradiation mode is changed. In this case, the gaming device may change the irradiation mode based on the number of times signals are received from these external devices.

  Specifically, for example, a mode switching signal for switching modes is output from the management device to the gaming device. The mode switching signal is, for example, a simple signal of only “ON / OFF”, and the gaming apparatus switches the irradiation effect mode according to the number of times the mode switching signal is received from the management apparatus. For example, when the production mode is set as the initial setting, when the mode switching signal is received once, the mode is switched from the production mode to the crime prevention mode, and when the mode switching signal is received twice, the mode is changed. You may switch from production mode to maintenance mode.

  Further, each time the gaming device receives a mode switching signal from the management device, the mode of irradiation effect may be switched sequentially. For example, when the production mode is set as the initial setting, when the mode switching signal is received for the first time, the mode is switched from the production mode to the crime prevention mode, and when the mode switching signal is received for the second time, When the mode is switched from the security mode to the maintenance mode and the mode switching signal is received for the third time, the mode may be switched from the maintenance mode to the effect mode.

  Further, the gaming device may switch the mode based on a signal indicating an abnormality such as a security signal, an error signal, or a door opening signal output from the corresponding gaming machine 1. For example, when a security signal is received from the corresponding gaming machine 1, the mode may be switched from the production mode to the crime prevention mode.

  In addition to these, the gaming device switches modes according to a mode switching operation to the operation unit by a store clerk or the like, or reception of a mode switching signal transmitted from the setting remote controller 700. Also good.

[5-13. Configuration of light emitting unit]
In the above-described embodiment, the light emitting unit in which the frame body in which the light emitting body is enclosed rotates is described as an example. However, this is merely an example, and the design of the configuration of the light emitting unit can be changed as appropriate. It is. For example, you may comprise the light emission part which can rotate the light-emitting body enclosed by the frame instead of rotating a frame. In addition to this, any conventionally known configuration can be applied to the configuration of the light emitting unit as the movable body.

  In addition, as in the above embodiment, the light emitting unit does not necessarily have to be configured as a movable body. For example, a light emitting unit composed of a plurality of non-movable (fixed) light emitters having directivity is arranged in the data display device 400, and the light emission mode of these light emitters is changed to realize an irradiation effect. You may make it do.

  In this case, in order to enhance the effect, it is desirable that at least a part of the irradiation areas by the plurality of light emitters overlap as in the above embodiment. Specifically, for example, in the design stage of the gaming apparatus, each of the light emitters is positioned such that the irradiation regions overlap each other for at least two or more of the light emitters. Determine the irradiation direction. Then, after the gaming device is installed in the store, the processing unit of the gaming device is set according to the setting via the hall computer 600, the setting remote controller 700, or the setting via the operation unit of the gaming device, Control may be performed so that a light emitter that emits light is selected from a plurality of light emitters to emit light.

  In addition, it is needless to say that the design of the configuration of the light emitting unit provided in the gaming device described in the above embodiment, more specifically, the installation position and the number of installation of LEDs for irradiation effects can be changed as appropriate. is there.

[5-14. Irradiation target]
In the above-described embodiment, the gaming device such as the data display devices 400 and 1200 has been described as performing the irradiation effect of irradiating light toward the front area of the corresponding gaming machine. However, in addition to this, the gaming apparatus may execute an irradiation effect of irradiating light toward the corresponding gaming machine itself. In this case, the gaming machine itself includes not only the front part of the housing on which the board surface of the gaming machine is formed, but also a signboard part configured as a part of the gaming machine in order to notify the player of various information. It is a concept that also includes

FIG. 78 is a diagram showing an example of an irradiation effect in this case.
In this figure, the gaming machine 1 described in the above embodiment and the data display device 400 provided corresponding thereto are illustrated. In this figure, a signboard portion is formed as a part of the casing on the right side portion of the casing of the gaming machine 1 so as to protrude to the near side. In the signboard section, information such as model information and store information is listed on the inner surface (the player's surface).

  Also, in this figure, the door 403 provided on the right side of the data display device 400 is opened inward from the vertical state via the hinge 405, and the appeal LED 480e provided at the lower portion of the second display area. Therefore, light is irradiated toward the inner surface of the signboard. Adjustment of the angle of the door 403 may be performed manually by a store clerk or the data display device 400. By doing in this way, it becomes possible to alert | report various information to the player who is playing with the said game machine 1. FIG.

  In addition, the above is an example of irradiating light to the gaming machine itself, but other than this, for example, an irradiation effect of irradiating light to an advertisement part such as an advertisement installed adjacent to the gaming machine at the end of the gaming island May be executed.

FIG. 79 is a diagram showing an example of an irradiation effect in this case.
Also in this figure, the gaming machine 1 described in the above embodiment and the data display device 400 provided corresponding thereto are illustrated. In this figure, on the right side of the gaming machine 1 at the end of the game island, an advertising board with an advertisement composed of the model name and specifications of the model installed on the game island, an image of a character appearing on the model, etc. Is installed.

  Further, the configuration of the data display device 400 is slightly different from that of the above-described embodiment. In this data display device 400, in addition to the appeal LEDs 480d and 480e on the front surface (outer surface) of the door 403, the rear surface (inside Two appeal LEDs 480f and two appeal LEDs 480g are respectively formed on the upper and lower portions of the surface. In this figure, the door 403 provided on the right side of the front surface of the data display device 400 is opened to the outside of the vertical state via the hinge 405, and the appeal LED 480g formed at the lower portion is used to display the advertising board. Light is shining on. By doing in this way, it becomes possible to advertise various information to the player who has visited the store.

  In addition, in the above, you may make it irradiate light toward corresponding game machine itself (for example, board surface) with appeal LED480f or appeal LED480g. By doing in this way, it becomes possible to raise a production effect more.

  Alternatively, a light emitter such as an LED may be formed on the entire inner surface of the door 403 so that light is emitted toward the corresponding gaming machine itself (including a signboard) or a billboard.

  In addition, as described above, the present invention is not limited to the example in which light is emitted by the LED configured on the inner surface of the door portion 403, and in any gaming device provided corresponding to the gaming machine, the gaming machine itself (signboard portion) LED) or the like is formed at a position where the LED can be irradiated and light is irradiated, or the LED or other light emitter is formed at a position where the advertising board can be irradiated and light is irradiated. Good.

  Furthermore, you may make it irradiate light not only to a corresponding game machine but to a surrounding game machine etc. with LED comprised in the door part 403. FIG.

[5-15. Irradiation mode]
The irradiation mode in the irradiation effect described in the above embodiment is merely an example, and it is needless to say that the design can be changed as appropriate. Not only the irradiation direction and irradiation area of the light emitting part, but also various aspects such as the emission color of the light emitting part, the lighting / flashing pattern of the light emitting part, and the vibration pattern of the light emitting part, and irradiation effects based on these irradiation aspects May be executed.

[5-16. Update display control]
The information that can be updated and displayed as numerical information in the above embodiment is not limited to the information described in the above embodiment, for example, the number of stored balls that is a stored game value stored by the player (in the case of a pachinko gaming machine) Or the number of stored medals (for slot machines). Further, the remaining amount (prepaid balance or remaining card amount) that is a valuable value possessed by the game card for the player to play a game on the gaming machine may be used.

  Further, the number of rotations (start count) associated with a game on the gaming machine may be numerical information. In this case, addition update display control is executed to increase the number of revolutions one by one in accordance with the game. However, when winning a big hit or a bonus, in order to reset the start count to “0” Subtraction update display control for subtracting the number of rotations to 0 may be executed.

  In addition, as described above, some slot machines can be controlled in the ART state, and in such slot machines, an additional lottery is performed, and the number of games corresponding to the number of winning times is determined in the ART state. There is a gaming machine that can be added to the number of remaining games. Therefore, in a slot machine that can execute such an increase in the number of games, and a slot machine that can externally output a signal that can specify the number of added games (for example, a signal that indicates the number of added games) The gaming device may specify the number of added games based on a signal output from the corresponding slot machine, and update and control the number of remaining games.

[5-17. Image projection effect]
In addition to the irradiation effects described in the above embodiment, the gaming device may be able to execute the image projection effects. Specifically, for example, a projector may be built in the gaming device, and an image of a character or a reach scene that appears in the model of the corresponding gaming machine 1 may be projected by the projector.

  In this case, the image may be projected toward the front area of the gaming machine, but in order not to hinder the game of the player, for example, a screen is formed at a predetermined position in the ceiling direction of the store to project the image. Alternatively, a screen may be formed on the aforementioned signboard part or a partition plate that partitions the gaming machines to project an image.

  The image to be projected may be a still image or a moving image (video). By using the irradiation effect and the image projection effect together, the effect can be further enhanced.

[5-18. Relative value]
In the above embodiment, the relative value according to the present invention has been described as the payout rate calculated as the ratio of the payout number to the out number, but the relative value according to the present invention is not limited to this.

  Specifically, a gaming device (information display device) such as the data display device 400, 1200 or the card unit 300 calculates the difference number calculated as the difference between the number of outs and the number of payouts as a relative value. You may make it display. In this case, the reference relative information according to the present invention may be a reference value (design value) for the number of difference balls or a reference range (design range) for the number of difference balls.

  In addition, the gaming apparatus may calculate and display the connection ratio and the role ratio as relative values, similarly to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above embodiment.

  In addition, when the gaming apparatus calculates the various relative values, a short-term relative value or a cumulative relative value may be calculated in the same manner as the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above embodiment. . For example, when calculating the payout rate, a short-term payout rate (short-term payout rate) or a cumulative payout rate (cumulative payout rate) may be calculated.

[5-19. Specific information]
In the above embodiment, the specific information is described as information such as payout rate error and payout rate suitability information. However, the specific information is not limited to these, and any information based on the reference relative information and the measured relative value may be used. Arbitrary information can be specified information. If the relative value is used as the payout rate as in the above embodiment, the payout rate reference information and the payout rate actual value can be compared with each other (for example, the payout rate reference value and the payout rate actual value are displayed side by side. ), Information indicating numerically how much the actually measured payout rate is deviated from the payout rate reference lower limit value or the payout rate reference upper limit value, and the like may be displayed as the specific information.

[5-20. Calculation and display of withdrawal information]
In the above embodiment, the gaming device calculates the payout rate and payout rate information for both of the two game states, that is, the non-big hit and low base state and the non-big hit and high base state of the gaming machine 1. It was explained as performing the display. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and one of the gaming states may be excluded from the target for which the gaming device calculates the payout rate or displays the payout rate information.

  Unlike the high base state, the low base state is a game state that is disadvantageous to the player, so that the payout rate during the non-hit and low base state can be said to be noticeable information for the player. Therefore, for example, the non-big hit and high base state may be excluded from the target, and the payout rate may be calculated and the payout rate information may be displayed only when the gaming device is not in the big hit and low base state.

[5-21. Types of signals output from gaming machines]
In the embodiment described above, the gaming machine signal is output from the gaming machine 1 to the external device, and the out signal is output from the out ball detector 200 provided on the back surface of the gaming machine 1 to the external device. However, this is not necessarily the case. A gaming machine having an out switch for detecting a game ball that has passed through each winning opening or out port is configured, and the number of game balls detected by the out switch is specified. Each time the number of balls (for example, 10) is reached, an out signal of one pulse may be output directly from the gaming machine to the external device.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the first specified number of balls when the prize ball signal is output from the gaming machine 1 has been described as “10 balls”. The specified number of balls may be “one ball”. Similarly, for the out signal, the second specified number of balls may be “one ball”.

  In addition to the types of signals described in the above embodiment, the types of signals to be output from the gaming machine to the external device can be appropriately changed in design.

FIG. 80 is a diagram illustrating another example of signals output from the gaming machine to the external device.
From this gaming machine, two types of signals, a test signal and an information output signal, are output from the external output board.

The test signal is a signal used for confirming the performance of the gaming machine, and is a signal that enables an external test apparatus in the testing organization to inspect (confirm) the operation and state of the gaming machine.
On the other hand, the information output signal is a signal for notifying the external device of information related to the gaming machine.

  In this case, the test signal may include, for example, a signal indicating that the accessory continuous operating device is operating, a signal indicating that the second starting port is operating, and a signal indicating that the prize winning port is operating. The information output signal can include a start signal, a prize ball signal, and a security signal.

  The accessory continuous operation device is a device that operates when a winning is made with a specific symbol that triggers a transition to a probable change state in a gaming machine. When the prize winning opening is opened by the operation of the accessory continuous operation device, the gaming machine is controlled to the big hit gaming state, and then controlled to the probability changing state. In addition, when the big prize opening is opened without depending on the operation of the accessory continuous operation device, a so-called small hit is made and the small hit gaming state is controlled.

The signal for continuous operation of the accessory continuously operating device is a signal that is turned on when the accessory continuous operating device is in an operating state.
The second start opening operating signal is a signal that is turned ON when the normally variable winning ball apparatus is operated and the second start winning opening is opened.
The special winning opening operating signal is a signal that is turned ON when the special variable winning ball apparatus is activated and the special winning opening is open.

  Based on the above test signal, it is possible to share the determination of the gaming state of the gaming machine such as the big hit gaming state, the small hit gaming state, the probability variation state, the short-time state, etc., and realize a simple determination of the gaming state. . In other words, it is possible to determine that the gaming machine is in the big hit gaming state while receiving the continuous operating device operating signal, and after the continuous operating device operating signal has been received, the gaming machine is in the probability change state. It can be determined that On the other hand, if the big winning opening operating signal is received without receiving the continuous operating device operating signal, it can be determined that the gaming machine is in the small hit gaming state. In addition, while the second start port signal is received, it can be determined that the gaming machine is in a time-short state.

  In the case where the above test signal is applied to the above-described embodiment, the gaming apparatus is configured such that the gaming machine is in the “non-big hit and low base state” and “non-big hit and high base state” based on the test signal. When it is determined which gaming state it is, and it is determined that it is “non-big hit and low base state”, it calculates the low base payout rate actual value, and it is determined that it is “non-big hit and high base state” The high base payout rate measured value may be calculated.

[5-22. Display of role / run ratio]
In the above embodiment, the gaming machine 1 internally calculates the role ratios, connection ratios, and the like from the gaming machine 1 to gaming devices (information display devices) such as the data display devices 400, 1200 and the card unit 300. The information may be output to the outside, and the gaming device may display the information input from the gaming machine 1 on the display unit.

[5-23. Display of gaming machines with abnormal payout rates]
In the above embodiment, the hall computer 600 may have an abnormality because the gaming device outputs to the hall computer 600 the ID (game machine ID) of the gaming machine for which the payout rate is determined to be inappropriate. A certain gaming machine 1 can be specified. Therefore, the processing unit 610 of the hall computer 600 color-codes the gaming machines that have received the gaming machine ID from the gaming device and displays them on the display unit 625 on the store layout screen showing the arrangement of all gaming machines in the store. You may make it. By doing in this way, the manager of the store can grasp the gaming machine 1 in which an abnormality may have occurred at a glance by the manager of the store.

[5-24. Settings in the management device]
In the above-described embodiment, the model information of the gaming machine 1 is stored in advance in the hall computer 600 that is a management device, and the payout rate reference information (the payout rate reference range and the payout rate reference value) is based on the model information. It was described as being provided to a gaming device. However, instead of doing this, for example, the hall computer 600 can download the model information from a server installed in the manufacturer of the gaming machine 1 so that the gaming machine 1 to be a new machine can be When installed in the system, the payout rate reference information of this new machine may be downloaded from the manufacturer's server. At this time, not only the payout rate reference information but also design information including information on the external output terminal of the gaming machine 1 and the type of gaming machine signal to be output may be downloaded from the manufacturer's server. Good.

  By doing so, the hall computer 600 can manage the calculation method of the payout rate and the determination method of the appropriateness of the payout rate for each model of the gaming machine.

[5-25. Display of game history and owned game value]
In the second embodiment described above, the data display devices 400 and 1200, which are a kind of gaming device, have been described as tallying game history information in the corresponding gaming machine 1 and displaying it on the display unit. The card unit 300 may perform this. That is, the card unit 300 which is a kind of gaming device may total the game history information based on the gaming machine signal output from the corresponding gaming machine 1 and display it on the liquid crystal display 313.

  In the above embodiment, the card unit 300, which is a type of gaming device, counts the number of acquired balls acquired by the player through the game on the corresponding gaming machine 1 and displays it on the liquid crystal display 313. Although described, this may be performed by the data display devices 400 and 1200. That is, the data display devices 400 and 1200, which are a kind of gaming device, may calculate the number of acquired balls based on the gaming machine signal output from the corresponding gaming machine 1 and display it on the display unit. .

  Further, the game history information of each gaming machine 1 may be displayed on the display unit 625 of the hall computer 600 or the display unit 830 of the ball management computer 800 which is a kind of management device. In this case, the hall computer 600 may acquire game history information from the data display devices 400 and 1200, or the processing unit 610 may obtain game history information based on the gaming machine signal output from each gaming machine 1. You may make it total. The ball management computer 800 may acquire game history information from the hall computer 600.

  Further, the number of acquired balls acquired by the player by the game in each gaming machine 1 may be displayed on the display unit 625 of the hall computer 600 or the display unit 830 of the ball management computer 800 which is a kind of management device. . In this case, the hall computer 600 may acquire the acquired number of balls from the card unit 300, or the processing unit 610 may count the acquired number of balls based on the gaming machine signal output from each gaming machine 1. It may be. The ball management computer 800 may acquire information on the number of acquired balls from the card unit 300 or the hall computer 600.

[5-26. Game information]
In the above embodiment, the gaming device has been described as displaying game history information (total game history information, personal game history information, etc.) and information such as the number of acquired balls as game information. The possible information is not limited to this information.

  Depending on the store where the gaming machine is installed, there is a store that permits entry between gaming machines with different loan rates. Taking a pachinko machine as an example, this includes a transfer from a 4-yen pachinko to a 1-yen pachinko or a 1-yen pachinko to a 4-yen pachinko. Therefore, for example, information regarding payout of stored balls (or holding balls) in gaming machines 1 having different loan rates may be displayed as game information.

  Specifically, information such as the number and time of storage balls paid out upon entry and the number of balls paid out may be displayed as game information. Such information is collected by a management device such as the ball management computer 800, and the collected information is output indirectly from the management device to a gaming device via a unit (card unit or inter-counter counting unit). Or output directly from the management device to the gaming device.

In the above embodiment, the gaming device has been described as being capable of displaying two types of game history information, that is, general game history information and individual game history information as game history information. However, in addition to this, detailed game history information that is more detailed information of one game history information may be displayed as game history information.
Specifically, for the number of jackpots (total, probability change, normal) included in the game history information, not only the number of jackpots of the day but also the number of jackpots for the past predetermined period (for example, the past three days) as detailed game history information You may make it display, and it may be made to display not only the current sunrise ball graph but also the daily output ball graph and the stand-by output game graph as detailed game history information.

[5-27. recoding media]
A recording medium possessed by a player and usable for a game on a gaming machine is not limited to a game card such as a ball card described in the above embodiment. For example, a mobile phone such as a smartphone possessed by a player, or a player terminal such as a tablet terminal or PDA may be used as the recording medium.

  Specifically, for example, when a smartphone, which is an IC-compatible player terminal, has been deceived by an IC reader provided in a gaming device, the recording medium is accepted, and the player makes a deposit with electronic money and the gaming machine It may be possible to play with. In addition, when the card return button is pressed, a reception cancellation standby state is set. When the same smartphone as the smartphone being received in this reception cancellation standby state is deceived by the IC reader, the reception of the recording medium is canceled. May be.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 200 Out ball detector 250 Portable terminal 300 Card unit 400 Data display device 500 Inter-unit counting unit 600 Hall computer 700 Remote control for setting 800 Ball management computer 900 Stand terminal 950 Security camera 980 Server 1000 Game system 1200 Data display apparatus

Claims (1)

A gaming device capable of displaying information related to a game of a corresponding gaming machine,
A first display unit according to a first display method;
A second display unit according to a second display method different from the first display method;
Display control means for controlling display of each of the first display unit and the second display unit;
With
The display control means includes a first display pattern that performs display linked with the first display unit and the second display unit, and second display that performs independent display between the first display unit and the second display unit. It is possible to execute control to display information on the game of the corresponding gaming machine on the first display unit and the second display unit according to the display pattern.
A gaming device characterized by that.

Images